Dynabook UPA3539WL Wireless WiFi Link 4965AG User Manual Manual

Download:
Mirror Download [FCC.gov]
Document ID	873201
Application ID	x3ODlbpK5nOsCagJemov1Q==
Document Description	User Manual
Short Term Confidential	No
Permanent Confidential	No
Supercede	No
Document Type	User Manual
Display Format	Adobe Acrobat PDF - pdf
Filesize	321.38kB (4017232 bits)
Date Submitted	2007-11-28 00:00:00
Date Available	2008-01-12 00:00:00
Creation Date	2007-10-26 13:28:25
Producing Software	Acrobat Distiller 5.0.5 (Windows)
Document Lastmod	2007-10-26 13:28:25
Document Title	Manual.pdf
Document Creator	PScript5.dll Version 5.2.2
Document Author:	sradecki

User’s Manual
PORTÉGÉ M700/M710
Table of Contents
Copyright. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . vi
Disclaimer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . vi
Trademarks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . vi
FCC information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . vii
EU Conformity Statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . viii
VCCI Class B Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . viii
Modem warning notice. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . viii
Japan regulations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ix
Instructions for IC CS-03 certified equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xii
Notes for Users in Australia and New Zealand . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xiii
Following information is only for EU-member states: . . . . . . . . . . . xvi
Description on Laser specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xvi
Preface
Conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xvii
General Precautions
Creating a computer-friendly environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xx
Stress injury . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xx
Heat injury . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxi
Pressure or impact damage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxi
PC Card overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxi
Mobile phones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxi
Instruction Manual for Safety and Comfort . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxi
Chapter 1
Getting Started
Equipment checklist. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
Getting Started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
System Recovery Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12
System Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13
Chapter 2
The Grand Tour
Front with the display closed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
Left side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
User’s Manual
ii
PORTÉGÉ M700/M710
Right side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
Back . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
Underside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
Front with the display open . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13
Optical disc drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15
AC adaptor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17
Chapter 3
Hardware, Utilities and Options
Hardware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
Special features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
TOSHIBA Value Added Package . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9
TOSHIBA Tablet PC Extension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
Utilities and Applications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
Optional devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14
Bridge media slot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18
Optional accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-45
Chapter 4
Operating Basics
Pointing Devices. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
Using the Tablet mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9
Using the Fingerprint Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17
Web Camera . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-25
Changing Ultra Slim Bay modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-26
Using optical disc drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-29
Writing CD/DVDs on DVD Super Multi drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-33
Media care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-40
Sound System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-41
Modem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-43
Wireless communications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-47
LAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-50
Computer Handling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-52
Using the Hard Disk Drive (HDD) Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-53
Heat dispersal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-55
Chapter 5
The Keyboard
Typewriter keys. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Function keys: F1 … F12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Soft keys: FN key combinations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Hot keys. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Windows special keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Keypad overlay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Generating ASCII characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Chapter 6
5-1
5-2
5-2
5-3
5-5
5-6
5-7
Power and Power-Up Modes
Power conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
Monitoring of power condition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
User’s Manual
iii
PORTÉGÉ M700/M710
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
TOSHIBA Password Utility. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-14
Tablet mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-18
Power-up modes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-18
Panel power on/off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-19
System Auto Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-19
Chapter 7
HW Setup & BIOS Setup
Accessing HW Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
HW Setup window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
BIOS Setup Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8
Chapter 8
Troubleshooting
Problem solving process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1
Hardware and system checklist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3
TOSHIBA support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-26
Appendix A
Specifications
Physical Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-1
Environmental Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-1
Appendix B
Display Controller and Video mode
Display controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-1
Video mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-1
Appendix C
AT Commands
Appendix D
S-registers
S-register values. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-1
AT command set result codes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-5
Appendix E
V.90
V.90 mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-1
AT Command. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-3
Appendix F
Wireless LAN
Card Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-1
Radio Characteristics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-2
Supported Frequency Sub-bands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-3
Appendix G
Intel® Matrix Storage Manager
Manually Setting up Windows (Windows Vista®) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-1
Manually Setting up Windows Manually (Windows XP) . . . . . . . . . . G-2
How to install Intel® Matrix Storage Manager on Windows XP or
Windows Vista®: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-3
Appendix H
Bluetooth wireless technology Interoperability
Bluetooth wireless technology and your Health . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . H-3
Regulatory statements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . H-3
Using Bluetooth™ Adaptor from TOSHIBA equipment in Japan. . . H-6
User’s Manual
iv
PORTÉGÉ M700/M710
Appendix I
AC Power Cord and Connectors
Certification agencies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I-1
Appendix J
TOSHIBA Anti-theft Protection Timer
Appendix K
Legal Footnotes
Non-applicable Icons*1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CPU*2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Memory (Main System)*3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Battery Life*4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Hard Disk Drive (HDD) Capacity*5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LCD*6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Graphics Processor Unit ("GPU")*7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Wireless LAN*8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Copy Protection*9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Images*10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
K-1
K-1
K-2
K-3
K-3
K-3
K-3
K-4
K-4
K-4
Glossary
Index
User’s Manual
PORTÉGÉ M700/M710
Copyright
© 2007 by TOSHIBA Corporation. All rights reserved. Under the copyright
laws, this manual cannot be reproduced in any form without the prior
written permission of TOSHIBA. No patent liability is assumed, with respect
to the use of the information contained herein.
TOSHIBA PORTÉGÉ M700/M710 Portable Personal Computer User’s
Manual
First edition November 2007
Copyright authority for music, movies, computer programs, databases and
other intellectual property covered by copyright laws belongs to the author
or to the copyright owner. Copyrighted material can be reproduced only for
personal use or use within the home. Any other use beyond that stipulated
above (including conversion to digital format, alteration, transfer of copied
material and distribution on a network) without the permission of the
copyright owner is a violation of copyright or author's rights and is subject
to civil damages or criminal action. Please comply with copyright laws in
making any reproduction from this manual.
Disclaimer
This manual has been validated and reviewed for accuracy. The
instructions and descriptions it contains are accurate for the TOSHIBA
PORTÉGÉ M700/M710 Portable Personal Computer at the time of this
manual’s production. However, succeeding computers and manuals are
subject to change without notice. TOSHIBA assumes no liability for
damages incurred directly or indirectly from errors, omissions or
discrepancies between the computer and the manual.
Trademarks
IBM is a registered trademark and IBM PC is a trademark of International
Business Machines Corporation.
Intel, Intel SpeedStep, Intel Core and Centrino are trademarks or registered
trademarks of Intel Corporation.
Windows, Microsoft and Windows Vista are registered trademarks of
Microsoft Corporation.
Bluetooth is a trademark owned by its proprietor and used by TOSHIBA
under license.
InterVideo and WinDVD are registered trademarks of InterVideo Inc.
Photo CD is a trademark of Eastman Kodak.
Memory Stick and i.LINK are trademark and registered trademark of Sony
Corporation.
Other trademarks and registered trademarks not listed above may be used
in this manual.
User’s Manual
vi
PORTÉGÉ M700/M710
FCC information
FCC notice "Declaration of Conformity Information"
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a
Class B digital device, pursuant to part 15 of the FCC rules. These limits
are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference
in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can
radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance
with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio
communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not
occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful
interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by
turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct
the interference by one or more of the following measures:
■ Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
■ Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
■ Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to
which the receiver is connected.
■ Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.
Only peripherals complying with the FCC class B limits may be attached to
this equipment. Operation with non-compliant peripherals or peripherals
not recommended by TOSHIBA is likely to result in interference to radio
and TV reception. Shielded cables must be used between the external
devices and the computer’s external monitor port, Universal Serial Bus
(USB 2.0) ports, i.LINK (IEEE1394) port and microphone jack. Changes or
modifications made to this equipment, not expressly approved by
TOSHIBA or parties authorized by TOSHIBA could void the user’s
authority to operate the equipment.
FCC conditions
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to
the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired operation.
Contact
Address:
Telephone:
User’s Manual
TOSHIBA America Information Systems, Inc.
9740 Irvine Boulevard
Irvine, California 92618-1697
(949) 583-3000
vii
PORTÉGÉ M700/M710
EU Conformity Statement
This product and - if applicable - the supplied accessories too are marked
with "CE" and comply therefore with the applicable harmonized European
standards listed under the Low Voltage Directive 2006/95/EC, the EMC
Directive 2004/108/EC and/or R&TTE Directive 1999/5/EC.
Responsible for CEmarking:
Manufacturer:
TOSHIBA EUROPE GMBH, Hammfelddamm 8,
41460 Neuss, Germany.
Toshiba Corporation, 1-1 Shibaura 1-chome,
Minato-ku, Tokyo, 105-8001, Japan
The complete official EU CE Declaration can be obtained on following
internet page:
http://epps.toshiba-teg.com/
VCCI Class B Information
Modem warning notice
This information is applicable to the models equipped with a built-in
modem.
Conformity Statement
The equipment has been approved to [Commission Decision "CTR21"] for
pan-European single terminal connection to the Public Switched Telephone
Network (PSTN).
However, due to differences between the individual PSTNs provided in
different countries/regions the approval does not, of itself, give an
unconditional assurance of successful operation on every PSTN network
termination point.
User’s Manual
viii
PORTÉGÉ M700/M710
In the event of problems, you should contact your equipment supplier in the
first instance.
Network Compatibility Statement
This product is designed to work with, and is compatible with the following
networks. It has been tested to and found to conform with the additional
requirements conditional in EG 201 121.
Germany
ATAAB AN005,AN006,AN007,AN009,AN010
and DE03,04,05,08,09,12,14,17
Greece
ATAAB AN005,AN006 and GR01,02,03,04
Portugal
ATAAB AN001,005,006,007,011 and
P03,04,08,10
Spain
ATAAB AN005,007,012, and ES01
Switzerland
ATAAB AN002
All other countries/regions ATAAB AN003,004
Specific switch settings or software setup are required for each network,
please refer to the relevant sections of the user guide for more details.
The hookflash (timed break register recall) function is subject to separate
national type approvals. It has not been tested for conformity to national
type regulations, and no guarantee of successful operation of that specific
function on specific national networks can be given.
Japan regulations
Region selection
If you are using the computer in Japan, technical regulations described in
the Telecommunications Business Law require that you select the Japan
region mode. It is illegal to use the modem in Japan with any other
selection.
Redial
Up to two redial attempts can be made. If more than two redial attempts are
made, the modem will return Black Listed. If you are experiencing
problems with the Black Listed code, set the interval between redials at one
minute or longer.
Japan’s Telecommunications Business Law permits up to two redials on
analogue telephones, but the redials must be made within a total of three
minutes.
The internal modem is approved by Japan Approvals Institute for
Telecommunications Equipment.
A05-0413001
User’s Manual
ix
PORTÉGÉ M700/M710
This label is located on the module.
Pursuant to FCC CFR 47, Part 68:
When you are ready to install or use the modem, call your local telephone
company and give them the following information:
■ The telephone number of the line to which you will connect the modem
■ The registration number that is located on the device
The FCC registration number of the modem will be found on either the
device which is to be installed, or, if already installed, on the bottom of
the computer outside of the main system label.
■ The Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) of the modem, which can vary.
For the REN of your modem, refer to your modem’s label.
The modem connects to the telephone line by means of a standard jack
called the USOC RJ11C.
Type of service
Your modem is designed to be used on standard-device telephone lines.
Connection to telephone company-provided coin service (central office
implemented systems) is prohibited. Connection to party lines service is
subject to state tariffs. If you have any questions about your telephone line,
such as how many pieces of equipment you can connect to it, the
telephone company will provide this information upon request.
User’s Manual
PORTÉGÉ M700/M710
Telephone company procedures
The goal of the telephone company is to provide you with the best service it
can. In order to do this, it may occasionally be necessary for them to make
changes in their equipment, operations, or procedures. If these changes
might affect your service or the operation of your equipment, the telephone
company will give you notice in writing to allow you to make any changes
necessary to maintain uninterrupted service.
If problems arise
If any of your telephone equipment is not operating properly, you should
immediately remove it from your telephone line, as it may cause harm to
the telephone network. If the telephone company notes a problem, they
may temporarily discontinue service. When practical, they will notify you in
advance of this disconnection. If advance notice is not feasible, you will be
notified as soon as possible. When you are notified, you will be given the
opportunity to correct the problem and informed of your right to file a
complaint with the FCC. In the event repairs are ever needed on your
modem, they should be performed by TOSHIBA Corporation or an
authorized representative of TOSHIBA Corporation.
Disconnection
If you should ever decide to permanently disconnect your modem from its
present line, please call the telephone company and let them know of this
change.
Fax branding
The Telephone Consumer Protection Act of 1991 makes it unlawful for any
person to use a computer or other electronic device to send any message
via a telephone fax machine unless such message clearly contains in a
margin at the top or bottom of each transmitted page or on the first page of
the transmission, the date and time it is sent and an identification of the
business, other entity or individual sending the message and the telephone
number of the sending machine or such business, other entity or individual.
In order to program this information into your fax modem, you should
complete the setup of your fax software before sending messages.
User’s Manual
xi
PORTÉGÉ M700/M710
Instructions for IC CS-03 certified equipment
1. The Industry Canada label identifies certified equipment. This
certification means that the equipment meets certain
telecommunications network protective, operational and safety
requirements as prescribed in the appropriate Terminal Equipment
Technical Requirements document(s). The Department does not
guarantee the equipment will operate to the user’s satisfaction.
Before installing this equipment, users should ensure that it is
permissible to be connected to the facilities of the local
telecommunications company. The equipment must also be installed
using an acceptable method of connection.
The customer should be aware that compliance with the above
conditions may not prevent degradation of service in some situations.
Repairs to certified equipment should be coordinated by a
representative designated by the supplier. Any repairs or alterations
made by the user to this equipment, or equipment malfunctions, may
give the telecommunications company cause to request the user to
disconnect the equipment.
Users should ensure for their own protection that the electrical ground
connections of the power utility, telephone lines and internal metallic
water pipe systems, if present, are connected together. This precaution
may be particularly important in rural areas.
Users should not attempt to make such connections themselves, but
should contact the appropriate electric inspection authority, or electrician,
as appropriate.
2. The user manual of analog equipment must contain the equipment’s
Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) and an explanation notice similar to
the following:
The Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) of the modem, which can vary.
For the REN of your modem, refer to your modem’s label.
The Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) assigned to each terminal device
provides an indication of the maximum number of terminals allowed to be
connected to a telephone interface. The termination on an interface may
consist of any combination of devices subject only to the requirement that
the sum of the Ringer Equivalence Numbers of all the devices does not
exceed 5.
3. The standard connecting arrangement (telephone jack type) for this
equipment is jack type(s): USOC RJ11C.
The IC registration number of the modem is shown below.
Canada: 4005B-DELPHI
User’s Manual
xii
PORTÉGÉ M700/M710
Notes for Users in Australia and New Zealand
Modem warning notice for Australia
Modems connected to the Australian telecoms network must have a valid
Austel permit. This modem has been designed to specifically configure to
ensure compliance with Austel standards when the country/region
selection is set to Australia. The use of other country/region setting while
the modem is attached to the Australian PSTN would result in you modem
being operated in a non-compliant manner. To verify that the
country/region is correctly set, enter the command ATI which displays the
currently active setting.
To set the country/region permanently to Australia, enter the following
command sequence:
AT%TE=1
ATS133=1
AT&F
AT&W
AT%TE=0
ATZ
Failure to set the modem to the Australia country/region setting as shown
above will result in the modem being operated in a non-compliant manner.
Consequently, there would be no permit in force for this equipment and the
Telecoms Act 1991 prescribes a penalty of $12,000 for the connection of
non-permitted equipment.
Notes for use of this device in New Zealand
■ The grant of a Telepermit for a device in no way indicates Telecom
acceptance of responsibility for the correct operation of that device
under all operating conditions. In particular the higher speeds at which
this modem is capable of operating depend on a specific network
implementation which is only one of many ways of delivering high
quality voice telephony to customers. Failure to operate should not be
reported as a fault to Telecom.
■ In addition to satisfactory line conditions a modem can only work
properly if:
a/ it is compatible with the modem at the other end of the call and.
b/ the application using the modem is compatible with the application
at the other end of the call - e.g., accessing the Internet requires
suitable software in addition to a modem.
■ This equipment shall not be used in any manner which could constitute
a nuisance to other Telecom customers.
User’s Manual
xiii
PORTÉGÉ M700/M710
■ Some parameters required for compliance with Telecom’s PTC
Specifications are dependent on the equipment (PC) associated with
this modem. The associated equipment shall be set to operate within
the following limits for compliance with Telecom Specifications:
a/ There shall be no more than 10 call attempts to the same number
within any 30 minute period for any single manual call initiation, and
b/ The equipment shall go on-hook for a period of not less than 30
seconds between the end of one attempt and the beginning of the
next.
c/ Automatic calls to different numbers shall be not less than 5
seconds apart.
■ Immediately disconnect this equipment should it become physically
damaged, and arrange for its disposal or repair.
■ The correct settings for use with this modem in New Zealand are as
follows:
ATB0 (CCITT operation)
AT&G2 (1800 Hz guard tone)
AT&P1 (Decadic dialing make-break ratio =33%/67%)
ATS0=0 (not auto answer)
ATS6=4 (Blind dial delay)
ATS7=less than 90 (Time to wait to carrier after dialing)
ATS10=less than 150 (loss of carrier to hangup delay, factory
default of 15 recommended)
ATS11=90 (DTMF dialing on/off duration=90 ms)
ATX2 (Dial tone detect, but not (U.S.A.) call progress detect)
■ When used in the Auto Answer mode, the S0 register must be set with a
value of 3 or 4. This ensures:
■ a person calling your modem will hear a short burst of ringing before
the modem answers. This confirms that the call has been
successfully switched through the network.
■ caller identification information (which occurs between the first and
second ring cadences) is not destroyed.
■ The preferred method of dialing is to use DTMF tones (ATDT...) as this
is faster and more reliable than pulse (decadic) dialing. If for some
reason you must use decadic dialing, your communications program
must be set up to record numbers using the following translation table
as this modem does not implement the New Zealand “Reverse Dialing”
standard.
Number to be dialed: 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Number to program into computer: 0 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
Note that where DTMF dialing is used, the numbers should be
entered normally.
User’s Manual
xiv
PORTÉGÉ M700/M710
■ The transmit level from this device is set at a fixed level and because of
this there may be circumstances where the performance is less than
optimal. Before reporting such occurrences as faults, please check the
line with a standard Telepermitted telephone, and only report a fault if
the phone performance is impaired.
■ It is recommended that this equipment be disconnected from the
Telecom line during electrical storms.
■ When relocating the equipment, always disconnect the Telecom line
connection before the power connection, and reconnect the power first.
■ This equipment may not be compatible with Telecom Distinctive Alert
cadences and services such as FaxAbility.
NOTE THAT FAULT CALLOUTS CAUSED BY ANY OF THE ABOVE
CAUSES MAY INCUR A CHARGE FROM TELECOM
General conditions
As required by PTC 100, please ensure that this office is advised of any
changes to the specifications of these products which might affect
compliance with the relevant PTC Specifications.
The grant of this Telepermit is specific to the above products with the
marketing description as stated on the Telepermit label artwork. The
Telepermit may not be assigned to other parties or other products without
Telecom approval.
A Telepermit artwork for each device is included from which you may
prepare any number of Telepermit labels subject to the general instructions
on format, size and color on the attached sheet.
The Telepermit label must be displayed on the product at all times as proof
to purchasers and service personnel that the product is able to be
legitimately connected to the Telecom network.
The Telepermit label may also be shown on the packaging of the product
and in the sales literature, as required in PTC 100.
The charge for a Telepermit assessment is $337.50. An additional charge
of $337.50 is payable where an assessment is based on reports against
non-Telecom New Zealand Specifications. $112.50 is charged for each
variation when submitted at the same time as the original.
An invoice for $NZ1237.50 will be sent under separate cover.
User’s Manual
xv
PORTÉGÉ M700/M710
Following information is only for EU-member states:
The use of the symbol indicates that this product may not be treated as
household waste. By ensuring this product is disposed of correctly, you will
help prevent potential negative consequences for the environment and
human health, which could otherwise be caused by inappropriate waste
handling of this product. For more detailed information about recycling of
this product, please contact your local city office, your household waste
disposal service or the shop where you purchased the product.
This symbol may not stick depending on the country and region where you
purchased.
Description on Laser specification
The optical disc drive such as DVD Super Multi drive that is used in this
computer is equipped with laser. The classification label with the following
sentence is affixed to the surface of the drive.
CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT
LASER KLASSE 1
LUOKAN 1 LASERLAITE
APPAREIL A LASER DE CLASSE 1
KLASS 1 LASER APPARAT
The drive with the above label is certified by the manufacturer that the drive
complies with the requirement for laser product on the date of
manufacturing pursuant to article 21 of Code of Federal Regulations by the
United States of America, Department of Health & Human Services, Food
and Drug Administration.
In other countries, the drive is certified to comply with the requirement
pursuant to IEC 60825-1 and EN 60825-1 on class 1 laser product.
This computer is equipped with the optical disc drive in the following list
according to the model.
User’s Manual
Manufacturer
Type
Panasonic
UJ-852
Panasonic
UJ-862
xvi
Preface
Congratulations on your purchase of the PORTÉGÉ M700/M710 series
computer. This powerful notebook computer provides excellent expansion
capability, includes multimedia functionality, and is designed to provide
years of reliable, high-performance computing.
This manual tells how to set up and begin using your PORTÉGÉ
M700/M710 computer. It also provides detailed information on configuring
your computer, basic operations and care, using optional devices and
troubleshooting.
If you are a new user of computers or if you’re new to portable computing,
first read over the Chapter 1, Getting Started and Chapter 3, Hardware,
Utilities and Options chapters to familiarize yourself with the computer’s
features, components and accessory devices. Then read Chapter 1,
Getting Started for step-by-step instructions on setting up your computer.
If you are an experienced computer user, please continue reading the
preface to learn how this manual is organized, then become acquainted
with this manual by browsing through its pages. Be sure to read the Special
features section in Chapter 3, Hardware, Utilities and Options to learn
about features that are uncommon or unique to this computer, as well as
the section on Chapter 7, HW Setup & BIOS Setup, to understand how to
setup and configure these features.
Read Chapter 3, Hardware, Utilities and Options if connecting optional
products or external devices.
Conventions
This manual uses the following formats to describe, identify, and highlight
terms and operating procedures.
Abbreviations
On first appearance, and whenever necessary for clarity, abbreviations are
enclosed in parentheses following their definition. For example: Read Only
Memory (ROM). Acronyms are also defined in the Glossary.
User’s Manual
xvii
PORTÉGÉ M700/M710
Icons
Icons identify ports, dials, and other parts of your computer. The indicator
panel also uses icons to identify the components it is providing information
on.
Keys
The keyboard keys are used in the text to describe many computer
operations. A distinctive typeface identifies the key top symbols as they
appear on the keyboard. For example, ENTER identifies the ENTER key.
Key operation
Some operations require you to simultaneously use two or more keys. We
identify such operations by the key top symbols separated by a plus sign
(+). For example, CTRL + C means you must hold down CRTL and at the
same time press C. If three keys are used, hold down the first two and at
the same time press the third.
ABC
When procedures require an action such as
clicking an icon or entering text, the icon's name
or the text you are to type in is represented in the
typeface you see to the left.
Display
ABC
Names of windows or icons or text generated by
the computer that appear on its display screen
are presented in the type face you see to the left.
Messages
Messages are used in this manual to bring important information to your
attention. Each type of message is identified as shown below.
Pay attention! A caution informs you that improper use of equipment or
failure to follow instructions may cause data loss or damage your
equipment.
Please read. A note is a hint or advice that helps you make best use of
your equipment.
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation, which could result in death or
serious injury, if you do not follow instructions.
User’s Manual
xviii
PORTÉGÉ M700/M710
Terminology
This term is defined in this document as follows:
Start
User’s Manual
The word "Start" refers to the "
Microsoft® Windows Vista®.
" button in
xix
General Precautions
TOSHIBA computers are designed to optimize safety, minimize strain and
withstand the rigors of portability. However, certain precautions should be
observed to further reduce the risk of personal injury or damage to the
computer.
Be certain to read the general precautions below and to note the cautions
included in the text of the manual.
Creating a computer-friendly environment
Place the computer on a flat surface that is large enough for the computer
and any other items you are using, such as a printer.
Leave enough space around the computer and other equipment to provide
adequate ventilation. Otherwise, they may overheat.
To keep your computer in prime operating condition, protect your work area
from:
■ Dust, moisture, and direct sunlight.
■ Equipment that generates a strong electromagnetic field, such as
stereo speakers (other than speakers that are connected to the
computer) or speakerphones.
■ Rapid changes in temperature or humidity and sources of temperature
change such as air conditioner vents or heaters.
■ Extreme heat, cold, or humidity.
■ Liquids and corrosive chemicals.
Stress injury
Carefully read the Instruction Manual for Safety and Comfort. It contains
information on the prevention of stress injuries to your hands and wrists
that can be caused by extensive keyboard use. Instruction Manual for
Safety and Comfort also includes information on work space design,
posture and lighting that can help reduce physical stress.
User’s Manual
xx
PORTÉGÉ M700/M710
Heat injury
■ Avoid prolonged physical contact with the computer. If the computer is
used for long periods, its surface can become very warm. While the
temperature will not feel hot to the touch, if you maintain physical
contact with the computer for a long time, for example if you rest the
computer on your lap or if you keep your hands on the palm rest, your
skin might suffer a low-heat injury.
■ If the computer has been used for a long time, avoid direct contact with
the metal plate supporting the various interface ports as this can
become hot.
■ The surface of the AC adaptor can become hot when in use but this
condition does not indicate a malfunction. If you need to transport the
AC adaptor, you should disconnect it and let it cool before moving it.
■ Do not lay the AC adaptor on a material that is sensitive to heat as the
material could become damaged.
Pressure or impact damage
Do not apply heavy pressure to the computer or subject it to any form of
strong impact as this can damage the computer's components or otherwise
cause it to malfunction.
PC Card overheating
Some PC Cards can become hot during prolonged use which may result in
errors or instability in the operation of the device in question. In addition,
you should also be careful when you remove a PC Card that has been
used for a long time.
Mobile phones
Please be aware that the use of mobile phones can interfere with the audio
system. The operation of the computer will not be impaired in any way, but
it is recommended that a minimum distance of 30cm is maintained between
the computer and a mobile phone that is in use.
Instruction Manual for Safety and Comfort
All important information on the safe and proper use of this computer is
described in the enclosed Instruction Manual for Safety and Comfort. Be
sure to read it before using the computer.
User’s Manual
xxi
Chapter 1
Getting Started
This chapter provides an equipment checklist, and basic information to
start using your computer.
Some of the features described in this manual may not function properly if
you use an operating system that was not pre-installed by TOSHIBA.
Equipment checklist
Carefully unpack your computer, taking care to save the box and packaging
materials for future use.
Hardware
Check to make sure you have all the following items:
■ PORTÉGÉ M700/M710 Portable Personal Computer
■ AC adaptor and power cord (2-pin plug or 3-pin plug)
■ Battery pack (Is pre-installed in some computers)
■ Slice Expansion Battery (Is included with some models)
■ Tablet PC Pen (Is included with some models)
■ Reserve Pen (Is included with some models)
■ Ultra Slim Bay Weight Saver (Is included with some models)
■ Ultra Slim Bay Case (Is provided with some models)
■ For some models, Tablet PC Pen is included together with spare pen
tips and a tip removal tool in the small case coming with the product.
■ For some models, Reserve Pen is included in the small case coming
with the product.
User’s Manual
1-1
Getting Started
Documentation
■ PORTÉGÉ M700/M710 Series User Information Guide
■ Instruction Manual for Safety and Comfort
■ End User License Agreement
If any of the items are missing or damaged, contact your dealer
immediately.
Software
The following Windows® operating system and utility software are preinstalled.
■ Microsoft® Windows Vista®
■ TOSHIBA Value Added Package
■ Recovery Disc Creator
■ DVD Video Player
■ TOSHIBA SD Memory Utilities
■ TOSHIBA SD Memory Boot Utility
■ CD/DVD Drive Acoustic Silencer
■ TOSHIBA Assist
■ TOSHIBA ConfigFree
■ TOSHIBA HDD Protection
■ TOSHIBA Disc Creator
■ TOSHIBA Tablet PC Extension
■ TOSHIBA Tablet Access Code Logon Utility
■ Fingerprint Utility
■ Windows Mobility Center
■ Online Manual
■ PORTÉGÉ M700/M710 User's Manual (This manual)
User’s Manual
1-2
Getting Started
Getting Started
■ All users should be sure to read the section Starting up for the first
time.
■ Be sure to read the enclosed Instruction Manual for Safety and Comfort
for information on the safe and proper use of this computer. It is
intended to help you be more comfortable and productive while using a
notebook computer. By following the recommendations in it you may
reduce your chance of developing a painful or disabling injury to your
hand, arms, shoulders or neck.
This section provides basic information to start using your computer. It
covers the following topics:
■ About the Tablet mode
■ Connecting the AC adaptor
■ Opening the display
■ Turning on the power
■ Starting up for the first time
■ Turning off the power
■ Restarting the computer
■ Creating Optical Recovery Discs
■ Restoring the pre-installed software from the Recovery hard disk drive
■ Restoring the pre-installed software from your created Recovery Discs
■ Use a virus-check program and make sure it is updated regularly.
■ Never format storage media without checking its content - formatting
destroys all stored data.
■ It is a good idea to periodically back up the internal hard disk drive or
other main storage device to external media. General storage media is
not durable or stable over long periods of time and under certain
conditions may result in data loss.
■ Before you install a device or application, save any data in memory to
the hard disk drive or other storage media. Failure to do so may result
in the loss of data.
About the Tablet mode
Change to "The TOSHIBA PORTÉGÉ M700/M710" computer can be used
in two ways, as an ordinary laptop PC and as a Tablet PC. You can use the
computer as Tablet PC, operated with the supplied Tablet PC Pen, by
turning the display panel through 180 degrees and closing it. This manual
calls the use as an ordinary laptop PC "Laptop mode", and the use as a
Tablet PC "Tablet mode". Refer to Changing to the Tablet mode section in
Chapter 4, Operating Basics for details on changing the mode.
User’s Manual
1-3
Getting Started
Connecting the AC adaptor
Attach the AC adaptor when you need to charge the battery or you want to
operate from AC power. It is also the fastest way to get started, because
the battery pack will need to be charged before you can operate from
battery power.
The AC adaptor can be connected to any power source supplying from 100
to 240 volts and 50 or 60 hertz. For details on using the AC adaptor to
charge the battery pack, refer to Chapter 6, Power and Power-Up Modes.
■ Always use the TOSHIBA AC adaptor that was included with your
computer, or use AC adaptors specified by TOSHIBA to avoid any risk
of fire or other damage to the computer. Use of an incompatible AC
adaptor could cause fire or damage to the computer possibly resulting
in serious injury. TOSHIBA assumes no liability for any damage caused
by use of an incompatible adaptor.
■ Never plug the AC adaptor into a power source that does not
correspond to both the voltage and the frequency specified on the
regulatory label of the unit. Failure to do so could result in a fire or
electric shock, possibly resulting in serious injury.
■ Always use or purchase power cables that comply with the legal
voltage and frequency specifications and requirements in the country
of use. Failure to do so could result in a fire or electric shock, possibly
resulting in serious injury.
■ The supplied power cord conforms to safety rules and regulations in
the region the product is bought and should not be used outside this
region. For use in other regions, please buy power cords that conform
to safety rules and regulations in the particular region.
■ Do not use a 3-pin to 2-pin conversion plug.
■ When you connect the AC adaptor to the computer, always follow the
steps in the exact order as described in the User’s Manual. Connecting
the power cable to a live electrical outlet should be the last step
otherwise the adaptor DC output plug could hold an electrical charge
and cause an electrical shock or minor bodily injury when touched. As
a general safety precaution, avoid touching any metal parts.
■ Never place your computer or AC adaptor on a wooden surface,
furniture, or any other surface that could be marred by exposure to heat
since the computer base and AC adaptor's surface increase in
temperature during normal use.
■ Always place your computer or AC adaptor on a flat and hard surface
that is resistant to heat damage.
Refer to the enclosed Instruction Manual for Safety and Comfort for
detailed precautions and handling instructions.
User’s Manual
1-4
Getting Started
1. Connect the power cord to the AC adaptor.
Figure 1-1 Connecting the power cord to the AC adaptor (2-pin plug)
Figure 1-2 Connecting the power cord to the AC adaptor (3-pin plug)
Either a 2-pin or 3-pin adaptor/cord will be included with the computer
depending on the model.
2. Connect the AC adaptor’s DC output plug to the DC IN 15V jack on the
back of the computer.
DC IN 15V jack
DC output plug
Figure 1-3 Connecting the DC output plug to the computer
3. Plug the power cord into a live wall outlet - the Battery and DC IN
indicators on the front of the computer should glow.
User’s Manual
1-5
Getting Started
Opening the display
The display panel can be opened to a wide range of angles for optimal
viewing.
While holding down the palm rest with one hand so that the main body of
the computer is not raised, slowly lift the display panel - this will allow the
angle of the display panel to be adjusted to provide optimum clarity.
Display panel
Figure 1-4 Opening the display panel
Use reasonable care when opening and closing the display panel.
Opening it vigorously or slamming it shut could damage the computer.
■ Be careful not to open the display panel too far as this could put stress
on the display panel’s hinges and cause damage.
■ Do not press or push on the display panel.
■ Do not lift the computer by the display panel.
■ Do not close the display panel with pens or any other objects left in
between the display panel and the keyboard.
■ When opening or closing the display panel, place one hand on the
palm rest to hold the computer in place and use the other hand to
slowly open or close the display panel (Do not use excessive force
when opening or closing the display panel).
User’s Manual
1-6
Getting Started
Turning on the power
This section describes how to turn on the power - the Power indicator will
then indicate the status. Please refer to the Monitoring of power condition
section in Chapter 6, Power and Power-Up Modes for more information.
■ After you turn on the power for the first time, do not turn it off until you
have set up the operating system. Please refer to the section Starting
up for the first time for more information.
■ Volume cannot be adjusted during Windows Setup.
1. Open the display panel.
2. Slide the Power Button Lock Switch to the right.
3. Press and hold the computer's power button for two or three seconds.
Power button
Power Button
Lock Switch
Figure 1-5 Turning on the power
Starting up for the first time
The Microsoft Windows Vista® Startup Screen will be the first screen
displayed when you turn on the power. Follow the on-screen instructions on
each screen in order to properly install the operating system.
When it is displayed, be sure to read the Software License Terms
carefully.
Turning off the power
The power can be turned off in one of three modes, either Shut Down
(Boot) Mode, Hibernation Mode or Sleep Mode.
Shut Down mode (Boot Mode)
When you turn off the power in Shut Down Mode no data will be saved and
the computer will boot to the operating system's main screen the next time
it is turned on.
1. If you have entered data, either save it to the hard disk drive or to other
storage media.
2. Make sure all disk/disc activity has stopped before removing the
CD/DVD or floppy diskette.
User’s Manual
1-7
Getting Started
■ Make sure the Hard Disk Drive and Ultra Slim Bay's module
indicator is off. If you turn off the power while a disk (disc) is being
accessed, you may lose data or damage the disk.
■ Never turn off the power while an application is running. Doing so could
cause loss of data.
■ Never turn off the power, disconnect an external storage device or
remove storage media during data read/write. Doing so can cause data
loss.
3. Click Start.
4. Click the arrow button (
) located in the power management buttons
) and select Shut Down from the menu.
5. Turn off any peripheral devices connected to your computer.
Do not turn the computer or peripheral devices back on immediately - wait
a short period to avoid any potential damage.
Sleep Mode
If you have to interrupt your work, you are able to turn off the power without
exiting from your software by placing the computer into Sleep Mode. In this
mode data is maintained in the computer's main memory so that when you
turn on the power again, you can continue working right where you left off.
When you have to turn off your computer aboard an aircraft or in places
where electronic devices are regulated or controlled, always completely
shut down the computer. This includes turning off any wireless
communication switches or devices, and canceling settings that reactivate
the computer automatically, such as a timer recording function. Failure to
completely shut down the computer in this way could allow the operating
system to reactivate and run pre-programmed tasks or preserve unsaved
data, which could interfere with aviation or other systems, possibly causing
serious injury.
■ Before entering Sleep Mode, be sure to save your data.
■ Do not install or remove a memory module while the computer is in
Sleep Mode. The computer or the memory module could be damaged.
■ Do not remove the battery pack while the computer is in Sleep Mode
(unless the computer is connected to an AC power source). Data in
memory could be lost.
User’s Manual
1-8
Getting Started
■ When the AC adaptor is connected, the computer will go into Sleep
Mode according to the settings in the Power Options (to access it, Start
-> Control Panel -> System and Maintenance -> Power Options).
■ To restore the operation of the computer from Sleep Mode, press and
hold the power button or any key on the keyboard for a short amount of
time. Please note that keyboard keys can only be used if the Wake-up
on Keyboard option is enabled within the HW Setup utility.
■ If the computer enters Sleep Mode while a network application is
active, the application might not be restored when the computer is next
turned on and the system returns from Sleep Mode.
■ To prevent the computer from automatically entering Sleep Mode,
disable Sleep Mode within the Power Options (to access it, Start ->
Control Panel -> System and Maintenance -> Power Options).
However, please be aware that this configuration will nullify the
computer's Energy Star compliance.
■ To use the Hybrid Sleep function, configure it in the Power Options.
Benefits of Sleep Mode
The Sleep Mode feature provides the following benefits:
■ Restores the previous working environment more rapidly than does the
Hibernation Mode feature.
■ Saves power by shutting down the system when the computer receives
no input or hardware access for the time period set by the System
Sleep Mode feature.
■ Allows the use of the panel power off feature.
Executing Sleep Mode
You can also enable Sleep Mode by pressing FN + F3 - please refer to
Chapter 5, The Keyboard, for further details.
You can enter Sleep Mode in one of four ways:
■ Click Start then click the power button (
) located in the power
management buttons (
).
Please note that this feature must be enabled within the Power Options
(to access it, click Start -> Control Panel -> System and Maintenance
-> Power Options).
■ Click Start then click the arrow button (
) and select Sleep from the
menu.
■ Close the display panel. Please note that this feature must be enabled
within the Power Options (to access it, click Start -> Control Panel ->
System and Maintenance -> Power Options).
■ Press the power button. Please note that this feature must be enabled
within the Power Options (to access it, click Start -> Control Panel ->
System and Maintenance -> Power Options).
User’s Manual
1-9
Getting Started
When you turn the power back on, you can continue where you left when
you shut down the computer.
■ When the computer is in Sleep Mode, the Power indicator will blink
orange.
■ If you are operating the computer on battery power, you can lengthen
the overall operating time by turning it off into Hibernation Mode - Sleep
Mode will consume more power while the computer is off.
Sleep Mode limitations
Sleep Mode will not function under the following conditions:
■ Power is turned back on immediately after shutting down.
■ Memory circuits are exposed to static electricity or electrical noise.
Hibernation Mode
The Hibernation Mode feature saves the contents of memory to the hard
disk drive when the computer is turned off so that, the next time it is turned
on, the previous state is restored. Please note that the Hibernation Mode
feature does not save the status of any peripheral devices connected to the
computer.
■ Save your data. While entering Hibernation Mode, the computer saves
the contents of memory to the hard disk drive. However, for safety
sake, it is best to save your data manually.
■ Data will be lost if you remove the battery or disconnect the AC adaptor
before the save is completed. Wait for the Hard Disk Drive indicator to
go out.
■ Do not install or remove a memory module while the computer is in
Hibernation Mode. Data will be lost.
Benefits of Hibernation Mode
The Hibernation Mode feature provides the following benefits:
■ Saves data to the hard disk drive when the computer automatically
shuts down because of a low battery condition.
■ You can return to your previous working environment immediately when
you turn on the computer.
■ Saves power by shutting down the system when the computer receives
no input or hardware access for the time period set by the System
Hibernate feature.
■ Allows the use of the panel power off feature.
User’s Manual
1-10
Getting Started
Starting Hibernation Mode
You can also enable Hibernation Mode by pressing FN + F4 - please refer
to Chapter 5, The Keyboard, for further details.
To enter Hibernation Mode, follow the steps below.
1. Click Start.
2. Click the arrow button (
) in the power management buttons
) and select Hibernate from the menu.
Automatic Hibernation Mode
The computer can be configured to enter Hibernation Mode automatically
when you press the power button or close the lid. In order to define these
settings, you can follow the steps as described below:
1. Click Start and click the Control Panel.
2. Click System and Maintenance and click Power Options.
3. Click Choose what the power button does or Choose what closing
the lid does.
4. Enable the desired Hibernation Mode settings for When I press the
power button and When I close the lid.
5. Click the Save changes button.
Data save in Hibernation Mode
When you turn off the power in Hibernation Mode, the computer will take a
moment to save the current data in memory to the hard disk drive. During
this time, the Hard Disk Drive indicator will glow.
After you turn off the computer, and the content of memory has been saved
to the hard disk drive, turn off the power to any peripheral devices.
Do not turn the computer or devices back on immediately. Wait a moment
to let all capacitors fully discharge.
Restarting the computer
Certain conditions require that you reset the computer, for example if:
■ You change certain computer settings.
■ An error occurs and the computer does not respond to your keyboard
commands.
If you need to restart the computer, there are three ways this can be
achieved:
■ Click Start then click the arrow button (
buttons (
) in the power management
) and select Restart from the menu.
■ Press CTRL, ALT and DEL simultaneously (once) to display the menu
window, then select Restart from the Shut down options.
User’s Manual
1-11
Getting Started
■ Press the power button and hold it down for five seconds. Once the
computer has turned itself off, wait between ten and fifteen seconds
before turning the power on again by pressing the power button.
System Recovery Options
About 1.5GB hidden partition is allocated on the hard disk drive for the
System Recovery Options.
This partition stores files which can be used to repair the system in the
event of a problem.
The System Recovery Options feature will be unusable if this partition is
deleted.
System Recovery Options
The System Recovery Options feature is installed on the hard disk when
shipped from the factory. The System Recovery Options menu includes
tools to repair startup problems, run diagnostics or restore the system.
See the Windows Help and Support content for more information about
Startup Repair.
The System Recovery Options can also be run manually to repair
problems.
The procedure is as follows. Follow the instructions shown on the onscreen menu.
1. Turn off the computer.
2. While holding the F8 key, turn on the computer.
3. The Advanced Boot Options menu will be displayed.
Use the arrow keys to select Repair Your Computer and press
ENTER.
4. Follow the on-screen instructions.
The Windows Vista® CompletePC Backup feature can be used on
Windows Vista® Business Edition and Ultimate Edition.
User’s Manual
1-12
Getting Started
System Recovery
This section describes the creation of Recovery Discs and their use.
Creating Optical Recovery Discs
This section describes how to create Recovery Discs.
■ Be sure to connect the AC adaptor when you create Recovery Discs.
■ Be sure to close all other software programs except the Recovery Disc
Creator.
■ Do not run software such as screen savers which can put a heavy load
on the CPU.
■ Operate the computer at full power.
■ Do not use power-saving features.
■ Do not write to the disc when the virus check software is running. Wait
for it to finish, then disable virus detection programs including any
software that checks files automatically in the background.
■ Do not use utilities, including those intended to enhance hard disk drive
access speed. They may cause unstable operation and damage data.
■ Do not shut down/log off or Sleep/Hibernate while writing or rewriting
the disc.
■ Set the computer on a level surface and avoid places subjected to
vibrations such as airplanes, trains, or cars.
■ Do not use on unstable tables or other any other unstable surfaces.
A recovery image of the software on your computer is stored on the hard
disk drive, and can be copied to either CD or DVD media by using the
following steps:
1. Select either blank CD or DVD media.
2. The application will allow you to choose from a variety of different media
onto which the recovery image can be copied including CD-R, CD-RW,
DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW, DVD+R, DVD+R DL and DVD+RW.
Please note that some of the above media may not be compatible with the
optical disc drive installed into your computer. You should therefore verify
the optical disc drive supports the blank media you have chosen before
proceeding.
3. Turn on your computer and allow it to load the Windows Vista®
operating system from the hard disk drive as normal.
4. Insert the first blank media into the optical disc drive tray.
5. Double click the Recovery Disc Creator icon on the Windows Vista®
desktop, or select the application from Start Menu.
6. After Recovery Disc Creator starts, select the type of media and the title
you wish to copy, and then click the Create button.
User’s Manual
1-13
Getting Started
If your optical disc drive can only write to CDs, select 'CD' as the 'Disc Set'
within the Recovery Disc Creator application.
Otherwise, if your optical disc drive can write both CDs and DVDs, select
the type of media you want to create.
Restoring the pre-installed software from the Recovery hard disk
drive
A portion of the total hard disk drive space is configured as a hidden
recovery partition. This partition stores files which can be used to restore
pre-installed software in the event of a problem.
If you subsequently set up your hard disk drive again, do not change,
delete or add partitions in a manner other than specified in the manual,
otherwise you may find that space for the required software is not available.
In addition, if you use a third-party partitioning program to reconfigure the
partitions on your hard disk drive, you may find that it becomes impossible
to setup your computer.
When the sound mute feature has been activated by pressing the FN +
ESC key, be sure to disable this to allow sounds to be heard before
starting the restore process. Please refer to Chapter 5, The Keyboard, for
further details.
You can not use System Recovery Options if restoring the pre-installed
software without System Recovery Options.
When you reinstall the Windows operating system, the hard disk will be
reformatted and all data will be lost.
1. Turn off your computer.
2. While holding down 0 (zero) key on the keyboard, turn on your
computer.
3. A menu will be displayed from which you should follow the on-screen
instructions.
User’s Manual
1-14
Getting Started
Restoring the pre-installed software from your created Recovery
Discs
If the pre-installed files are damaged, you are able to either use the
Recovery Discs you have created or the hard disk drive recovery process
to restore the computer to the state it was in when you originally received it.
To perform this restoration, follow the steps below:
When the sound mute feature has been activated by pressing the FN +
ESC key, be sure to disable this to allow sounds to be heard before
starting the restore process. Please refer to Chapter 5, The Keyboard, for
further details.
You can not use System Recovery Options if restoring the pre-installed
software without System Recovery Options.
When you reinstall the Windows operating system, the hard disk will be
reformatted and all data will be lost.
1. Load the Recovery Discs into the optical disc drive and turn off the
computer's power.
2. While holding down F12 key on the keyboard, turn on your computer when the TOSHIBA logo screen appears, release the F12 key.
3. Use the left and right cursors key to select the CD-ROM icon from the
menu. Please refer to the Boot Priority section in Chapter 7, HW Setup
& BIOS Setup for further information.
4. A menu will be displayed from which you should follow the on-screen
instructions.
When removing pre-installed drivers / utilities or when installing, you can
setup the respective drivers / utilities from the following folder.
C:\TOSAPINS\***
User’s Manual
1-15
Chapter 2
The Grand Tour
This chapter identifies the various components of the computer - it is
recommended that you become familiar with each before you operate the
computer.
Legal Footnote (Non-applicable Icons)*1
For more information regarding Non-applicable Icons, please refer to the
Legal Footnotes section in Appendix K or click the *1 above.
Front with the display closed
The following figure shows the computer’s front with its display panel in the
closed position.
System indicators
i.LINK (IEEE1394) port
Wireless
communication switch
Microphone jack
Headphone jack
Volume control dial
Figure 2-1 Front of the computer with display panel closed
User’s Manual
System indicators
These LED indicators allow you to monitor the
status of various computer functions and are
described in more detail within the System
indicators section.
Wireless
communication
switch
Slide this switch to the left to turn off Wireless
LAN, Bluetooth and Wireless WAN functions.
Slide it to the right to turn on the functions.
Only some models are equipped with Bluetooth,
Wireless LAN and Wireless WAN functions.
2-1
The Grand Tour
■ Turn Wi-Fi®, Bluetooth and Wireless WAN functionalities off when near
a person who may have a cardiac pacemaker implant or other medical
electric device. Radio waves may affect pacemaker or medical device
operation, possibly resulting in serious injury. Follow the instruction of
your medical device when using any Wi-Fi or Bluetooth or Wireless
WAN functionality.
■ Always turn off Wi-Fi or Bluetooth or Wireless WAN functionality if the
computer is near automatic control equipment or appliances such as
automatic doors or fire detectors. Radio waves can cause malfunction
of such equipment, possibly resulting in serious injury.
■ Do not use the Wi-Fi or Bluetooth functionalities near a microwave
oven or in areas subject to radio interference or magnetic fields.
Interference from a microwave oven or other source can disrupt Wi-Fi
or Bluetooth operation.
User’s Manual
i.LINK (IEEE1394)
port
This port allows you to connect an external
device, such as a digital video camera for highspeed data transfer.
Microphone jack
A 3.5 mm mini microphone jack enables
connection of a three-conductor mini jack for
monaural microphone input.
Headphone jack
A 3.5 mm mini headphone jack enables
connection of stereo headphones.
Volume control dial
Use this dial to adjust the volume of the internal
stereo speakers and optional external stereo
headphones (if connected).
Move the Volume control dial to the right to
increase the volume and to the left to decrease
the volume.
2-2
The Grand Tour
Left side
The following figure shows the computer’s left side.
Cooling vents
Security lock slot
PC Card eject button
PC Card slot
(or Smart Card slot)
Universal Serial Bus (USB 2.0) ports
Figure 2-2 The left side of the computer
The computer is equipped with either a PC Card slot or a Smart Card slot.
Cooling vents
The cooling vents help keep the processor from
overheating.
Do not block the cooling vents. Keep foreign metal objects, such as
screws, staples and paper clips, out of the cooling vents. Foreign metal
objects can create a short circuit, which can cause damage and fire,
possibly resulting in serious injury.
Security lock slot
A security cable can be attached to this slot and
then connected to a desk or other large object in
order to deter theft of the computer.
Universal Serial Bus
(USB 2.0) ports
Two Universal Serial Bus ports, which comply to
the USB 2.0 standard, are provided on the left
hand side of the computer. The ports with the
icon (
) has USB Sleep and Charge function.
Keep foreign metal objects, such as screws, staples and paper clips, out of
the USB connectors. Foreign metal objects can create a short circuit,
which can cause damage and fire, possibly resulting in serious injury.
Please note that it is not possible to confirm the operation of all functions of
all USB devices that are available. In view of this it may be noted that some
functions associated with a specific device might not operate properly.
User’s Manual
PC Card eject button
This button is used in order to remove a PC Card
from within the computer.
PC Card slot
This slot can accommodate a single Type II, 16bit or 32-bit (CardBus) PC Card device.
Some models are equipped with a PC Card slot.
2-3
The Grand Tour
Keep foreign metal objects, such as screws, staples and paper clips, out of
the PC Card slot. Foreign metal objects can create a short circuit, which
can cause damage and fire, possibly resulting in serious injury.
Smart Card slot
This slot can accommodate a single Smart Card
device. Some models are equipped with a Smart
Card slot.
Keep foreign metal objects, such as screws, staples and paper clips, out of
the Smart Card slot. Foreign metal objects can create a short circuit, which
can cause damage and fire, possibly resulting in serious injury.
Right side
The following figure shows the computer’s right side.
Tablet PC Pen slot
Modem jack
Bridge media slot
Tablet PC Pen
Ultra Slim Bay
Figure 2-3 The right side of the computer
Tablet PC Pen slot
The Tablet PC Pen slot provides storage for the
Tablet PC Pen.
Tablet PC Pen
The Tablet PC Pen is stored within the right side
of the computer and enables direct data entry
through the display screen. Some models are
equipped with a Tablet PC Pen. Refer to the
Using the Tablet PC Pen and Reserve Pen
section in Chapter 4, Operating Basics.
Bridge media slot
This slot lets you insert an SD/SDHC memory
card, miniSD/microSD Card, Memory Stick
(PRO/PRO Duo), xD picture card and
MultiMediaCard. Refer to the Optional devices
section in Chapter 3, Hardware, Utilities and
Options.
Keep foreign metal objects, such as screws, staples and paper clips, out of
the Bridge media slot. Foreign metal objects can create a short circuit,
which can cause damage and fire, possibly resulting in serious injury.
User’s Manual
2-4
The Grand Tour
Ultra Slim Bay
A DVD Super Multi drive or Ultra Slim Bay HDD
Adaptor can be installed in the Ultra Slim Bay.
Some models are equipped with a DVD Super
Multi drive or Ultra Slim Bay HDD Adaptor.
Modem jack
The modem jack allows you use to attach a
modular cable in order to connect the internal
modem directly to a telephone line.
Some models are equipped with a built-in
modem.
■ Connection to any communication line other than an analog phone line
could cause a computer system failure.
■ Connect the built-in modem only to ordinary analog phone lines.
■ Never connect the built-in modem to a digital line (ISDN).
■ Never connect the built-in modem to the digital connector on a
public telephone or to a digital private branch exchange (PBX).
■ Never connect the built-in modem to a key telephone system for
residences or offices.
■ Never operate your computer on AC power during a thunderstorm. If
you see lightning or hear thunder, immediately turn off the computer.
An electric surge caused by the storm, may result in a system failure,
loss of data or hardware damage.
Back
The following figure shows the computer’s back.
Universal Serial Bus
(USB 2.0) port
DC IN 15V jack
External monitor port
LAN active indicator
(orange)
Link indicator
(green)
LAN jack
Figure 2-4 The back of the computer
Universal Serial Bus
(USB 2.0) port
User’s Manual
One Universal Serial Bus port, which complies to
the USB 2.0 standard, is provided on the back of
the computer.
2-5
The Grand Tour
Keep foreign metal objects, such as screws, staples and paper clips, out of
the USB connectors. Foreign metal objects can create a short circuit,
which can cause damage and fire, possibly resulting in serious injury.
Please note that it is not possible to confirm the operation of all functions of
all USB devices that are available. In view of this it may be noted that some
functions associated with a specific device might not operate properly.
External monitor
port
This port allows you to connect an external
monitor to the computer.
DC IN 15V jack
The AC adaptor connects to this jack in order to
power the computer and charge its internal
batteries. Please note that you should only use
the model of AC adaptor supplied with the
computer at the time of purchase - using the
wrong AC adaptor can cause damage to the
computer.
LAN jack
This jack lets you connect to a LAN. The adaptor
has built-in support for Ethernet LAN (10
megabits per second, 10BASE-T), Fast Ethernet
LAN (100 megabits per second, 100BASE-TX)
and Gigabit Ethernet LAN (1000 megabits per
second, 1000BASE-T). Refer to Chapter 4,
Operating Basics, for details.
■ Do not connect any cable other than a LAN cable to the LAN jack. It
could cause damage or malfunction.
■ Do not connect the LAN cable to a power supply. It could cause
damage or malfunction.
User’s Manual
Link indicator
(green)
This indicator glows green when the computer is
connected to a LAN and the LAN is functioning
properly.
LAN active indicator
(orange)
This indicator glows orange when data is being
exchanged between the computer and the LAN.
2-6
The Grand Tour
Underside
The following figure shows the underside of the computer. You should
ensure that the display is closed before the computer is turned over to
avoid causing any damage.
Notch
Ultra Slim Bay latch
Ultra Slim Bay
Ultra Slim Bay Docking port
lock screw
(unlock position)
Reserve Pen
Notch
Memory module slot
HDD pack
cover screws
Battery
release latch
Battery lock
Battery pack
Ultra Slim Bay
lock screw
(lock position)
Hard disk drive
Figure 2-5 The underside of the computer
Notches
Notches on the computer engage hooks on the
TOSHIBA Express Port Replicator to ensure a
secure connection.
Docking port
This port enables connection of an optional
TOSHIBA Express Port Replicator or a Slice
Expansion Battery described in Chapter 3,
Hardware, Utilities and Options.
■ Only the TOSHIBA Express Port Replicator can be used with this
computer. Do not attempt to use any other Port Replicator.
■ Keep foreign objects out of the docking port. A pin or similar object can
damage the computer's circuitry. A plastic shutter protects the
connector.
User’s Manual
2-7
The Grand Tour
Memory module slot
The slot B memory module is located here. The
memory module slot allows for the installation,
replacement and removal of additional memory
module.
Refer to the Additional memory module section in
Chapter 3, Hardware, Utilities and Options.
HDD pack cover
screws
The HDD pack cover screws are the screws that
hold the hard disk drive cover in place.
Hard disk drive
This contains a Hard disk drive pack, which can
be removed and reinstalled. For more
information on how to remove or reinstall, please
refer to the HDD Kit (Serial-ATA) section in
Chapter 3, Hardware, Utilities and Options.
Battery release latch
Slide and hold this latch into its 'Unlock' position
in order to release the battery pack ready for
removal. For more detailed information on
removing the battery pack please refer to
Chapter 6, Power and Power-Up Modes.
Battery lock
Slide the battery lock to release the battery pack
for removal.
Battery pack
The battery pack provides power to the computer
when the AC adaptor is not connected. For more
detailed information on the use and operation of
the battery pack please refer to Chapter 6, Power
and Power-Up Modes.
Ultra Slim Bay
Refer to the Right side section in this chapter for
details.
Ultra Slim Bay latch
Slide the latch to release or secure the Ultra Slim
Bay latch.
Be sure to lock the Ultra Slim Bay latch before you transport or carry the
computer.
Ultra Slim Bay lock
Lock position is used to lock the Ultra Slim Bay
screw (lock position) Latch.
The Ultra Slim Bay Latch is locked by securing
the Ultra Slim Bay Lock screw into the lock
position.
User’s Manual
2-8
The Grand Tour
Ultra Slim Bay lock
screw (unlock
position)
Unlock position is used for changing the Ultra
Slim Bay. To unlock the Ultra Slim Bay latch,
please move the Ultra Slim Bay Lock screw to
unlock position.
For more information on how to remove or insert,
please refer to the Changing Ultra Slim Bay
modules in Chapter 4.
Reserve Pen
Reserve Pen is contained in the Reserve Pen
case of Underside. Reserve Pen enables data
entry directly through display screen. Some
models are equipped with a Reserve Pen. Refer
to the Using the Tablet PC Pen and Reserve
Pen section in Chapter 4, Operating Basics.
Front with the display open
This section shows the computer with the display panel open. In order to
open the display, lift the display panel up and position it at a comfortable
viewing angle for you.
Web Camera LED
Microphone
Web Camera
Display screen
Display hinge
Fingerprint Sensor
Stereo speaker (Right)
Memory module slot
(Not shown)
Power button
Lock Switch
LCD Sensor switch
(Not shown)
Power button
Keyboard
Stereo speaker
(Left)
Cross Function
button
Touch Pad
control buttons
ESC/Rotation
button
Windows Security tablet
button
Touch Pad
TOSHIBA Assist
button
TOSHIBA Presentation
button
Figure 2-6 The front of the computer with the display panel open
User’s Manual
2-9
The Grand Tour
User’s Manual
Web Camera
Web Camera is a device that allows you to
record video or take photographs with your
computer. You can use it for video chatting or
video conferences using a communication tool
such as Windows Live Messenger. Camera
Assistant Software will help you to add various
video effects to your video or photograph.
Enables the transmission of video and use of
video chat via the internet using specialized
applications.
The effective pixel count for this web camera is
1.3 million.
Some models are equipped with a Web Camera.
Please refer to the Web Camera section in
Chapter 4, Operating Basics.
Web Camera LED
The Web Camera LED glows when the Web
Camera is operating.
Display screen
Please be aware that, when the computer is
operating on the AC adaptor, the image
displayed on the internal screen will be
somewhat brighter than when it operates on
battery power. This difference in brightness
levels is intended to save power when operating
on batteries. For more information on the
computer's display, please refer to the Display
Controller and Video mode section in Appendix
B.
Power button
Press this button to turn the computer's power on
and off.
Power Button Lock
Switch
This switch locks the Power button in order to
prevent them from being accidentally pressed.
Slide the switch to the left to lock the Power
button.
Cross Function
button
This button function will automatically open the
Windows Mobility Center window.
ESC/Rotation button
This button functions the same as the ESC key
when tapped, or changes the orientation of the
screen when pressed for more than a second.
Windows Security
tablet button
This button functions the same as the Ctrl + Alt +
Del keys to show Menu window.
2-10
The Grand Tour
User’s Manual
TOSHIBA Assist
button
Press this button to launch the program
automatically. When power-off, Sleep Mode and
Hibernation Mode, press this button to start the
computer and launch the program.
TOSHIBA
Presentation button
The TOSHIBA Presentation button has the same
functionality as the Connect display button in the
Mobility Center. Pressing this button when an
external display is connected will open the
Windows Vista® TMM (Transient Multimon
Manager) screen.
Display hinge
The display hinge allows the display panel to be
position at a variety of easy-to-view angles.
Rotate the computer on this fulcrum point when
switching between Tablet and Laptop modes.
Fingerprint Sensor
This sensor enables you to enroll and recognize a
fingerprint.
Some models are equipped with a Fingerprint
Sensor.
For detailed information on Fingerprint Sensor,
refer to Chapter 4, Using the Fingerprint Sensor.
Stereo speakers
The speakers emit sound generated by your
software as well as audio alarms, such as low
battery condition, generated by the system.
Keyboard
The internal keyboard provides the embedded
numeric overlay keys, dedicated cursor control
overlay keys,
and
Keys. The keyboard
is compatible with the IBM® enhanced keyboard.
Refer to Chapter 5, The Keyboard, for details.
Touch Pad
The Touch Pad mouse control device located in
the center of the palm rest is used to control the
movement of the on-screen pointer. For more
information, please refer to the Using the Touch
Pad section in Chapter 4, Operating Basics.
Touch Pad control
buttons
The control buttons located below the Touch Pad
allow you to select menu items or manipulate text
and graphics as designated by the on-screen
pointer.
2-11
The Grand Tour
Microphone
A built-in microphone allows you to import and
record sounds for your application - please refer
to the Sound System section in Chapter 4,
Operating Basics for more information.
LCD Sensor switch
This switch senses when the display panel is
either closed or opened and activates the Panel
Power Off/On feature as appropriate. For
example, when you close the display panel the
computer enters Hibernation Mode and shuts
itself down and then, when you next open the
display, the computer will automatically start up
and return you to the application you were
previously working on.
You can specify within the Power Options. To
access it, click Start -> Control Panel ->
System and Maintenance -> Power Options.
Do not put any magnetic objects close to this switch as they may cause the
computer to automatically enter Hibernation Mode and shut down even if
the Panel Power Off feature is disabled.
Memory module slot
User’s Manual
The slot A memory module is located here. The
memory module slot allows for the installation
and replacement of additional memory module.
Refer to the Additional memory module section in
Chapter 3, Hardware, Utilities and Options.
2-12
The Grand Tour
Indicators
This section explains indicator functions.
System indicators
The LED system indicators for specific computer operations glow when
those operations are in progress.
Figure 2-7 System indicators
User’s Manual
DC IN
The DC IN indicator normally glows green when
power is being correctly supplied from the AC
power adaptor. However, If the output voltage
from the adaptor is abnormal, or if the computer's
power supply malfunctions, this indicator will
flash orange.
Power
The Power indicator normally glows green when
the computer is turned on. However, if you turn
the computer off into Sleep Mode, this indicator
will flash orange - approximately one second on,
two seconds off - both while the system is
shutting down and while it remains turned off.
Battery
The Battery indicator shows the condition of the
battery's charge - green indicates the battery is
fully charged, orange indicates the battery is
charging, and flashing orange indicates a low
battery condition. Please refer to Chapter 6,
Power and Power-Up Modes for more
information on this feature.
2nd battery
The 2nd battery indicator shows the condition of
the Slice Expansion Battery's charge - green
indicates the Slice Expansion Battery is fully
charged, orange indicates the Slice Expansion
Battery is charging, and flashing orange indicates
a low battery condition.
Please refer to Chapter 6, Power and Power-Up
Modes for more information on this feature.
Hard Disk Drive
The Hard Disk Drive indicator glows green
whenever the computer is accessing the built-in
hard disk drive or Ultra Slim Bay HDD.
2-13
The Grand Tour
Bridge media slot
The Bridge media slot indicator glows green
when the computer is accessing the Bridge
media slot.
Wireless
communication
The Wireless communication indicator blinks
orange when the Bluetooth, Wireless LAN and
Wireless WAN functions are turned on.
Only some models are equipped with Bluetooth,
Wireless LAN and Wireless WAN functions.
Wireless WAN
The Wireless WAN indicator glows or blinks blue
when the Wireless WAN function is on.
The indicator will glow or blink in order to indicate
the connection status of the Wireless WAN
function.
A Wireless WAN card must be installed to use
this function. Some models are equipped with a
Wireless WAN card.
Keyboard indicators
The following figures show the positions of the CAPS LOCK indicator and
the keypad overlay indicators which show the following conditions:
■ When the CAPS LOCK indicator glows, the keyboard will produce
capitals when any letter is typed.
■ When the Arrow Mode indicator glows, the keypad overlay allows you
to use cursor functions.
■ When the Numeric Mode indicator glows, the keypad overlay allows
you to enter numbers.
Arrow Mode indicator
Numeric Mode
indicator
CAPS LOCK indicator
Figure 2-8 Keyboard indicators
User’s Manual
2-14
The Grand Tour
CAPS LOCK
This indicator glows green when letter keys are
locked into their uppercase format.
Arrow Mode
When the Arrow Mode indicator lights green,
you can use the gray labeled keys on the keypad
overlay as cursor keys. Please refer to the
Keypad overlay section in Chapter 5, The
Keyboard for more information.
Numeric Mode
When the Numeric Mode indicator lights green,
you can use the gray labeled keys on the keypad
overlay for number entry. Please refer to the
Keypad overlay section in Chapter 5, The
Keyboard for more information.
Optical disc drives
The computer is configured with a DVD Super Multi drive. Some models
are equipped with an optical disc drive. An ATAPI interface controller is
used for CD/DVD-ROM operation. When the computer is accessing a
CD/DVD, an indicator on the drive glows.
For information on loading and unloading discs refer to the Using optical
disc drives section in Chapter 4, Operating Basics.
Region codes for DVD drives and media
DVD Super Multi drives and their associated media are manufactured
according to the specifications of six marketing regions. When you
purchase DVD-Video, make sure it matches your drive, otherwise it will not
play properly.
Code
User’s Manual
Region
Canada, United States
Japan, Europe, South Africa, Middle East
Southeast Asia, East Asia
Australia, New Zealand, Pacific Islands, Central
America, South America, Caribbean
Russia, Indian Subcontinent, Africa, North Korea,
Mongolia
China
2-15
The Grand Tour
Writable discs
This section describes the types of writable CD/DVD discs. Check the
specifications of your drive to see the types of discs it can write. Use
TOSHIBA Disc Creator to write compact discs. Refer to Chapter 4,
Operating Basics.
CDs
■ CD-R discs can be written only once. The recorded data cannot be
erased or changed.
■ CD-RW discs including multi speed CD-RW discs, high-speed CD-RW
discs and ultra-speed CD-RW discs can be recorded more than once.
DVDs
■ DVD-R, DVD+R, DVD-R (Dual Layer) and DVD+R (Double Layer) discs
can be written only once. The recorded data cannot be erased or
changed.
■ DVD-RW, DVD+RW and DVD-RAM discs can be recorded more than
once.
Formats
The drive supports the following formats.
DVD Super Multi drive
The drive supports the formats CD-ROM, DVD-ROM, DVD-Video, CD-DA,
CD-Text, Photo CDTM (single/multi-session), CD-ROM Mode 1, Mode 2,
CD-ROM XA Mode 2 (Form1, Form2), Enhanced CD (CD-EXTRA),
Addressing Method 2, CD-R, CD-RW, DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW,
DVD+R, DVD+R DL, DVD+RW and DVD-RAM.
Some types and formats of DVD-R DL and DVD+R DL discs may be
unreadable.
User’s Manual
2-16
The Grand Tour
DVD Super Multi drive
The full-size DVD Super Multi drive module lets you record data to
rewritable CD/DVDs as well as run either 12 cm (4.72") or 8cm (3.15")
CD/DVDs without using an adaptor.
The read speed is slower at the center of a disc and faster at the outer
edge.
DVD read
8 speed (maximum)
DVD-R write
8 speed (maximum)
DVD-R DL (UJ-852) write
4 speed (maximum)
DVD-R DL (UJ-862) write
6 speed (maximum)
DVD-RW write
6 speed (maximum)
DVD+R write
8 speed (maximum)
DVD+R DL (UJ-852) write
4 speed (maximum)
DVD+R DL (UJ-862) write
6 speed (maximum)
DVD+RW write
8 speed (maximum)
DVD-RAM write
5 speed (maximum)
CD read
24 speed (maximum)
CD-R write
24 speed (maximum)
CD-RW write
16 speed (maximum, Ultra-speed
media)
AC adaptor
The AC adaptor can automatically adjust to any voltage ranging from 100
to 240 volts and to a frequency of either 50 or 60 hertz, enabling you to use
this computer in almost all country/region. The adaptor converts AC power
to DC power and reduces the voltage supplied to this computer.
To recharge the battery, simply connect the AC adaptor to a power source
and to the computer. Please refer to Chapter 6, Power and Power-Up
Modes for further information.
Figure 2-9 The AC adaptor (2-pin plug)
User’s Manual
2-17
The Grand Tour
Figure 2-10 The AC adaptor (3-pin plug)
■ Depending on the model in question, either a 2-pin or 3-pin
adaptor/power lead will be bundled with the computer.
■ Do not use a 3-pin to 2-pin conversion plug.
■ The supplied power cord conforms to safety rules and regulations in
the region the product is bought and should not be used outside of this
region. In order to use the adaptor/computer in other regions, you
should please buy a power cord that conforms to the safety rules and
regulations in that particular region.
Always use the TOSHIBA AC adaptor that was included with your
computer, or use AC adaptors specified by TOSHIBA to avoid any risk of
fire or other damage to the computer. Use of an incompatible AC adaptor
could cause fire or damage to the computer possibly resulting in serious
injury. TOSHIBA assumes no liability for any damage caused by use of an
incompatible adaptor.
User’s Manual
2-18
Chapter 3
Hardware, Utilities and Options
Hardware
This section describes the hardware of your computer.
The actual specifications may vary depending on the model you
purchased.
Processor
CPU
The computer is equipped with one of the
following Intel® processors.
■ Intel® CoreTM 2 Duo Processor, which
incorporates a 2MB level2 cache memory. It
also supports Enhanced Intel® SpeedStep®
Technology.
■ Intel® CoreTM 2 Duo Processor, which
incorporates a 4MB level2 cache memory. It
also supports Enhanced Intel® SpeedStep®
Technology.
Some models in this series carry Intel® Centrino® Duo processor
technology, which is based on three separate technologies of Intel® CoreTM
2 Duo processor, Intel® PRO/Wireless Network Connection, and Mobile
Intel® 965 Express Chipset Family.
Legal Footnote (CPU)*2
For more information on the CPU, please refer to the Legal Footnotes
section in Appendix K or Click the *2 above.
User’s Manual
3-1
Hardware, Utilities and Options
Memory
Module slot
512, 1,024 or 2,048MB memory module can be
installed in the computer's memory module slot
for a maximum of 4,096MB system memory.
Video RAM
The amount of Video RAM available is
dependent on the computer's system memory.
Start -> Control Panel -> Appearance and
Personalization -> Personalization -> Display
Settings.
The amount of Video RAM can be verified by
clicking the Advanced Settings... button in the
Display Settings window.
Legal Footnote (Memory (Main System))*3
For more information regarding Memory (Main System), please refer to the
Legal Footnotes section in Appendix K or click the *3 above.
Power
Battery pack
The computer is powered by one rechargeable
lithium-ion battery pack.
Slice Expansion
Battery
This battery pack increases your computer's
operating time when main battery pack is also
installed.
Some models are equipped with a Slice
Expansion Battery.
Legal Footnote (Battery Life)*4
For more information regarding Battery Life, please refer to the Legal
Footnotes section in Appendix K or click the *4 above.
User’s Manual
3-2
Hardware, Utilities and Options
RTC battery
The internal RTC battery backs up the Real Time
Clock (RTC) and calendar.
AC adaptor
The AC adaptor provides power to the system
and recharges the batteries when they are low. It
comes with a detachable power cord which will
either have a 2-pin or 3-pin plug enclosure.
As the AC adaptor is universal, it can receive a
range of AC voltages from 100 to 240 volts,
however you should note that the output current
varies among different models. Using the wrong
adaptor can damage your computer. Refer to the
AC adaptor section in Chapter 2, The Grand
Tour.
Disks
Hard disk drive
This computer is equipped with one of the
following hard disk drive types. The capacity of
each hard disk drive model is different.
■ 80GB
■ 120GB
■ 160GB
Please note that part of the hard disk drive's
overall capacity is reserved as administration
space.
Legal Footnote (Hard Disk Drive (HDD) Capacity)*5
For more information regarding Hard Disk Drive (HDD) Capacity, please
refer to the Legal Footnotes section in Appendix K or click the *5 above.
Optical disc drive
Drive
The following optical disc drive is pre-installed in
this computer. Some models are equipped with
an optical disc drive.
■ DVD Super Multi drive
2.6GB and 5.2GB DVD-RAM media cannot be read from or written to.
User’s Manual
3-3
Hardware, Utilities and Options
Display
The computer's internal display panel supports high-resolution video
graphics and can be set to a wide range of viewing angles for maximum
comfort and readability.
Display panel
12.1" TFT LCD screen, 16 million colors, with a
resolution of 1280 horizontal x 800 vertical pixels
WXGA.
The function of the display screen varies from
model to model.
■ Digitizer screen model:
Operations on the display screen can be
done by using the Tablet PC Pen which
comes with the computer.
■ Digitizer and touch screen model:
Operations on the display screen can be
done by a finger or using the Tablet PC Pen
which comes with the computer.
■ Display screen model:
Operations on the display screen can not be
done by using Tablet PC Pen or a finger. In
order to prevent damages to the display
screen please refrain from touching it.
Legal Footnote (LCD)*6
For more information regarding the LCD, please refer to the Legal
Footnotes section in Appendix K or click the *6 above.
Graphics controller
The graphics controller maximizes display
performance. Refer to Display Controller and
Video mode section in Appendix B for more
information.
Legal Footnote (Graphics Processor Unit ("GPU"))*7
For more information regarding the Graphics Processor Unit ("GPU"),
please refer to the Legal Footnotes section in Appendix K or click the *7
above.
Sound
Sound system
User’s Manual
The integrated sound system provides support
for the computer's internal speakers and
microphone, as allowing an external microphone
and headphones to be connected via the
appropriate jacks.
3-4
Hardware, Utilities and Options
Multimedia
Web Camera
Web Camera is a device that allows you to
record video or take photographs with your
computer. You can use it for video chatting or
video conferences using a communication tool
such as Windows Live Messenger. Camera
Assistant Software will help you to add various
video effects to your video or photograph.
Please refer to the Web Camera section in
Chapter 4, Operating Basics.
Communications
User’s Manual
Modem
Some models are equipped with the integrated
modem. The integrated modem provides
capability for data and fax communications that
support the V.90 (V.92) standards and includes a
modem jack for connection to the telephone line.
Please note that both the V.90 and V.92
standards are only supported in the USA,
Canada, United Kingdom, France, Germany and
Australia - only the V.90 standard is supported in
other regions. You should also be aware that the
speed of data and fax transfer will depend on the
analog telephone line conditions.
The integrated model is only installed as a
standard device in some markets. Please refer to
the V.90 section in Appendix E for more
information.
LAN
The computer has built-in support for Ethernet
LAN (10 megabits per second, 10BASE-T), Fast
Ethernet LAN (100 megabits per second,
100BASE-TX) and Gigabit Ethernet LAN (1000
megabits per second, 1000BASE-T).
It is pre-installed as a standard device in some
markets.
Bluetooth
Some computers in this series offer Bluetooth
wireless communication functionality which
eliminates the need for cables between
electronic devices such as computers, printers
and mobile phones. When implemented,
Bluetooth provides a fast, reliable and secure
means to achieve wireless communication in a
small space.
3-5
Hardware, Utilities and Options
Wireless LAN
Some computers in this series are equipped with
a Wireless LAN card that is compatible with other
LAN systems based on Direct Sequence Spread
Spectrum/Orthogonal Frequency Division
Multiplexing radio technology that complies with
the IEEE 802.11 Standard (Revision A, B, G or n
Draft 2.0).
Legal Footnote (Wireless LAN)*8
For more information regarding Wireless LAN, please refer to the Legal
Footnotes section in Appendix K or click the *8 above.
Wireless WAN
Some computers in this series are equipped with
a Wireless WAN card. This card supports
HSDPA and provides faster communications
than previous Wireless WAN cards.
Ultra Slim Bay
Ultra Slim Bay
Modules
Ultra Slim Bay is a single-drive bay that
accommodates an optical disc drive and
secondary hard disk drive.
Ultra Slim Bay
Weight Saver
To reduce weight, the Ultra Slim Bay module can
be removed and a weight saver installed. It is
preinstalled in some models.
Special features
The following features are either unique to TOSHIBA computers or are
advanced features which make the computer more convenient to use.
Access each function using the following procedures.
*1 To access the Power Options, click Start -> Control Panel -> System
and Maintenance -> Power Options.
User’s Manual
TOSHIBA Assist
button
Press this button to launch the program
automatically. When power-off, Sleep Mode and
Hibernation Mode, press this button to start the
computer and launch the program.
TOSHIBA
Presentation button
The TOSHIBA Presentation button has the same
functionality as the Connect display button in the
Mobility Center. Pressing this button when an
external display is connected will open the
Windows Vista® TMM (Transient Multimon
Manager) screen.
3-6
Hardware, Utilities and Options
Hot keys
Hot keys are specific key combinations that let
you quickly change the system configuration
directly from the keyboard without running a
system program.
Display automatic
power off *1
This feature automatically cuts off power to the
computer's display panel when there is no
keyboard input for a specified time, with power
being restored the next time a key is pressed.
This can be specified in the Power Options.
HDD automatic
power off *1
This feature automatically cuts off power to the
hard disk drive when it is not accessed for a
specified time, with power being restored when
the hard disk drive is next accessed. This can be
specified in the Power Options.
System automatic
Sleep/Hibernation
Mode *1
This feature automatically shuts down the system
into either Sleep Mode or Hibernation Mode when
there is no input or hardware access for a
specified time. This can be specified in the Power
Options.
Keypad overlay
A ten-key numeric keypad is integrated into the
keyboard. Please refer to the Keypad overlay
section in Chapter 5, The Keyboard, for
information on using this feature.
Power on password
Two levels of password security, supervisor and
user, are available to prevent unauthorized
access to your computer.
Instant security
A specific hot key function automatically locks the
system providing data security.
Intelligent power
supply *1
A microprocessor in the computer's intelligent
power supply detects the battery's charge,
automatically calculates the remaining battery
capacity and protects electronic components
from abnormal conditions such as a voltage
overload from the AC adaptor. This can be
specified in the Power Options.
Battery save mode *1 This feature lets you configure the computer in
order to save battery power. This can be
specified in the Power Options.
Panel power on/off
*1
User’s Manual
This feature automatically turns power to the
computer off when the display panel is closed,
and turns it back on when the display panel is
opened. This can be specified in the Power
Options.
3-7
Hardware, Utilities and Options
Low battery
automatic
Hibernation Mode *1
When battery power is exhausted to the point that
computer operation cannot be continued, the
system automatically enters Hibernation Mode
and shuts itself down. This can be specified in the
Power Options.
Heat dispersal *1
To protect against overheating, the processor
has an internal temperature sensor so that, if the
computer's internal temperature rises to a certain
level, the cooling fan is turned on or the
processing speed is lowered. This can be
specified in the Power Options.
TOSHIBA HDD
Protection
This feature uses the acceleration sensor built in
the computer to detect vibration and shocks, and
automatically moves the hard disk drive's
read/write head to a safe position in order to
reduce the risk of damage that could be caused
by head-to-disk contact. Refer to the Using the
Hard Disk Drive (HDD) Protection section in
Chapter 4, Operating Basics, for more details.
The TOSHIBA HDD Protection function does not guarantee that the hard
disk drive will not be damaged.
User’s Manual
Optical Drive Auto
Lock
This function automatically locks the optical disc
drive eject button if the computer detects any
vibration or other shocks while running on the
battery.
This function prevents the disc tray from opening
even if the eject button is pushed unexpectedly.
For information on using this feature, please refer
to the Optical Drive Auto Lock section in Chapter
4, Operating Basics.
Hibernation Mode
This feature lets you turn off the power to the
computer without exiting from your software. The
contents of main memory are automatically
saved to the hard disk drive so that when you
next turn the power on again, you can continue
working right where you left off. Refer to the
Turning off the power section in Chapter 1,
Getting Started, for more details.
Sleep Mode
If you have to interrupt your work, you can use
this feature to allow you to turn off power to the
computer without exiting from your software.
Data is maintained in the computer's main
memory so that when you next turn on the power,
you can continue working right where you left off.
3-8
Hardware, Utilities and Options
TOSHIBA Value Added Package
This section describes the TOSHIBA Component features pre-installed on
the computer.
User’s Manual
TOSHIBA Power
Saver
TOSHIBA Power Saver provides you with the
features of more various power supply
managements.
TOSHIBA Button
Support
This utility controls the following computer button
functions.
■ TOSHIBA Assist
■ TOSHIBA Presentation
The starting application from the button can be
changed.
TOSHIBA Zooming
Utility
This utility allows you to enlarge or reduce the
icon size on the Windows Desktop, or the zoom
factor associated with specific supported
applications.
TOSHIBA PC
Diagnostic Tool
The TOSHIBA PC Diagnostic Tool will display
basic system configuration information and allow
the functionality of some of the computer's builtin hardware devices to be tested.
TOSHIBA Password
Utility
The TOSHIBA Password utility allows you to set
a password in order to restrict access to the
computer.
TOSHIBA Flash
Cards
The TOSHIBA Flash Cards provide a quick way
to modify selected system functions and to
launch applications.
■ Hot key function
■ TOSHIBA utility launcher function
HW Setup
This utility allows you to customize your
hardware settings according to the way you work
with the computer and the peripherals you use.
TOSHIBA
Accessibility
The TOSHIBA Accessibility utility provides
support to movement impaired users when they
need to use the TOSHIBA Hot-key functions. In
use, the utility allows you to make the FN key
'sticky', that is you can press it once, release it,
and they press one of the 'F' keys in order to
access its specific function. When set, the FN
key will remain active until another key is
pressed.
3-9
Hardware, Utilities and Options
TOSHIBA Tablet PC Extension
This section describes the pre-installed TOSHIBA Component features that
come with the computer. To access these components, click Start -> All
Programs -> TOSHIBA.
TOSHIBA Rotation
Utility
This utility controls the screen orientation setting
for both Laptop mode and Tablet mode.
You can set four types of orientation setting:
■ Primary landscape
■ Primary portrait
■ Secondary landscape
■ Secondary portrait
The default setting of PC mode is Primary
Landscape while that for Tablet mode is Primary
Portrait.
TOSHIBA
Accelerometer
Utilities
When TOSHIBA Accelerometer Utilities is
enabled, you can invoke the Start menu, switch
active windows or launch predefined applications
by shaking the computer vertically or horizontally,
or by tilting it.
Utilities and Applications
This section describes the pre-installed utilities that come with the
computer and details how to start them. For further information on their
operation, please refer to each utility's online manual, help files or
README.TXT file.
DVD Video Player
The DVD Video Player is used to play DVDVideo. It has an on-screen interface and
functions. Click Start -> All Programs ->
InterVideo WinDVD -> InterVideo WinDVD for
TOSHIBA.
■ Frame dropping, audio skipping or out of synch audio and video may
occur during playback of some DVD Video titles.
Make sure to connect the computer's AC adaptor when playing a DVD
Video. Power-saving features may interfere with smooth playback.
■ When using the WinDVD™ software, a horizontal white line may
appear during playback of a DVD media in VR-format. If this occurs,
set the Windows Color scheme to "Windows® Aero™".
Adding additional memory is also recommended.
User’s Manual
3-10
Hardware, Utilities and Options
Fingerprint Utility
This product has a fingerprint utility installed for
the purpose of enrolling and recognizing
fingerprints which can then be linked to a
username and password in order to remove the
need to input these details from the keyboard.
Just by swiping an enrolled finger against the
fingerprint sensor, the following functions will be
enabled:
■ Logon to Windows and access a security
enabled homepage through Internet Explorer.
■ Files and folders can be encrypted/decrypted
and third party access to them is prevented.
■ Disable the password-protected screen-saver
when returning from a power-saving mode
such as Sleep Mode.
■ Authentication of the User Password (and, if
applicable, the HDD(Hard Disk Drive)
Password) when booting up the computer
(Pre-OS Authentication).
■ Single-Swipe Sign On feature
Fingerprint security cannot be used in models that do not have a fingerprint
module installed.
Bluetooth Stack for
Windows by Toshiba
This software enables communication between
the computer and external Bluetooth devices
such as printers and mobile phones.
Bluetooth functions cannot be used in models that do not have a Bluetooth
module installed.
TOSHIBA SD
Memory Boot Utility
The TOSHIBA SD Memory Boot Utility allows
you to create a bootable SD memory card to start
the system. You can boot TOSHIBA SD Memory
Boot Utility from the menu bar as follows. Click
Start -> All Programs -> TOSHIBA -> Utilities
-> SD Memory Boot Utility.
SD Memory Card Format Utility and other SD functions are packaged into
TOSHIBA SD Memory Utilities.
TOSHIBA SD
This utility allows you to format an SD/SDHC
Memory Card Format memory card by the SD standard format.
User’s Manual
3-11
Hardware, Utilities and Options
TOSHIBA Assist
TOSHIBA Assist is a graphical user interface that
provides access to specific tools, utilities and
applications that make the use and configuration
of the computer easier.
TOSHIBA ConfigFree TOSHIBA ConfigFree is a suite of utilities that
improve the ease and control of communication
devices and network connections, help in the
identification of communication problems and
allow the creation of profiles if you need to switch
between different locations and communication
networks. To access this utility, click Start -> All
Programs -> TOSHIBA -> Networking ->
ConfigFree.
User’s Manual
TOSHIBA Disc
Creator
You can create CD's and DVD's in a number of
formats including audio CD's that can be played
on a standard CD player, and data CD's/DVD's
which can store copies of the files and folders on
your computer's hard disk drive. This software
can be used on models with a DVD Super Multi
drive.
To start this utility, click Start -> All Programs ->
TOSHIBA -> CD&DVD Applications -> Disc
Creator.
TOSHIBA DVD-RAM
Utility
This utility has the function of Physical Format
and Write-Protect to DVD-RAM. This utility is
contained the setup module of TOSHIBA Disc
Creator. To start this utility, click Start -> All
Programs -> TOSHIBA -> CD&DVD
Applications -> DVD-RAM Utility.
CD/DVD Drive
Acoustic Silencer
This utility allows you to configure the read speed
of the optical disc drive. You can either configure
Normal Mode, which operates the drive at its
maximum speed for quick data access, or Quiet
Mode which runs audio CDs at single speed and
which can lessen operational noise.
It is ineffective with DVDs.
3-12
Hardware, Utilities and Options
User’s Manual
Windows Mobility
Center
This section describes the Windows Mobility
Center. Mobility Center is a utility for accessing
several mobile PC settings quickly in one
window. A default maximum of eight tiles are
provided by the operating system, and the
additional three tiles are added to your Mobility
Center.
■ Ext.Screen Orientation :
This can be used to switch the orientation of
an external display connected to your Tablet
PC between portrait and landscape modes.
■ Lock Computer :
This can be used to lock your computer
without turning it off. This has the same
function as the Lock button at the bottom of
the right pane in the start menu.
■ TOSHIBA Assist :
This can be used to open TOSHIBA Assist if
it is already installed in your computer.
TOSHIBA Tablet
Access Code Logon
Utility
If a Windows password has been set, you can
logon to the operating system by entering a
handwriting signature into the dialog box using
the Tablet PC Pen when prompted.
3-13
Hardware, Utilities and Options
Optional devices
Optional devices can expand the computer's capabilities and its versatility.
This section describes the connection or installation of the following
devices:
To connect optional devices (such as USB device or External monitor) to
the computer, be sure to check the shape and orientation of the connector
before connecting.
Cards/memory
■ PC Card
■ Smart Card
■ Bridge media slot
■ Secure Digital (SD) Card (SD memory card, SDHC memory card,
miniSD Card, microSD Card)
■ Memory Stick (Memory Stick, Memory Stick PRO, Memory Stick
PRO Duo)
■ xD picture card
■ MultiMediaCard
■ Additional memory module
Peripheral devices
■
■
■
■
HDD Kit (Serial-ATA)
Ultra Slim Bay HDD Adaptor
External monitor
USB
■ USB FDD Kit
■ USB Sleep and Charge function
■ USB WakeUp function
■ i.LINK (IEEE1394)
■ TOSHIBA Express Port Replicator
Other
■ Security lock
User’s Manual
3-14
Hardware, Utilities and Options
PC Card
Some models are equipped with a PC Card slot. The computer is equipped
with a single PC Card slot that can accommodate a Type II format card.
Any PC Card that meets industry standards, either manufactured by
TOSHIBA or another vendor, can be installed as the slot supports 16-bit
PC Cards and 32-bit CardBus cards. For reference, CardBus supports the
newer standard of 32-bit PC Cards and provides superior performance for
the greater demands of applications such as multimedia data transmission.
PC Cards can sometimes become hot during computer operation. Before
you remove a PC Card always wait for it to cool. You could get burned
removing a hot PC Card.
■ The computer is equipped with either a PC Card slot or a Smart Card
slot.
■ When inserted in the PC Card slot, some PC Cards may block the
optical disc drive tray and prevent it from opening. If this occurs please
remove the PC Card each time you wish to open or close the optical
disc drive tray.
Inserting a PC Card
The Windows hot-install feature allows you to insert PC Cards while the
computer is turned on.
Do not insert a PC Card while the computer is in Sleep Mode or
Hibernation Mode as you may find that some cards do not work properly.
To insert a PC Card, follow the steps as detailed below:
1. Insert the PC Card into the PC Card slot on the side of the computer.
2. Press the PC Card gently to ensure a firm connection is made.
PC Card slot
PC Card
Figure 3-1 Inserting the PC Card
3. After inserting the PC Card, you should refer to its documentation and
also check the configuration in Windows in order to ensure that it is
correct.
User’s Manual
3-15
Hardware, Utilities and Options
Removing a PC Card
To remove a PC Card, follow the steps as detailed below:
1. Open the Safely Remove Hardware icon on the Windows Taskbar.
2. Point to PC Card and click the left Touch Pad control button.
3. Press the PC card eject button to extend it.
If the PC card is not inserted all the way, the eject button may not cause it
to pop out sufficiently to allows it to be grasped. Be sure to push the PC
card firmly into the computer and slide the eject button again.
4. Press the extended PC Card eject button in order to eject the PC Card
partially out of the computer.
5. Grasp the PC Card and remove it.
PC Card eject
button
PC Card
Figure 3-2 Removing the PC Card
Smart Card
Some models are equipped with a Smart Card slot.
A Smart Card is a credit card sized plastic card. An extremely thin
integrated circuit (IC chip) is embedded into the card on which information
can be recorded. These cards can be used for a wide variety of
applications including telephone related and electronic monetary
payments.
This section contains information on the proper use of the Smart Card slot,
and it is strongly recommended that you read it before operating the
computer.
■ Your computer supports ISO7816-3 asynchronous cards (support
protocols are T=0 and T=1) with a working voltage of 5V.
■ The computer is equipped with either a PC Card slot or a Smart Card
slot.
User’s Manual
3-16
Hardware, Utilities and Options
Inserting a Smart Card
The Smart Card slot is located on the left side of the computer. The
Windows hot-install feature allows you to insert a Smart Card while the
computer is turned on.
To install a Smart Card, follow the steps as detailed below:
1. Insert the Smart Card into the Smart Card slot with the metal
connectors facing up.
2. Press the Smart Card gently to ensure a firm connection is made. The
computer will identify the Smart Card and display an icon in the
Windows Taskbar.
■ When inserting a Smart Card into the Smart Card slot, make sure to
confirm that the card is oriented correctly before inserting.
■ Insert the Smart Card until it reaches the end of the Smart Card slot.
There will be about 2cm of the Smart Card sticking out of the Smart
Card slot. Do not attempt to insert it further.
■ Always remove the Smart Card from the Smart Card slot before moving
the computer.
■ Remove the Smart Card after use.
Failure to follow these instructions may result in damage to the computer
and/or damage to the Smart Card.
Figure 3-3 Inserting a Smart Card
3. After inserting the Smart Card, you should refer to its documentation
and also check the configuration in Windows in order to ensure that it is
correct.
User’s Manual
3-17
Hardware, Utilities and Options
Removing a Smart Card
To remove a Smart Card, follow the steps as detailed below:
1. Open the Safely Remove Hardware icon on the Windows Taskbar.
■ Before removing the Smart Card, confirm that the Smart Card is not
working with any program or system.
■ Be careful not to bend the Smart Card while removing it from the
computer.
2. Point to Smart Card and click the left Touch Pad control button.
3. Grasp the Smart Card and remove it.
Figure 3-4 Removing a Smart Card
Bridge media slot
The computer is equipped with a Bridge media slot that can accommodate
some kinds of memory media with various memory capacities so that you
can easily transfer data from devices, such as digital cameras and
Personal Digital Assistants.
■ Keep foreign objects out of the Bridge media slot. Never allow metal
objects, such as screws, staples and paper clips, to enter the computer
or Keyboard. Foreign metal objects can create a short circuit, which
can cause computer damage and fire, possibly resulting in serious
injury.
■ Memory Stick Duo is not compatible with the Bridge media slot. Do not
insert Memory Stick Duo into the slot or you may not be able to remove
it. Data may be lost or damaged if you use any memory media other
than those supported.
User’s Manual
3-18
Hardware, Utilities and Options
■ This Bridge media slot supports the following memory media.
■ Secure Digital (SD) Card (SD memory card, SDHC memory card,
miniSD Card, microSD Card)
■ Memory Stick (Memory Stick, Memory Stick PRO, Memory Stick
PRO Duo)
■ xD picture card
■ MultiMediaCard (MMC)
■ Please note that an adaptor is required to use miniSD/microSD Card.
■ Please note that an adaptor is required to use Memory Stick PRO Duo.
■ Please note that not all memory media have been tested and verified to
work correctly. Therefore, it is not possible to guarantee that all
memory media will operate properly.
■ The slot does not support Magic Gate functions.
Secure Digital
(SD) Card
Memory Stick
xD picture card
MultiMediaCard
(MMC)
Figure 3-5 Examples of memory media
Memory media
This section provides the important safety precautions in order to handle
your memory media.
Points to note about the SD/SDHC memory card
SD/SDHC memory cards comply with SDMI (Secure Digital Music
Initiative), which is a technology adopted to prevent unlawful copy or
playback of digital music. For this reason, you cannot copy or playback
protected material on another computer or other device, and you may not
reproduce any copyrighted material except for your personal enjoyment.
Below is a simple explanation for distinguishing SD memory cards from
SDHC memory cards.
■ SD and SDHC memory cards appear the same externally.
■ The logo on SD and SDHC memory cards is different, so pay careful
attention to the logo when purchasing.
■ The SD memory card logo is (
■ The SDHC memory card logo is (
User’s Manual
).
).
3-19
Hardware, Utilities and Options
■ The maximum capacity of SD memory cards is 2GB. The maximum
capacity of SDHC memory cards is 8GB.
Card Type
Capacities
SD
8MB, 16MB, 32MB, 64MB, 128MB, 256MB,
512MB, 1GB, 2GB
SDHC
4GB, 8GB
Memory media format
New media cards are formatted according to specific standards. If you wish
to reformat a media card, be sure to do so with a device that uses media
cards.
Formatting an SD/SDHC memory card
SD/SDHC memory cards are sold already formatted in conformity to
specific standards. If you format the SD/SDHC memory card again, be sure
to format it with the TOSHIBA SD Memory Card Format utility, not with the
format command provided within Windows.
In order to run the TOSHIBA SD Memory Card Format utility, click Start ->
All Programs -> TOSHIBA -> Utilities -> SD Memory Card Format.
The TOSHIBA SD Memory Card Format utility does not format the
protected area of the SD/SDHC memory card - should you need to format
all areas of the memory card, including the protected area, you will need to
obtain an appropriate application that applies the copy protection system.
Media care
Observe the following precautions when handling the card.
Card care
■ Do not twist or bend cards.
■ Do not expose cards to liquids or store in humid areas or lay media
close to containers of liquid.
■ Do not touch the metal part of a card or expose it to liquids or let it get
dirty.
■ After using card, return it to its case.
■ The card is designed so that it can be inserted only one way. Do not try
to force the card into the slot.
■ Do not leave a card partially inserted in the slot. Press the card until you
hear it click into place.
User’s Manual
3-20
Hardware, Utilities and Options
Memory card care
■ Set the write-protect switch to the lock position, if you do not want to
record data.
■ Memory cards have a limited lifespan, so it is important to backup
important data.
■ Do not write to a card if the battery power is low. Low power could affect
writing accuracy.
■ Do not remove a card while read/write is in progress.
For more details on using memory cards, see manuals accompanying the
cards.
About the write-protect
The following memory media have a function for protect.
■ SD Card (SD memory card, SDHC memory card)
■ Memory Stick (Memory Stick, Memory Stick PRO, Memory Stick PRO
Duo)
■ MultiMediaCard (MMC)
Set the write-protect switch to the lock position, if you do not want to record
data.
Inserting a memory media
The following instructions apply to all types of supported media devices. To
insert a memory media, follow the steps as detailed below:
1. Turn the memory media so that the contacts (metal areas) are face
down.
2. Insert the memory media into the Bridge media slot on the side of the
computer.
3. Press the memory media gently to ensure a firm connection is made.
Memory media
Bridge media slot
Figure 3-6 Inserting a memory media
User’s Manual
3-21
Hardware, Utilities and Options
■ Make sure memory media is oriented properly before you insert it. If
you insert the media in wrong direction, you may not be able to remove
it.
■ When inserting memory media, do not touch the metal contacts. You
could expose the storage area to static electricity, which can destroy
data.
■ Do not turn the computer off or switch to Sleep Mode or Hibernation
Mode while files are being copied - doing so may cause data to be lost.
Removing a memory media
The following instructions apply to all types of supported media devices. To
remove a memory media, follow the steps as detailed below:
1. Open the Safely Remove Hardware icon on the Windows Taskbar.
2. Point to memory media and click the left Touch Pad control button.
3. Press the memory media to partially extend it out of the computer.
4. Grasp the media and remove it.
Memory media
Bridge media slot
Figure 3-7 Removing memory media
■ Make sure the Bridge Media slot indicator is out before you remove
the memory media or turn off the computer’s power. If you remove the
memory media or turn off the power while the computer is accessing
the memory media, you may lose data or damage the media.
■ Do not remove the memory media while the computer is in Sleep or
Hibernation Mode. The computer could become unstable or data in the
memory media could be lost.
■ Do not remove only the miniSD/microSD Card while leaving the
adaptor in the Bridge Media slot.
User’s Manual
3-22
Hardware, Utilities and Options
Additional memory module
This computer is equipped with two memory slots; Slot A is beneath the
keyboard and Slot B is in the underside of the computer.
You can install additional memory into the computer in order to increase
the amount of system memory that is available. This section describes how
to install and remove optional memory modules.
■ You should place a mat beneath the computer in order to prevent the
computer's lid from becoming scratched or damaged when you are
installing/replacing the memory module. In this instance you should
avoid mats that are made of materials that hold or generate static
electricity.
■ When installing or removing a memory module, you must ensure that
you do not touch any other internal areas of the computer.
■ Use only memory modules approved by TOSHIBA.
■ Do not try to install or remove a memory module under the following
conditions.
a. The computer is turned on.
b. The computer was shut down in either Sleep or Hibernation Mode.
c. Wake-up on LAN is enabled.
d. Wake-up on Wireless LAN is enabled.
e. The wireless communication switch is turned on.
■ Be careful not to let screws or other foreign matter fall into the
computer. It could cause malfunction or electric shock.
■ Additional memory module is a precision electronic component that
may be fatally damaged by static electricity. Since the human body can
carry static electricity, it is important that you discharge yourself before
touching or installing any additional memory modules. To discharge
your body’s static electricity, simply touch any metal close to you with
bare hands.
Point to note about memory module error
If you install a memory module that is not compatible with the computer, the
Power indicator will flashes (on for 0.5 seconds, off for 0.5 seconds) in the
following ways;
■ If there is an error in only Slot A or no memory module is inserted in Slot
A: repeatedly flashes orange twice, then green.
■ If there is an error in Slot B: repeatedly flashes orange, then green
twice.
■ If there are errors in both Slot A and Slot B: repeatedly flashes orange
twice, then green twice.
In all instances you should shut down the computer and remove the
incompatible module(s).
User’s Manual
3-23
Hardware, Utilities and Options
Use a point size 0 Phillips screwdriver to remove and fasten the screws the use of an incorrect screwdriver can damage the screw heads.
Installing a memory module (Slot A)
To install a memory module, follow the steps as detailed below:
1. Set the computer to Boot Mode and turn its power off - make sure the
Power indicator is off (refer to the Turning off the power section in
Chapter 1, Getting Started if required).
2. Remove the AC adaptor and all cables and peripherals connected to
the computer.
3. Turn the computer upside down and remove the battery pack (refer to
Replacing the battery pack section in Chapter 6, Power and Power-Up
Modes, if required).
4. Turn your computer over.
5. Open the display panel so that the screen faces directly upward.
6. Slip your finger under a notch at the end of the keyboard brace and lift
up to release latches and remove the keyboard brace.
7. Remove two screws securing the keyboard.
Use a point size 0 Phillips screwdriver.
Keyboard brace
Screws
Figure 3-8 Removing the keyboard brace and two screws
User’s Manual
3-24
Hardware, Utilities and Options
8. Lift up the back of the keyboard, rotate it toward you and lay in face
down on the palm rest.
■ Never allow metal objects, such as screws, staples and paper clips, to
enter the computer or keyboard. Foreign metal objects can create a
short circuit, which can cause computer damage and fire, possibly
resulting in serious injury.
■ When you move the keyboard forward, do not touch the keys. Doing so
could cause misalignment. Hold the keyboard by the sides and lay it
gently on the palm rest.
■ The keyboard is connected to the computer by a keyboard ribbon
cable. Be careful not to apply tension to this cable when you lift up the
keyboard. Do not try to disconnect this cable.
Keyboard
Figure 3-9 Rotate the keyboard
9. Remove the two screws and take off the memory module cover.
Screws
Memory module cover
Figure 3-10 Removing the memory module cover
User’s Manual
3-25
Hardware, Utilities and Options
10. Align the notch of the memory module with that of the memory module
slot and gently insert the module into the slot at about a 45 degree
angle before holding it down until the latches on either side snap into
place.
Slot A
Figure 3-11 Installing the memory module
■ Never allow metal objects, such as screws, staples and paper clips, to
enter the computer or keyboard. Foreign metal objects can create a
short circuit, which can cause computer damage and fire, possibly
resulting in serious injury.
■ Do not touch the connectors on the memory module or on the
computer. Debris on the connectors may cause memory access
problems.
■ The memory module cover will be hot after using the computer for long
periods of time. Exercise caution when removing.
■ Slot A is reserved for the first memory module. Use slot B for expansion
memory modules. If only one module is installed, use slot A.
■ When inserting or removing memory modules, make sure to use the
correct slot (A or B).
■ Align the grooves along the edges of the memory module with the
locking tabs on the connector and insert the memory module into the
connector firmly - if you find it difficult to install the memory module,
gently prise the locking tabs outwards using the tip of your finger.
Please also ensure that you hold the memory module along its left and
right hand edges - the edges with the grooves in.
User’s Manual
3-26
Hardware, Utilities and Options
11. Screw in the two screws and replace the memory module cover.
Screws
Memory module
cover
Figure 3-12 Seating the memory module cover
12. Insert the tabs on the front of the keyboard into the corresponding
notches on the computer and place the keyboard down.
When seating the keyboard, be sure to connect the circuit board if the
keyboard ribbon cable was pulled out while you were removing the
keyboard.
13. Replace the keyboard and secure it using the two screws.
Be sure to use all two screws removed in step 7. Make sure no screw was
dropped into the computer. Make sure no foreign matter can be found
inside the computer.
Keyboard
Tabs
Screws
Figure 3-13 Replace the keyboard
14. Set the keyboard brace into its groove and hold down to secure the
latches.
15. Install the battery pack. Refer to Replacing the battery pack section in
Chapter 6, Power and Power-Up Modes, for details.
16. Turn your computer over.
17. Turn the computer on and make sure the added memory is recognized
- to confirmed it, Start -> Control Panel -> System and Maintenance > System icon.
User’s Manual
3-27
Hardware, Utilities and Options
Removing a memory module (Slot A)
The slot A is reserved for main memory. Use the slot B for expanded
memory. If only one card is installed, use the slot A.
To remove the memory module, follow the steps as detailed below:
1. Set the computer to Boot Mode and turn its power off - make sure the
Power indicator is off (refer to the Turning off the power section in
Chapter 1, Getting Started if required).
2. Remove the AC adaptor and all cables and peripherals connected to
the computer.
3. Turn the computer upside down and remove the battery pack (refer to
Replacing the battery pack section in Chapter 6, Power and Power-Up
Modes, if required).
4. Follow steps 4 through 9 in Installing a memory module (Slot A) to
appear the memory module.
5. Push the latches to the outside to release the memory module. A spring
will force one end of the memory module up.
6. Grasp the sides of the memory module and pull it out.
■ If you use the computer for a long time, the memory modules and the
circuits locating close to the memory modules will become hot. In this
case, let them cool to room temperature before you replace them. Or
you will get burnt if you touch any of them.
■ Do not touch the connectors on the memory module or on the
computer. Debris on the connectors may cause memory access
problems.
Latches
Figure 3-14 Removing the memory module
7. Rotate the keyboard back into place and secure the keyboard brace as
described in the previous section.
8. Install the battery pack. Refer to Replacing the battery pack section in
Chapter 6, Power and Power-Up Modes, for details.
9. Turn your computer over.
User’s Manual
3-28
Hardware, Utilities and Options
Installing a memory module (Slot B)
To install a memory module, follow the steps as detailed below:
1. Set the computer to Boot Mode and turn its power off - make sure the
Power indicator is off (refer to the Turning off the power section in
Chapter 1, Getting Started if required).
2. Remove the AC adaptor and all cables and peripherals connected to
the computer.
3. Close the display panel.
Always make sure the display panel is closed in Laptop mode before
turning the computer upside down.
4. Turn the computer upside down and remove the battery pack (refer to
the Replacing the battery pack section in Chapter 6, Power and PowerUp Modes, if required).
5. Loosen the screw securing the memory module cover in place - please
note that this screw is attached to the cover in order to prevent it from
being lost.
Use a point size 0 Phillips screwdriver.
6. Slide your fingernail or a thin object under the cover and lift it off.
Screw
Memory
module cover
Figure 3-15 Removing the memory module cover
User’s Manual
3-29
Hardware, Utilities and Options
7. Align the notch of the memory module with that of the memory module
slot and gently insert the module into the slot at about a 45 degree
angle before holding it down until the latches on either side snap into
place.
Slot B
Figure 3-16 Seating the memory module
■ Never allow metal objects, such as screws, staples and paper clips, to
enter the computer. Foreign metal objects can create a short circuit,
which can cause computer damage and fire, possibly resulting in
serious injury.
■ Do not touch the connectors on the memory module or on the
computer. Debris on the connectors may cause memory access
problems.
Align the grooves along the edges of the memory module with the locking
tabs on the connector and insert the memory module into the connector
firmly - if you find it difficult to install the memory module, gently prise the
locking tabs outwards using the tip of your finger.
Please also ensure that you hold the memory module along its left and
right hand edges - the edges with the grooves in.
User’s Manual
3-30
Hardware, Utilities and Options
8. Seat the memory module cover in place and secure it with one screw.
Take care to ensure that the memory module cover is firmly closed.
Screw
Memory module
cover
Figure 3-17 Seating the memory module cover
9. Install the battery pack - refer to Replacing the battery pack section in
Chapter 6, Power and Power-Up Modes, if required.
10. Turn your computer over.
11. Turn the computer on and make sure the added memory is recognized
- to confirmed it, Start -> Control Panel -> System and Maintenance > System icon.
Removing a memory module (Slot B)
To remove the memory module, follow the steps as detailed below:
1. Set the computer to Boot Mode and turn its power off - make sure the
Power indicator is off (refer to the Turning off the power section in
Chapter 1, Getting Started if required).
2. Remove the AC adaptor and all cables and peripherals connected to
the computer.
3. Close the display panel.
Always make sure the display panel is closed in Laptop mode before
turning the computer upside down.
4. Turn the computer upside down and remove the battery pack (refer to
Replacing the battery pack section in Chapter 6, Power and Power-Up
Modes, if required).
5. Loosen the screw securing the memory module cover in place - please
note that this screw is attached to the cover in order to prevent it from
being lost.
6. Slide your fingernail or a thin object under the cover and lift it off.
7. Push the latches away from the module in order to release it - a spring
will force one end of the module up at an angle.
User’s Manual
3-31
Hardware, Utilities and Options
8. Grasp the memory module by its edges and remove it from the
computer.
■ If you use the computer for a long time, the memory modules and the
circuits locating close to the memory modules will become hot. In this
case, let them cool to room temperature before you replace them. Or
you will get burnt if you touch any of them.
■ Do not touch the connectors on the memory module or on the
computer. Debris on the connectors may cause memory access
problems.
Latches
Figure 3-18 Removing the memory module
9. Seat the memory module cover in place and secure it with one screw.
Take care to ensure that the memory module cover is firmly closed.
10. Install the battery pack - refer to Replacing the battery pack section in
Chapter 6, Power and Power-Up Modes, if required.
11. Turn your computer over.
User’s Manual
3-32
Hardware, Utilities and Options
HDD Kit (Serial-ATA)
An extra hard disk drive expands the flexibility of your system and allows
you to carry your data separately without having to carry the computer.
The HDD Kit (Serial-ATA) can either replace the hard disk drive installed
inside the computer or be connected to the Ultra Slim Bay HDD Adaptor.
Some models are equipped with a Ultra Slim Bay HDD Adaptor.
Use a point size 0 Phillips screwdriver to remove and fasten the screws the use of an incorrect screwdriver can damage the screw heads.
Removing the hard disk drive pack
To remove the hard disk drive pack, follow the steps as detailed below:
1. Set the computer to Boot Mode and turn its power off - make sure the
Power indicator is off (refer to the Turning off the power section in
Chapter 1, Getting Started if required).
2. Remove the AC adaptor and all cables and peripherals connected to
the computer.
3. Close the display panel.
Always make sure the display panel is closed in Laptop mode before
turning the computer upside down.
4. Turn the computer upside down and remove the battery pack (refer to
Replacing the battery pack section in Chapter 6, Power and Power-Up
Modes, if required).
5. Loosen two screws securing the hard disk drive cover in place.
6. Lift the cover up and out, and remove it from the computer.
Screws
Hard disk drive
cover
Figure 3-19 Removing the hard disk drive cover
7. Pull the hard disk drive pack up to a vertical position by holding the
plastic tab.
User’s Manual
3-33
Hardware, Utilities and Options
8. With the hard disk drive in a vertical position, lift it straight up and away
from the connector.
Never allow metal objects, such as screws, staples and paper clips, to
enter the computer. Foreign metal objects can create a short circuit, which
can cause computer damage and fire, possibly resulting in serious injury.
Plastic tab
Connector
Hard disk drive
pack
Figure 3-20 Removing the hard disk drive pack
Installing the hard disk drive pack
To install the hard disk drive pack, follow the steps as detailed below:
1. Move the connector until it is vertical.
2. Hold the hard disk drive vertically with its label on the left.
3. Connect the hard disk drive to the connector.
Ensure that the hard disk drive is connected to the connector in a vertical
position. If the hard disk drive is slanted and connected to the connector, it
might damage the connector.
User’s Manual
3-34
Hardware, Utilities and Options
4. With the connector connected, lower the hard disk drive down to the
storage position.
Never allow metal objects, such as screws, staples and paper clips, to
enter the computer. Foreign metal objects can create a short circuit, which
can cause computer damage and fire, possibly resulting in serious injury.
Connector
Hard disk drive
pack
Figure 3-21 Installing the hard disk drive pack
5. Seat the cover and press down until the latches click into place.
6. Secure the cover with two screws.
7. Turn your computer over.
User’s Manual
3-35
Hardware, Utilities and Options
Ultra Slim Bay HDD Adaptor
You can increase your computer’s data storage capacity by installing an
additional 80GB hard disk drive in the Ultra Slim Bay.
To install a hard disk drive in the Ultra Slim Bay HDD Adaptor follow the
steps below.
1. Slide the lock to the unlock position and open the lid.
Lock
Lid
Figure 3-22 Opening the lid
2. Insert the hard disk drive in the Ultra Slim Bay HDD Adaptor and push
forward to ensure a firm connection.
Tuck the Plastic tab underneath the hard disk drive.
Hard disk drive
Figure 3-23 Inserting the hard disk drive
User’s Manual
3-36
Hardware, Utilities and Options
3. Close the lid and slide the lock to the lock position.
Lid
Figure 3-24 Closing the lid
For details on inserting the Ultra Slim Bay HDD Adaptor in the computer’s
Ultra Slim Bay slot, refer to Chapter 4, Operating Basics.
External monitor
An external analog monitor can be connected to the external monitor port
on the computer.
Connecting the monitor cable
To connect a monitor, follow the steps as detailed below:
1. Turn the computer's power off.
2. Connect the monitor cable to the external monitor port and tighten the
screws on the left and right hand side of the connector as required.
Monitor cable
External monitor port
Figure 3-25 Connecting the monitor cable to the external monitor port
3. Turn the external monitor's power on.
User’s Manual
3-37
Hardware, Utilities and Options
4. Turn the computer's power on.
When you turn on the power, the computer will automatically recognize the
monitor and determine whether it is a color or monochrome device. In the
event that you find that there are issues getting an image displayed on the
correct monitor, you should consider using the FN + F5 hot key to change
the display settings (if you then disconnect the external monitor before you
turn the computer's power off, be sure to press FN + F5 hot key again to
switch to the internal display).
Please refer to Chapter 5, The Keyboard, for further details on using hot
keys to change the display setting.
Do not disconnect the external monitor while in Sleep or Hibernation Mode.
Turn off the computer before disconnecting the external monitor.
USB
The computer is equipped with the Universal Serial Bus ports that can
accommodate some kinds of devices.
These ports comply with the USB 2.0 standard.
USB FDD Kit
The USB floppy diskette drive accommodates either a 1.44MB or 720KB
floppy diskette and connects to one of the computer's USB ports.
USB connector
Disk-In-Use
Indicator
Floppy
diskette slot
Eject button
Figure 3-26 The USB floppy diskette drive
User’s Manual
3-38
Hardware, Utilities and Options
Connecting the USB floppy diskette drive
To connect the drive, plug the floppy diskette drive’s USB connector into a
computer’s USB port.
Make sure the connector is properly aligned with the socket. Do not try to
force the connection, doing so can damage the connecting pins.
USB port
USB connector
Figure 3-27 Connecting the USB floppy diskette drive
If you connect the USB floppy diskette drive after the computer has already
been turned on, it will take about ten seconds for it to be recognized by the
computer. Do not attempt to disconnect and reconnect the drive before this
period has elapsed.
Disconnecting the USB floppy diskette drive
When you have finished using the USB floppy diskette drive, you can follow
the procedures below in order to disconnect it:
1. Wait for the Disk-In-Use Indicator light to go out to make sure all floppy
diskette activity has stopped.
If you disconnect the USB floppy diskette drive or turn off the power while
the computer is accessing the drive you may lose data or damage the
floppy diskette or the drive.
2. Click the Safely Remove Hardware icon on the Windows Taskbar.
3. Click the USB floppy diskette drive device that you want to remove.
4. Carefully pull the floppy diskette drive's USB connector out from within
the computer's USB port.
User’s Manual
3-39
Hardware, Utilities and Options
USB Sleep and Charge function
Your computer can supply USB bus power (DC5V) to the USB port even
when the power of the computer is turned OFF. "Power OFF" includes
Sleep Mode, Hibernation Mode or shutdown state.
This function can only be used for ports that support the USB Sleep and
Charge function (hereinafter called "compatible ports").
Compatible ports are USB ports that have the ( ) symbol icon.
You can use the "USB Sleep and Charge function" to charge certain USBcompatible external devices such as mobile phones or portable digital
music players.
However, the "USB Sleep and Charge function" may not work with certain
external devices even if they are compliant with the USB specification. In
those cases, turn the power of the computer ON to charge the device.
■ The "USB Sleep and Charge function" only works for compatible ports.
This function is disabled in the default setting. To enable it, you must
change [Disabled] to [Enabled] in the BIOS Setup.
Refer to the USB Sleep and Charge function section in Chapter 7, HW
Setup & BIOS Setup.
■ When "USB Sleep and Charge function" is set to [Enabled] in BIOS
Setup, USB bus power (DC5V) will be supplied to compatible ports
even when the power of the computer is turned OFF.
USB bus power (DC5V) is similarly supplied to the external devices
which are connected to the compatible ports. However, some external
devices cannot be charged solely by supplying USB bus power
(DC5V).
As for the specifications of the external devices, please contact the
device manufacturer or check the specifications of the external devices
thoroughly before use.
■ Using the USB sleep and charge function to charge external devices
will take longer than charging the devices with their own chargers.
■ If external devices are connected to compatible ports when the AC
adaptor is not connected to the computer, the battery of the computer
will be depleted even when the power of the computer is turned OFF.
As such, we recommend that you connect the AC adaptor to the
computer when using the USB sleep and charge function.
■ External devices connected to the USB bus power (DC5V) function that
interfaces with the power ON/OFF of the computer may always be in
an operational state.
■ When there is a current overflow of the external devices connected to
the compatible ports, USB bus power (DC5V) supply may be stopped
for safety reasons.
Metal paper clips or hair pins/clips will generate heat if they come into
contact with USB ports. Do not allow USB ports to come into contact with
metal products, for example when carrying the computer in your bag.
User’s Manual
3-40
Hardware, Utilities and Options
USB WakeUp function
This function restores the computer from Sleep Mode depending on the
external devices connected to the USB ports.
The "USB WakeUp function" operates under Windows Vista® OS and it
works for all USB ports.
■ "USB WakeUp function" will supply USB bus power (DC5V) to all USB
ports ,including compatible ports, even when the computer is in Sleep
Mode.
USB bus power (DC5V) will not be supplied if the computer is in
Hibernation Mode or shutdown state.
■ When "USB Sleep and Charge function" is set to [Enabled] in BIOS
Setup, the "USB WakeUp function" does not work for compatible ports.
The WakeUp setting (function to allow the WakeUp) check box will be
displayed on the Device Manager. You can change the settings but the
USB WakeUp function will not work. For example, if a mouse or USB
keyboard is connected to a compatible port, moving the
mouse/keyboard will not "wakeup" the computer.
In that case, attach the mouse or keyboard to an USB port that does
not have the USB Sleep and Charge function-compatible icon ( ).
i.LINK (IEEE1394)
i.LINK (IEEE1394) is used for high-speed data transfer for a range of
compatible devices such as:
■ Digital video cameras
■ Hard disk drives
■ MO drives
■ Writable optical disc drives
i.LINK uses a four-pin connector, which does not carry any electric current.
External devices will need their own power supply to operate.
Precautions
■ Make a back-up of your data before transferring it to the computer.
There is a possibility that the original data will be damaged. There is a
particular risk that some frames will be deleted in the case of digital
video transfer. TOSHIBA assumes no liability for such loss of data.
■ Do not transfer data in areas where static electricity is easily generated
or in areas subjected to electronic noise. Data can be destroyed.
■ If you are transferring data through an IEEE1394 hub, do not connect or
disconnect other devices from the hub during data transfer. There is a
likelihood that data will be damaged. Connect all devices to the hub
before you turn on the computer’s power.
■ You may not use any copyrighted video or music data copied from a
video camera except for your personal enjoyment.
User’s Manual
3-41
Hardware, Utilities and Options
■ If you connect/disconnect an i.LINK device to/from another i.LINK
device that is currently exchanging data with the computer, data frames
might be dropped.
■ Make sure data transfer has ended or turn off the computer, before you:
■ Connect/disconnect an i.LINK device to/from the computer.
■ Connect/disconnect an i.LINK device to/from another i.LINK device
that is connected to the computer.
Connecting the i.LINK (IEEE1394) cable
To connect the i.LINK (IEEE1394) cable, follow the steps as detailed
below:
1. Make sure the connectors are properly aligned and plug the i.LINK
(IEEE1394) cable into the computer.
i.LINK (IEEE1394)
port
i.LINK (IEEE1394)
connector
Figure 3-28 Connecting the i.LINK (IEEE1394) cable into the computer
2. Plug the other end of the cable into the device.
Note the following when you use i.LINK:
■ You may need to install drivers for your i.LINK devices.
■ Not all i.LINK devices have been tested. Therefore, compatibility with all
i.LINK devices cannot be guaranteed.
■ Some devices might not support sleep or automatic off functions.
■ Do not connect or disconnect an i.LINK device while it is using an
application or when the computer is automatically shutting it down to
save power. Data might be destroyed.
Disconnecting the i.LINK (IEEE1394) cable
To disconnect the i.LINK (IEEE1394) cable, follow the steps as detailed
below:
1. Open the Safely Remove Hardware icon on the Windows Taskbar.
2. Point to i.LINK (IEEE1394) device and click.
3. Disconnect the cable from the computer then from the i.LINK device.
Refer also to the documentation that came with your i.LINK device.
User’s Manual
3-42
Hardware, Utilities and Options
TOSHIBA Express Port Replicator
In addition to the ports available on the computer, the TOSHIBA Express
Port Replicator. The TOSHIBA Express Port Replicator connects directly to
the docking interface on the underside of the computer. The AC adaptor
connects the TOSHIBA Express Port Replicator to a power source.
The computer must be configured properly before connecting to a LAN.
Logging onto a LAN using the computer’s default settings could cause a
malfunction in LAN operation. Check with your LAN administrator
regarding set-up procedures.
■ You must connect the AC adaptor before you connect to a TOSHIBA
Express Port Replicator.
■ When a TOSHIBA Express Port Replicator is connected to the
computer, you can not use the following computer's ports: LAN jack,
DC IN 15V jack and External monitor port.
■ When connecting an AC Adaptor to the TOSHIBA Express Port
Replicator, use only the AC Adaptor included with TOSHIBA Express
Port Replicator. Do not use the computer’s AC Adaptor.
The following ports are available on the TOSHIBA Express Port Replicator.
■ RJ45 LAN jack
■ External monitor port
■ DC IN 15V jack
■ Security lock slot
■ Universal Serial Bus 2.0 port (four)
■ DVI port
■ As the port operation of all DVI (Digital Visual Interface) monitors has
not been confirmed, some DVI monitors may not function properly.
■ Set the TOSHIBA Express Port Replicator's Slide Adjuster to SLIDE
position #4 when connecting this computer to the TOSHIBA Express
Port Replicator. Refer to the TOSHIBA Express Port Replicator User's
Manual for more details on connection methods.
User’s Manual
3-43
Hardware, Utilities and Options
Security lock
A security locks enable you to anchor your computer a desk or other heavy
object in order to help prevent unauthorized removal or theft. The computer
has a security lock slot on its left side into which you can attach one end of
the security cable, while the other end attaches to a desk or similar object.
The methods used for attaching security cables differ from product to
product. Please refer to the instructions for the product you are using for
more information.
Connecting the security lock
In order to connect a security cable to the computer, follow the steps as
detailed below:
1. Turn the computer so its left hand side faces you.
2. Align the security cable with the 'lock hole' and secure it in place.
Security lock slot
Figure 3-29 Security lock
User’s Manual
3-44
Hardware, Utilities and Options
Optional accessories
You are able to add a number of options and accessories in order to make
your computer even more powerful and convenient to use. For reference,
the following list details some of the items that are available from your
reseller or TOSHIBA dealer:
User’s Manual
DDR2-400/533
Memory Module
A 512MB or 1,024MB memory module (DDR2533) can easily be installed in the computer.
DDR2-667 Memory
Module
A 512MB, 1,024 or 2,048MB memory module
(DDR2-667) can easily be installed in the
computer.
Universal AC
Adaptor
If you frequently use your computer at more than
one site, it may be convenient to purchase an
additional AC adaptor to be kept at each site in
order to remove the need to always carry the
adaptor with you.
Battery Pack
An additional battery pack can be purchased for
use as either a spare or replacement. Please
refer to Chapter 6, Power and Power-Up Modes
for further information.
Slice Expansion
Battery
This battery pack increases your computer's
operating time when a main battery pack is also
installed. It is connectable to the Docking port of
the computer.
Slice Expansion
Battery adaptor
The Slice Expansion Battery adaptor is used to
connect with the Battery Charger in order to
charge a Slice Expansion Battery.
Battery Charger
The optional battery charger allows you to
charge extra battery packs outside of having to
use the computer.
USB FDD Kit
The USB floppy diskette drive accommodates
either a 1.44MB or 720KB floppy diskette through
connection to one of the computer's USB ports.
In use, please be aware that, while you cannot
format 720KB floppy diskettes under Windows
Vista®, you are able to read and write to diskettes
that have already been formatted.
HDD Kit (Serial-ATA)
You can increase your computer's data storage
capacity with additional hard disk drive. It is
available in the following size:
■ 80GB
3-45
Hardware, Utilities and Options
TOSHIBA Express
Port Replicator
The TOSHIBA Express Port Replicator provides
the ports available on the computer in addition to
a digital visual interface (DVI) port, External
monitor port, Universal Serial Bus port (USB2.0)
x 4, LAN jack.
Tablet PC Pen
Tablet PC Pens can be purchased from your
TOSHIBA dealer for use as spare items (spare
pen tips and a tip draw-out tool are included).
Reserve Pen
Reserve Pen can be purchased from your
TOSHIBA dealer. Use the Reserve Pen in place
of the Tablet PC Pen if the Tablet PC Pen is lost
or broken.
Ultra Slim Bay options
The following module can be installed in the Ultra Slim Bay. All other
module is option.
User’s Manual
Ultra Slim Bay HDD
Adaptor
An adaptor lets you install an optional hard disk
drive described in Ultra Slim Bay HDD Adaptor.
Ultra Slim Bay DVD
Super Multi (Double
Layer) Drive Kit
Refer to the Hardware section for details.
3-46
Chapter 4
Operating Basics
This chapter describes the basic operations of your computer, highlights
the precautions that should be taken when using it.
Pointing Devices
The pointing devices of this computer vary from model to model.
■ Digitizer screen model: The Touch Pad and the Tablet PC Pen which
comes with the computer can be used as a pointing device.
■ Digitizer and touch screen model: The Touch Pad and Tablet PC Pen
which comes with the computer or a finger can be used as pointing
devices.
■ Display screen model: The Touch Pad can be used as a pointing
device.
■ Digitizer and touch screen model: The Touch pointer is provided as a
supplementary tool for operations which are difficult to carry out only
using your finger.
■ Display screen model: Operations on the display screen can not be
done either by using Tablet PC Pen or your finger. Please refrain from
touching the display screen to avoid damaging it.
User’s Manual
4-1
Operating Basics
Using the Touch Pad
To use the Touch Pad, simply touch and move your fingertip across it in the
direction you want the on-screen pointer to go.
Touch Pad
control buttons
Touch Pad
Figure 4-1 Touch Pad and Touch Pad control buttons
The two buttons below the Touch Pad are used like the buttons on a
standard mouse - press the left button to select a menu item or to
manipulate text or graphics designated by the pointer, and press the right
button to display a menu or other function depending on the software you
are using.
You can also tap the Touch Pad to perform functions similar to those of the
left button on a standard mouse.
Click: Tap once
Double-click: Tap twice
Drag and drop: Tap to select the item(s) you want to move, leave your
finger on the Touch Pad after the second tap and then move the
item(s) to their new destination.
User’s Manual
4-2
Operating Basics
Using the Tablet PC Pen and Reserve Pen
You can use the Tablet PC Pen to execute actions and enter data. Hold the
Tablet PC Pen in a natural position and tap, press or trace on the screen
lightly.
Some computers in the series are equipped with a Tablet PC Pen and a
Reserve Pen.
Eraser button
Pen button
Pen button
Pen point
Pen point
Figure 4-2 The Tablet PC Pen (the left) and Reserve Pen (the right)
User’s Manual
Eraser button
You can use this button as an eraser when using
a graphics software application. Text based
software application enable you to select and
delete characters with a one-touch action.
Pen button
Provides the same function as clicking the right
Touch Pad control button.
Pen point
Provides the same function as clicking the left
Touch Pad control button.
4-3
Operating Basics
Observe the following precautions on the handling of the Tablet PC Pen.
■ In order to avoid damages to the display screen, please refrain from
doing anything other than the specified operation methods. Failure to
do so could cause a malfunction or characteristic deterioration.
■ Do not tap or press the Tablet PC Pen forcefully against the display as
this could damage the Tablet PC Pen and the screen itself.
■ Avoid using or keeping the Tablet PC Pen in areas where the
temperature can change rapidly or in places, such as a car, where the
Tablet PC Pen is exposed to direct sunlight. Store the Tablet PC Pen
without any pressure being applied to the buttons. Failure to do so
could cause a malfunction or characteristic deterioration.
■ The Tablet PC Pen is composed of precision parts. Do not drop the
Tablet PC Pen. Strong impact causes a malfunction or characteristic
deterioration.
■ Do not apply excessive force to the Tablet PC Pen point and the side
buttons. Excessive force applied to these parts causes short life or
characteristic deterioration (Allowable force to pen point, Eraser button,
Pen button: less than 1 kg, for less than 30 seconds).
■ Avoid water entering the Tablet PC Pen or condensation forming within
it as either condition will cause a malfunction.
■ Do not disassemble the Tablet PC Pen. It causes maladjustment or
short life.
■ Do not stain the Tablet PC Pen with cosmetics or chemicals as this will
cause a deterioration in appearance. Use a glass wiping cloth or dry
cloth to clean the Tablet PC Pen. Do not use volatile liquids such as
alcohol, thinner or petroleum benzine to clean the Tablet PC Pen.
■ Do not apply excessive force to the Tablet PC Pen point as a bent or
deformed pen point will cause a malfunction.
■ Keep the small parts of the Tablet PC Pen, such as the pen point or the
knob of the side buttons, away from infants and small children to
prevent the accidental ingestion by them.
■ Do not use a ball point pen instead of the Tablet PC Pen included with
the product.
■ Do not use a broken pen tip.
■ The pen tip cannot be replaced if it is worn (Reserve Pen only).
■ You can change the Tablet PC Pen setting and the Touch pointer
setting, using the Pen and Input Device.
■ TOSHIBA is not liable for any problems arising on the products due to
the use of the Tablet PC Pen in an environment where the above
conditions are not satisfied or because of its use by unspecified
number of users.
User’s Manual
4-4
Operating Basics
Removing the Tablet PC Pen
To remove the Tablet PC Pen, follow the steps as described below:
1. Slide the Tablet PC Pen from the Tablet PC Pen slot, so that it
protrudes slightly.
2. Pull the Tablet PC Pen to remove it from the Tablet PC Pen slot.
Tablet PC Pen slot
Tablet PC Pen
Figure 4-3 Removing the Tablet PC Pen
Inserting the Tablet PC Pen
The Tablet PC Pen is included in the small case coming with the product.
Remove the Tablet PC Pen from small case and install it to the computer
as follows:
1. Insert the Tablet PC Pen into the Tablet PC Pen slot until it clicks.
The Tablet PC Pen and the Reserve Pen are different in shape. Do not
insert the Reserve Pen into the Tablet PC Pen slot.
Tablet PC Pen slot
Tablet PC Pen
Figure 4-4 Inserting the Tablet PC Pen
Pen actions
You can use the Tablet PC Pen to enter data, start programs, move objects
and execute other actions.
Single tap
Lightly tap the tip of the Tablet PC Pen on an object and lift it immediately
to execute an action. A single tap is similar to clicking the left touch pad
control button.
User’s Manual
4-5
Operating Basics
Double tap
Lightly tap the tip of the Tablet PC Pen twice on an object and lift it
immediately to execute an action. A double-tap is similar to double-clicking
the left touch pad control button.
Press and hold
Touch the tip of the Tablet PC Pen to the display screen and hold it there to
display a pop-up menu or other action. Press and hold is similar to clicking
the right touch pad control button.
Drag
Touch the Tablet PC Pen to the screen. Without lifting the Tablet PC Pen,
drag it across the screen to select text or objects.
Drag and drop
Touch the Tablet PC Pen to the screen to select an object. Without lifting
the Tablet PC Pen, drag it across the screen. Lift the Tablet PC Pen to drop
the object to a new location.
Replacing the pen tip
To replace the pen tip, follow the steps as described below:
1. Pinch the tip with a draw-out tool and pull it out.
2. Insert a new pen tip into the Tablet PC Pen carefully, and press it
securely.
Draw-out tool
Pen tip
Figure 4-5 Replacing the pen tip
Do not continue to use a broken pen tip as this may result in scratching of
the display panel. When the pen tip breaks replace it with one of the refills
delivered with the Tablet PC Pen. When these refills have run out, you can
purchase a new pen set from a TOSHIBA authorized dealer.
■ A short and worn pen point is difficult to pull out. Replace the pen point
with a refill before it becomes too short to remove.
■ It is recommended that you keep another pen set as a spare. You can
buy replacement pen sets from your TOSHIBA authorized dealer.
User’s Manual
4-6
Operating Basics
Removing the Reserve Pen case
To remove the Reserve Pen case, follow the steps as detailed below:
1. Save your work.
2. Turn the computer’s power off - ensure that the Power indicator is off.
3. Remove all cables and peripherals that are connected to the computer.
4. Close the display panel and turn the computer upside down.
Always make sure the display panel is closed in Laptop mode before
turning the computer upside down.
5. Slide and then lift out the Reserve Pen case.
Push lightly the point shown by the arrow using an object with a thin tip.
Reserve Pen case
Reserve Pen
case slot
Figure 4-6 Removing the Reserve Pen case
Inserting the Reserve Pen case
To insert the Reserve Pen case, follow the steps as detailed below:
1. Insert the Reserve Pen case into the Reserve Pen case slot on the
computer and slide it until it locks.
Reserve Pen case
Reserve Pen
case slot
Figure 4-7 Inserting the Reserve Pen case
User’s Manual
4-7
Operating Basics
Storing and Removing the Reserve Pen from the Reserve
Pen case
Follow the procedures below to remove the Reserve Pen from the Reserve
Pen case.
Removing the Reserve Pen from the Reserve Pen case
1. Lift the Reserve Pen up from the Reserve Pen case by its end.
Reserve Pen
Reserve Pen case
Figure 4-8 Removing the Reserve Pen from the Reserve Pen case
Storing the Reserve Pen in the Reserve Pen case
1. Insert the tip of the Reserve Pen into the Reserve Pen case holder and
press down.
Reserve Pen
Reserve Pen case
Reserve Pen case
holder
Figure 4-9 Storing the Reserve Pen in the Reserve Pen case
User’s Manual
4-8
Operating Basics
Using the Tablet mode
This section explains Tablet mode functions and use.
Operating the computer in Tablet mode
When operating the computer in Tablet mode, follow the instructions below.
Figure 4-10 Operating the computer in Tablet mode (using a Tablet PC Pen)
■ Hold the computer firmly on your forearm. Do not block the vent.
■ Remove the AC adaptor from the computer when using it in Tablet
mode held in your forearm.
■ Do not use the computer while walking or driving a car.
■ Change to Laptop mode and turn off the computer before carrying it. Do
not carry the computer with power on or in Sleep Mode. Do not carry
the computer while the Hard Disk Drive indicator is glowing.
■ Do not expose the computer to rapid temperature changes (such as
would be the case if you brought the computer from a cold environment
into a warm room). When rapid temperature changes are unavoidable,
leave the computer for around two hours before turning it on to prevent
the formation of condensation.
■ Remove all external peripheral devices and their connection cables
from the computer before carrying.
■ Do not drop the computer or apply excessive impact to it. Do not leave
the computer in a car or similar environment where it is exposed to
direct sunlight.
■ Do not put the computer in a bag when it is in Tablet mode.
User’s Manual
4-9
Operating Basics
■ The function of the display screen varies from model to model.
■ Digitizer screen model: Please use the Tablet PC Pen to operate,
which comes with the computer.
Please carefully observe the following items in order to avoid
damaging the display screen. Incorrect use could cause the screen
to be scratched.
■ Do not press on the screen with anything other than the
included touch pen (especially with anything pointed)
■ Prevent long fingernails and rings or other metal from touching
the screen
■ Do not apply excessive pressure to the screen
■ Digitizer and touch screen model: Please operate either using the
Tablet PC Pen which comes with the computer or your finger.
Please carefully observe the following items in order to avoid
damaging the display screen. Incorrect use could cause the screen
to be scratched.
■ Do not press on the screen with anything other than the
included touch pen (especially with anything pointed)
■ Prevent long fingernails and rings or other metal from touching
the screen
■ Do not apply excessive pressure to the screen
■ If you operate simultaneously by finger and Tablet PC Pen, then
the operation of Tablet PC Pen gets executed. Operations done
by the finger are not available.
■ Only touch one location at a time when operating using your
finger. If you touch multiple locations simultaneously, the input
will not be correctly interpreted.
■ Display screen model: Operations on the display screen can not be
done either by using Tablet PC Pen or your finger. Please refrain
from touching the display screen to avoid damaging it.
User’s Manual
4-10
Operating Basics
■ The display panel works as a touch sensitive digitizer screen. However,
the outer edges of the screen may be less sensitive. Please keep the
Tablet PC Pen or your finger inside the display area when you use it
near the edges of the display panel. The position of the pen may not be
recognized if you move the Tablet PC Pen or your finger too fast
towards the outer edge. Please be sure to slide the Tablet PC Pen or
your finger slowly in areas near the edges of the screen.
Use the Tablet PC Pen or your finger in the areas enclosed by the
dotted line as shown in the following figure.
Display screen model: Operations on the display screen can not be done
either by using Tablet PC Pen or your finger. Please refrain from touching
the display screen to avoid damaging it.
Figure 4-11 Use area of a Tablet PC Pen
■ When performing operations on the display screen using the Table PC
Pen or a finger, the on-screen cursor position may deviate from the
actual pen (or finger) position in the following situations:
■ If the screen resolution is lower than 1280 x 800 (For example 800
x 600)
■ When the Aspect Ratio Options in the Intel® GMA Driver for Mobile
(Intel® Graphics Media Accelerator Driver for mobile) Display
Settings are set to Maintain Aspect Ratio or Center Desktop
Adjust one of the following settings to correct cursor position deviation.
■ Set the resolution to 1280 x 800
■ Set the Aspect Ratio Options to Full Screen (No Border)
■ Do not block the vent of the computer when holding it. If you continue
to expose your skin to the hot air expelled from the vent for a long time,
your skin might suffer low temperature injury.
User’s Manual
4-11
Operating Basics
Changing to the Tablet mode
To change from Laptop mode to the Tablet mode, follow the instructions
below.
1. Open the display panel to the upright position.
When rotating the display panel, be sure to keep the display panel at a
90-degree angle to the keyboard.
Figure 4-12 Changing to the Tablet mode (1)
■ Place the computer on a stable, flat surface such as a desktop and
rotate the display panel slowly, holding the panel at its lower part.
■ To change from Laptop mode to Tablet mode you must rotate the
display panel 180 degrees clockwise.
Tablet mode icon
Turn the display panel to the direction indicated
by the Tablet mode icon.
To change from Tablet mode to Laptop mode you must rotate the display
panel 180 degrees counter-clockwise.
Laptop mode icon
User’s Manual
Turn the display panel to the direction indicated
by the Laptop mode icon.
4-12
Operating Basics
2. Rotate the display panel clockwise slowly.
■ When rotating display panel of your computer, be sure to slowly turn it
in the proper direction, and not apply excessive force or speed.
■ Do not attempt to rotate the display panel past the maximum rotation
point. Forcing the display panel past the maximum rotation point will
damage the display panel.
■ Rotating the display panel counter-clockwise will break the hinge and
cause the computer to cease to function correctly.
Figure 4-13 Changing to the Tablet mode (2)
3. Close the display panel slowly with display surface facing upwards.
Figure 4-14 Changing to the Tablet mode (3)
User’s Manual
4-13
Operating Basics
Changing to the Laptop mode
To change the operating mode to the Laptop mode, follow the steps as
detailed below:
1. Raise the display to the upright position carefully.
2. Rotate the display counter-clockwise slowly.
3. Close the display.
Changing the screen orientation
The orientation of the computer screen can be changed to one of the
following four display modes:
Primary landscape
Primary portrait
Secondary landscape
Secondary portrait
Figure 4-15 Four display modes
User’s Manual
4-14
Operating Basics
■ Execute the following applications on Primary landscape:
■ 3D game software
■ 3D screen saver
■ Playback of a motion picture as would be the case using
DVD-Video playback on the computer connected to an external
DVD-ROM Drive.
■ The screen cannot automatically rotate in the following cases.
You should first quit the running application and then rotate the screen:
■ Running of an application that changes the screen resolution
dynamically, such as a game that is running in full-screen mode.
■ DOS prompt in full-screen mode.
■ Running of 3D screen saver.
■ Do not play 3D game software or replay DVD-Video in a display mode
other than Primary landscape. An abnormality will appear on the
Windows screen display when you replay a DVD-Video in a mode other
than Primary landscape because DVD playback software can boot only
in the Primary landscape mode.
■ An abnormality will appear on the Windows screen display when you
change from Tablet mode to Laptop mode while a 3D screen saver is
running. In this case, press any key while in Laptop mode to deactivate
the 3D screen saver.
Method 1: Changing the screen orientation using TOSHIBA
Accelerometer Utilities and TOSHIBA Rotation Utility
When the TOSHIBA Accelerometer Utilities and TOSHIBA Rotation Utility
are running, changes in the orientation of the top and bottom of the screen
is automatically recognized by pressing ESC/Rotation button for more than
a second.
Method 2: Changing the screen orientation using Taskbar
1.
2.
3.
4.
User’s Manual
Click Start and open Control Panel.
Select Mobile PC.
Open Tablet PC Settings.
Click Change button in Display tab.
4-15
Operating Basics
5. Select a screen orientation from the Orientation pull down menu and
change the screen.
You can set the orientation of the desktop screen just after rotating the
display from Start -> All Programs -> TOSHIBA -> Tablet PC ->
Rotation Utility.
Using Accelerometer Utilities
When you shake the computer:
■ Do not shake the computer too strongly as this may cause the
computer to be dropped or hit those people or items around you.
■ Avoid using the computer in crowded places (e.g. in commuter trains or
in busy streets).
This may cause injury to children or adults, or damage to the computer.
When the TOSHIBA HDD protection function is turned on and the Tilt
function (function to start applications, etc. by waving the computer
vertically or horizontally) is used, the TOSHIBA HDD protection message
may be displayed on the screen. Turn off the TOSHIBA HDD protection
function in order to stop such messages from displaying.
It is safer if you hold the computer with both hands horizontally as shown in
the below example.
The computer is shaken horizontally.
The computer is shaken perpendicularly.
Figure 4-16 Shake the computer
User’s Manual
4-16
Operating Basics
Using the Fingerprint Sensor
This product has a fingerprint utility installed for the purpose of enrolling
and recognizing fingerprints. By enrolling the ID and password onto the
fingerprint authentication feature, it is no longer necessary to input the
password from the keyboard. Fingerprint feature enables you to:
■ Logon to Windows and access a security enabled homepage through
Internet Explorer.
■ Files and folders can be encrypted/decrypted and third party access to
them prevented.
■ Disable the password-protected screen-saver when returning from a
power-saving mode such as Sleep Mode.
■ Authentication of the User Password (and, if applicable, the HDD(Hard
Disk Drive) Password) when booting up the computer (Pre-OS
Authentication).
■ Single-Swipe Sign On feature
Fingerprint cannot be used in models that do not have a fingerprint module
installed.
How to Swipe your Finger
Using the following steps when swiping fingers for fingerprint registration or
authentication will help to minimize authentication failures:
Align the first joint of the finger to the center of the sensor. Lightly touch the
sensor and swipe finger levelly towards you when in portrait mode, and
sideways when in either landscape mode or Laptop mode.
While lightly touching the sensor, swipe the finger towards you when in
portrait mode, and sideways when in either landscape mode or Laptop
mode until the sensor surface becomes visible.
User’s Manual
4-17
Operating Basics
The following illustrations show the recommended way to swipe your finger
over the fingerprint sensor.
Sample. 1) When swiping the index finger
Sample. 2) When swiping the thumb
Sensor
Sensor
Figure 4-17 Swipe the finger
■ Avoid swiping with your finger stiff or pressed too hard onto the sensor,
and take care to ensure that the center of the fingerprint is touching the
sensor before swiping. Either of these conditions may cause fingerprint
reading to fail.
■ Check the center of the fingerprint whorl before swiping and then
ensure this is swiped along the center line of the sensor.
■ There is a possibility of authentication failures if the finger is swiped too
quickly or too slowly - follow any on-screen instructions to adjust the
speed used during the swipe process.
User’s Manual
4-18
Operating Basics
Points to note about the Fingerprint Sensor
Please be aware of the following considerations when using the fingerprint
sensor. A failure to follow these guidelines might result in damage to the
sensor, sensor failure, fingerprint recognition problems or a lower
fingerprint recognition success rate.
■ Do not scratch or poke the sensor with your nails or any hard or sharp
objects.
■ Do not press the sensor strongly.
■ Do not touch the sensor with a wet finger or any wet objects - keep the
sensor surface dry and free from water vapor.
■ Do not touch the sensor with a soiled or dirty finger as minute foreign
particles of dust and dirt may scratch it.
■ Do not paste stickers or write on the sensor.
■ Do not touch the sensor with a finger or any other object which may
have a build-up of static electricity on it.
Observe the following before you place your finger on the sensor whether
for fingerprint enrollment/registration or recognition.
■ Wash and dry your hands thoroughly.
■ Remove static electricity from your fingers by touching any metal
surface. Static electricity is a common cause of sensor failures,
especially when the weather is dry.
■ Clean the sensor with a lint-free cloth - do not use detergent or any
other chemicals to clean the sensor.
■ Avoid the following finger conditions for enrollment or recognition as
they may result in fingerprint enrollment errors or a drop in the
fingerprint recognition success rate
■ Soaked or swollen finger, for example as may occur after taking a
bath.
■ Injured finger
■ Wet finger
■ Soiled or oily finger
■ Extremely dry skin condition on finger
Observe the following to improve the fingerprint recognition success rate.
■ Enroll two or more fingers.
■ Enroll additional fingers if a recognition failure often occurs when using
already enrolled fingers.
■ Check the condition of your finger - any conditions which have changed
since enrollment, such as injury, rough skin, and extremely dry, wet,
soiled, dirty, oily, soaked or swollen fingers, may lower the recognition
success rate. Also if the fingerprint is worn down or the finger becomes
thinner or fatter, the recognition success rate may be lowered.
■ As the fingerprint for each finger is different and unique you should
ensure that only the registered or enrolled fingerprint or fingerprints are
used for identification.
User’s Manual
4-19
Operating Basics
■ Check the position and speed at which you swipe your finger across the
sensor - please refer to the preceding drawing.
■ The fingerprint sensor compares and analyzes the unique
characteristics in a fingerprint. However, there may be instances where
certain users are unable to register their fingerprints due to insufficient
unique characteristics in their fingerprints.
■ The recognition success rate may differ from user to user.
Setup Procedure
Please use the following procedure when first using fingerprint
authentication.
Fingerprint Registration
You should initially enroll the required authentication data using the
Fingerprint Enrollment Wizard.
■ In use, the fingerprint authentication system will use the same
username and password as defined within the Windows operating
system. If no Windows password has been configured, you must do
this before starting the fingerprint registration process.
■ This sensor has the memory space for at least twenty-one fingerprint
patterns. You might be able to register more fingerprint patterns
depending on the sensor memory usage.
1. To run this program, click Start -> All Programs -> TrueSuite Access
Manager -> Fingerprint Application.
You are also able to start the Fingerprint Enrollment Wizard by using the
following methods.
■ Click the Fingerprint Application icon in the Taskbar.
2. The Verify screen will be displayed, enter the Windows logon password
and click the Next button.
3. On the User's Fingers screen click the box above the finger you wish
to register.
If any of the previously enrolled fingerprints is selected again, the latest
information will be enrolled and any previous information over-written.
4. The Fingerprint Enrollment screen will be displayed and the tutorial
will begin. First click "Replay video" and confirm the proper movement
for the finger you wish to register. Then confirm the message displayed
on this screen and ensure that there is a check mark in the Run
Interactive Tutorial box. Once this has been done, click Next.
5. At the Scanning Practice screen, you are able to practice swiping
(three times) your finger to ensure you use the correct method. Click
"Try again" to if you wish to practice again. You have finished
practicing, click Next button.
User’s Manual
4-20
Operating Basics
6. Register your fingerprint on the Fingerprint Image Capture screen.
Let the computer read the finger to be registered 3 times. An image of
your fingerprint will be shown on the screen each time the fingerprint is
successfully read.
Once the fingerprint is successfully read for the third time, the message
Successfully combined will be displayed beneath the fingerprint
images. Click the Next button.
7. When the Store To Sensor screen is displayed, check Store
fingerprint to Sensor. Click Finish to complete fingerprint registration.
It is strongly recommended that you register 2 or more fingerprints. Repeat
the procedure from step 3 to register another fingerprint.
How to Delete the Fingerprint Data
Saved fingerprint data is stored in special non-volatile memory inside the
fingerprint sensor. Therefore, if you give the computer to someone else, or
dispose of it in any way, the following process is recommended to delete
your fingerprint information:
1. To run this program, click Start -> All Programs -> TrueSuite Access
Manager -> Fingerprint Application.
2. The Verify screen will be displayed, so either swipe your registered
finger or enter the Windows logon password and click the Next button.
3. The User's Fingers screen is displayed.
■ To delete all registered fingerprints
1. Click Delete All Fingerprints.
2. Follow the on-screen instructions to deleted the registered
fingerprints.
■ To delete individual fingerprints
1. Click the fingerprint mark above the registered finger.
2. Click Delete All Fingerprints.
3. "Are you sure you want to delete this fingerprint?" will be displayed
on the screen, click Yes button.
4. When Delete All Fingerprints is selected, the user selection
screen will be displayed, so select which user's fingerprint data to
delete.
■ Selecting "Delete current user's fingerprints" will delete the
fingerprint data for the currently logged in user.
■ Selecting "Delete all users' fingerprints" will delete the
fingerprint data for all users, however this item can only be
selected if the currently logged in user has administrator
privileges.
5. A message will be displayed asking for confirmation to delete the
fingerprint data, click the Yes button.
User’s Manual
4-21
Operating Basics
In use, please be aware of the following limitations of the fingerprint sensor:
■ A warning message will be displayed when recognition is abnormal or
recognition is not successful within a fixed duration.
■ The fingerprint sensor compares and analyzes the unique
characteristics in a fingerprint. However, there may be instances where
certain users are unable to register their fingerprints due to insufficient
unique characteristics in their fingerprints.
■ The recognition success rate may differ from user to user.
■ Toshiba does not guarantee that this fingerprint recognition technology
will be error-free.
■ Toshiba does not guarantee that the fingerprint sensor will recognize
the enrolled user or accurately screen out unauthorized users at all
times. Toshiba is not liable for any failure or damage that might arise
out of the use of this fingerprint recognition software or utility.
Points to note about the Fingerprint Utility software
You are able to backup saved fingerprint data and information within the by
using the Import or Export User Data facility under the fingerprint
management software. However, please be aware that any encrypted files
cannot be backup within File protection using this function - in these
instances it is recommended that you backup these files to external media
using standard file copy processes.
The Encrypting File System (EFS) is a Windows Vista® feature.
If a file is encrypted using EFS, it cannot be encrypted further using the
fingerprint authentication function.
Windows Logon via Fingerprint Authentication
If required, you are also able to use fingerprint authentication in place of the
usual Windows logon process using your username and password.
This method is especially useful where there are many users using the
same computer as it removes the need for actual user selection when the
system is started.
Fingerprint Authentication Procedure
1. Start up the computer.
2. At the Windows Welcome screen, choose any of the enrolled fingers
and swipe the fingerprint on the sensor - if the authentication process is
successful, the user will automatically be logged in to Windows.
If the fingerprint authentication process fails you will need to log into
Windows using the appropriate username and password. In addition, you
should use this manual login process if fingerprint authentication fails for
three consecutive tries - a warning message will be displayed when
authentication is not normal or is not successful within a fixed duration.
User’s Manual
4-22
Operating Basics
Fingerprint Pre-OS Authentication
General
The fingerprint authentication system can be used to replace the keyboard
based password authentication system that is used when the computer is
turned on.
If you do not want to use the fingerprint authentication system for password
authentication while booting up the computer, instead you prefer using the
keyboard entry method, simply press the BACK SPACE key or the
ESC/Rotation button when the Fingerprint Pre-OS Authentication screen is
displayed.
Using this process will switch the password input screen across to the
keyboard based entry screen.
■ You must ensure that you use the TOSHIBA Password Utility to
register a User Password before using the Fingerprint Pre-OS
Authentication and its extended function to allow fingerprints to be used
to access the computer when it is turned on.
■ If the fingerprint authentication process fails five times, a preset time
limit is exceeded, or you press the BACK SPACE key, [Password =]
will be displayed on the screen and you will have to enter either the
User Password or Supervisor Password manually in order to start the
computer.
■ When swiping your finger, please ensure that you do it slowly and at a
constant speed. If you find that this does not improve the authentication
rate, you should try to adjust the speed at which the finger is swiped.
■ If there are any changes in the environment or settings related to
authorization, you will be required to provide authorization information
such as a User Password (and, if applicable, the HDD(Hard Disk Drive)
password).
How to Enable Fingerprint Pre-OS Authentication Settings
It is necessary to first enroll your fingerprint with the Fingerprint Application
prior to enabling and configuring the Fingerprint Pre-OS Authentication
System. You should check that your fingerprint is enrolled before
configuring the settings (please refer to the Manual for Fingerprint
Registration/Enrollment for further instructions).
1. To run this program, click Start -> All Programs -> TrueSuite Access
Manager -> Fingerprint Application with Admin.
2. UserAccountControl screen is displayed, click the Allow button.
This setting can only be changed if the currently logged in user has
administrator privileges.
3. Swipe a registered finger on the fingerprint sensor.
4. Click the Setting menu at the TrueSuiteAccessManager screen.
5. Administrator Setting screen is displayed, check the "Enable Pre-OS
Fingerprint Authentication" check box and then click OK.
6. Click the Exit button at the TrueSuiteAccessManager screen.
User’s Manual
4-23
Operating Basics
Fingerprint Single-Swipe Sign On Feature
General
This is a feature that allows the user to complete the authentication for both
the User/BIOS Password (and, if applicable, the HDD(Hard Disk Drive)
Password) and logging onto Windows using only one fingerprint
authentication when booting up.
It is necessary to register the User/BIOS Password and Windows Logon
Password before using the Fingerprint Pre-OS Authentication and this
Fingerprint Single-Swipe Sign On Feature. Please use the TOSHIBA
Password Utility to register your User/BIOS Password. If Windows Logon is
not the default for your system, see Manual to register your Windows
Logon Password.
Only one fingerprint authentication is required to replace the User/BIOS
Password (and, if applicable, the HDD(Hard Disk Drive) Password) and the
Windows Logon Password.
How to Enable Fingerprint Single-Swipe Sign On Feature
It is necessary to first enroll your fingerprint with the Fingerprint application
prior to enabling and configuring the Fingerprint Single-Swipe Sign On
feature. You should check that your fingerprint is enrolled before
configuring the settings (please refer to the Manual for Fingerprint
Registration/Enrollment for further instructions).
1. To run this program, click Start -> All Programs -> TrueSuite Access
Manager -> Fingerprint Application with Admin.
2. UserAccountControl screen is displayed, click the Allow button.
This setting can only be changed if the currently logged in user has
administrator privileges.
3. Swipe a registered finger on the fingerprint sensor.
4. Click the Setting menu at the TrueSuiteAccessManager screen.
5. Administrator Setting screen is displayed, check the "Enable SingleSign On Fingerprint Authentication" check box and then click OK.
6. Click the Exit button at the TrueSuiteAccessManager screen.
Fingerprint utility limitations
TOSHIBA does not guarantee that the fingerprint utility technology will be
completely secure or error-free, or that it will accurately screen out
unauthorized users at all times. TOSHIBA is not liable for any failure or
damage that might arise out of the use of the fingerprint software.
■ The fingerprint sensor compares and analyzes the unique
characteristics in a fingerprint. However, there may be instances where
certain users are unable to register their fingerprints due to insufficient
unique characteristics in their fingerprints.
■ The recognition success rate may differ from user to user.
User’s Manual
4-24
Operating Basics
Web Camera
Web Camera is a device that allows you to record video or take
photographs with your computer. You can use it for video chatting or video
conferences using a communication tool such as Windows Live
Messenger. Camera Assistant Software will help you to add various
video effects to your video or photograph.
Enables the transmission of video and use of video chat via the internet
using specialized applications.
The effective pixel count for this web camera is 1.3 million.
Please refer to the Camera Assistant Software Online Help for details.
Web Camera
Microphone
Web Camera LED
Figure 4-18 Web Camera
User’s Manual
4-25
Operating Basics
■ Do not point the web camera directly at the sun.
■ Do not touch or press strongly on the web camera lens. Doing so may
reduce image quality. Use an eyeglass cleaner (cleaner cloth) or other
soft cloth to clean the lens if it becomes dirty.
■ Setting the [Size] to more than "800x600" will cause a larger amount of
data to be written to the hard disk drive and may interfere with smooth
recording.
■ When recording in dimly lit environments, the following procedure can
be used to select "Night Mode" which allows for brighter images with
less noise.
1. Click the Properties button on the [Web Camera] menu.
2. Check Night Mode on the [Options] tab.
3. Click the OK button.
The number of frames per second is lowered when "video recording" in
"Night Mode". This may result in the playback of the recorded video file
seeming unsmooth.
Changing Ultra Slim Bay modules
This section explains how to change modules in the Ultra Slim Bay. The
illustrations show replacement of the optical disc drive with the Ultra Slim
Bay HDD Adaptor.
To avoid injury, do not put your hand into the Ultra Slim Bay slot.
Removing a module
To remove the optical disc drive, follow the steps as described below:
1. Save your work.
2. Turn the computer's power off - ensure that the Power indicator is off.
3. Remove all cables and peripherals that are connected to the computer.
4. Close the display panel.
Always make sure the display panel is closed in Laptop mode before
turning the computer upside down.
Wait for all disk indicators to go out before you turn over the computer and
do not lay the computer down gently. Shock can damage the HDD or other
components.
5. Turn the computer upside down and remove the battery pack (refer to
Replacing the battery pack section in Chapter 6, Power and Power-Up
Modes, if required).
6. Remove the Ultra Slim Bay lock screw from the Lock position.
7. Set the Ultra Slim Bay lock screw in the Unlock position.
User’s Manual
4-26
Operating Basics
8. Slide the Ultra Slim Bay latch to the unlock position.
9. Grasp the optical disc drive and slide it out.
The optical disc drive and other Ultra Slim Bay modules can become hot
with use. Be careful when removing the module.
Lock screw
(Unlock position)
Lock position
Optical disc drive
Ultra Slim Bay
latch
Figure 4-19 Removing the optical disc drive
Inserting a module
To insert the Ultra Slim Bay HDD Adaptor, follow the steps as described
below:
1. Insert the Ultra Slim Bay HDD Adaptor in the computer as shown below
and press until the Ultra Slim Bay latch clicks.
2. Remove the Ultra Slim Bay lock screw from the Unlock position.
3. If you want to lock the Ultra Slim Bay HDD Adaptor, set the Ultra Slim
Bay lock screw in the hole for the lock position.
Unlock position
Lock screw
(Lock position)
Ultra Slim Bay
HDD Adaptor
Figure 4-20 Inserting the Ultra Slim Bay HDD Adaptor
User’s Manual
4-27
Operating Basics
Ultra Slim Bay Case (UJ-862 model only)
The DVD Super Multi drive (UJ-862) is equipped with an Ultra Slim Bay
Case. This section explains how to remove and install the DVD Super Multi
drive unit (UJ-862).
Store the DVD Super Multi drive unit (UJ-862 model only) in the Ultra Slim
Bay Case when removing it from the computer or transporting it.
Refer to Ultra Slim Bay Case (UJ-862 model only) section in this chapter.
Removing a unit
To remove the DVD Super Multi drive unit from the Ultra Slim Bay Case,
follow the steps as described below:
1. Slide the Ultra Slim Bay latch to the unlock position.
2. Grasp the DVD Super Multi drive unit and slide it out.
DVD Super Multi drive unit
Ultra Slim Bay
latch
Figure 4-21 Removing the DVD Super Multi drive unit
Inserting a unit
To insert the DVD Super Multi drive unit into the Ultra Slim Bay Case,
follow the steps as described below:
1. Insert the DVD Super Multi drive unit in the Ultra Slim Bay Case as
shown below and press until the Ultra Slim Bay latch clicks.
DVD Super Multi drive unit
Figure 4-22 Inserting the DVD Super Multi drive unit
User’s Manual
4-28
Operating Basics
Using optical disc drives
The full-size drive provides high-performance execution of CD/DVD-ROMbased programs. You can run either 12 cm (4.72") or 8 cm (3.15")
CD/DVDs without an adaptor. An ATAPI interface controller is used for
CD/DVD-ROM operation. When the computer is accessing a CD/DVDROM, an indicator on the drive glows.
Use the WinDVD application to view DVD-Video discs.
If you have a DVD Super Multi drive, refer also to the Writing CD/DVDs on
DVD Super Multi drives section for precautions on writing to CDs/DVDs.
When the power of the optical disc drive is off, pressing the FN + Tab keys
will turn the power of the optical disc drive on. Furthermore, it is possible to
set it to turn the power of the optical disc drive on and eject the tray at the
same time.
Loading discs
To load CD/DVDs, follow the steps as detailed below:
1. When the computer’s power is on, press the eject button to open the
disc tray slightly.
2. Grasp the disc tray gently and pull until it is fully opened.
Eject button
Disc tray
Figure 4-23 Pressing the eject button and pulling the disc tray open
User’s Manual
4-29
Operating Basics
3. Lay the CD/DVD, label side up, in the disc tray.
Laser lens
Figure 4-24 Inserting a CD/DVD
When the disc tray is fully opened, the edge of the computer will extend
slightly over the CD/DVD tray. Therefore, you will need to turn the CD/DVD
at an angle when you place it in the disc tray. After seating the CD/DVD,
however, make sure it lies flat.
■ Do not touch the laser lens or any portion of its surrounding casing as
this could cause misalignment.
■ Prevent foreign objects from entering the drive. Check the surface of
the disc tray, especially the area behind the front edge of the disc tray,
to make sure there are no such objects before closing the drive.
4. Press gently at the center of the CD/DVD until you feel it click into
place. The CD/DVD should lie below the top of the spindle, flush with
the spindle base.
User’s Manual
4-30
Operating Basics
5. Push the center of the disc tray to close it. Press gently until it locks into
place.
If the CD/DVD is not seated properly when the disc tray is closed, the
CD/DVD might be damaged. Also, the disc tray might not open fully when
you press the eject button.
Figure 4-25 Closing the CD/DVD disc tray
Removing discs
To remove the CD/DVD, follow the steps as detailed below:
Do not press the eject button while the computer is accessing the media
drive. Wait for the optical disc drive indicator to go out before you open the
disc tray. Also, if the CD/DVD is spinning when you open the disc tray, wait
for it to stop before you remove it.
1. To pop the disc tray partially open, press the eject button. Gently pull
the disc tray out until it is fully opened.
When the disc tray pops open slightly, wait a moment to make sure the
CD/DVD has stopped spinning before pulling the disc tray fully open.
2. The CD/DVD extends slightly over the sides of the disc tray so you can
grasp it. Gently lift out the CD/DVD.
Figure 4-26 Removing a CD/DVD
User’s Manual
4-31
Operating Basics
3. Push the center of the disc tray to close it. Press gently until it locks into
place.
Optical Drive Auto Lock
This function automatically locks the optical disc drive eject button if the
computer detects any vibration or other shocks while running on the
battery.
This function prevents the disc tray from opening even if the eject button is
pushed unexpectedly.
When the Optical Drive Auto Lock is on, there will be key mark on the
bottom right of the Optical Drive Power icon in the Taskbar.
To enable this function, turn the Optical Drive Power ON.
Setting the Optical Drive Auto Lock
Right click the Optical Drive Power icon in the Taskbar to change the
Optical Drive Auto Lock settings.
Enabling and Disabling Optical Drive Auto Lock
1. Right click on the Optical Drive Power icon on the Taskbar.
2. Click Optical Drive Auto Lock -> Enable or Disable.
Lock Time Settings for Optical Drive Auto Lock
This sets the amount of time required to pass before the optical disc drive
eject button unlocks when the Computer detects vibration or other shock.
1. Right click on the Optical Drive Power icon on the Taskbar.
2. Click Unlock time settings -> 1s or 3s or 5s.
■ When the Optical Drive Auto Lock is engaged, the FN+Tab key
combination and Eject Buttons on application screens are disabled.
■ Optical Drive Auto Lock is not enabled immediately after the computer
is started, the Disc tray is closed, or the optical disc drive is switched
from OFF to ON using the FN+Tab keys.
User’s Manual
4-32
Operating Basics
How to remove CD/DVD when the disc tray will not open
Pressing the eject button will not open the disc tray when the computer
power is off. If the power is off, you can open the disc tray by inserting a
slender object (about 15 mm) such as a straightened paper clip into the
eject hole near the eject button.
Eject hole
Figure 4-27 Manual release with the eject hole
Turn off the power before you use the eject hole. If the CD/DVD is spinning
when you open the disc tray, the CD/DVD could fly off the spindle and
cause injury.
Writing CD/DVDs on DVD Super Multi drives
You can use the DVD Super Multi drive to write data to either CD-R, CDRW, DVD-R, DVD-R (Dual Layer), DVD-RW, DVD+R, DVD+R (Double
Layer), DVD+RW or DVD-RAM discs. TOSHIBA Disc Creator is provided
as writing software with this computer.
■ Please refer to the Writable discs, Chapter 2 for details about the types
of writable CD and DVD discs that can be supported by this computer.
■ Do not turn off the power to the optical disc drive while the computer is
accessing it as this may cause you to lose data.
■ To write data to CD-R/-RW media, use the TOSHIBA Disc Creator
feature that is installed on your computer.
■ When the power of the optical disc drive is off, the disc tray will not
open even if the eject button is pushed. Use the ODD to turn the power
of the optical disc drive on. Please refer to Chapter 5, Hot keys.
User’s Manual
4-33
Operating Basics
When writing information to media using an optical drive, you should
always ensure that you connect the AC adaptor to a live power socket. It is
possible that, if data is written while powered by the battery pack, the write
process may sometimes fail due to low battery power - in these instances
data loss may occur.
Important message
Before you write or rewrite to any of the media supported by the DVD
Super Multi Drive, please read and follow all of the setup and operating
instructions in this section. If you fail to do so, you may find that the DVD
Super Multi drive may not function properly, and you may fail to write or
rewrite information successfully - this may cause you to either lose data or
incur other damage to the drive or media.
Disclaimer
TOSHIBA does not bear responsibility for the following:
■ Damage to any CD-R, CD-RW, DVD-R, DVD-R (Dual Layer), DVD-RW,
DVD+R, DVD+R (Double Layer), DVD+RW or DVD-RAM disc that may
be caused by writing or rewriting with this product.
■ Any change or loss of the recorded contents of CD-R, CD-RW, DVD-R,
DVD-R (Dual Layer), DVD-RW, DVD+R, DVD+R (Double Layer),
DVD+RW or DVD-RAM media that may be caused by writing or
rewriting with this product, or for any business profit loss or business
interruption that may be caused by the change or loss of the recorded
contents.
■ Damage that may be caused by using third party equipment or
software.
Given the technological limitations of current optical disc writing drives, you
may experience unexpected writing or rewriting errors due to disc quality or
problems with hardware devices. In view of this, it is good practice to make
two or more copies of important data, in case of any undesired change or
loss of the recorded contents.
Before writing or rewriting
■ Based on TOSHIBA's limited compatibility testing, we suggest the
following manufacturers of CD-R, CD-RW, DVD-R, DVD-R (Dual
Layer), DVD-RW, DVD+R, DVD+R (Double Layer), DVD+RW or DVDRAM media, however, it must be noted that disc quality can affect write
or rewrite success rates. Please also be aware that in no event does
TOSHIBA guarantee the operation, quality or performance of any disc.
CD-R:
TAIYO YUDEN CO., LTD.
MITSUBISHI CHEMICAL CORPORATION
RICOH Co., Ltd.
User’s Manual
4-34
Operating Basics
CD-RW: (Multi-Speed and High-Speed)
MITSUBISHI CHEMICAL CORPORATION
RICOH Co., Ltd.
CD-RW: (Ultra-Speed)
MITSUBISHI CHEMICAL CORPORATION
DVD-R:
DVD Specifications for Recordable Disc for General Version 2.0
TAIYO YUDEN CO., LTD.
Matsushita Electric Industrial Co., Ltd
DVD-R (Dual Layer):
MITSUBISHI CHEMICAL CORPORATION
DVD+R:
MITSUBISHI CHEMICAL CORPORATION
RICOH Co., Ltd.
DVD+R (Double Layer):
MITSUBISHI CHEMICAL CORPORATION
DVD-RW:
DVD Specifications for Recordable Disc for Version 1.1 or version
1.2
VICTOR COMPANY OF JAPAN.LIMITED
MITSUBISHI CHEMICAL CORPORATION
DVD+RW:
MITSUBISHI CHEMICAL CORPORATION
RICOH Co., Ltd.
DVD-RAM:
DVD Specifications for DVD-RAM Disc for Version 2.0, Version 2.1
or Version 2.2
Matsushita Electric Industrial Co., Ltd.
Hitachi Maxell Ltd.
User’s Manual
4-35
Operating Basics
■ DVD Super Multi drive cannot use discs that allow writing faster than
16x speed (DVD-R and DVD+R media), 8x speed (DVD-R (Dual
Layer), DVD+RW and DVD+R (Double Layer) media), 6x speed (DVDRW media), 5x speed (DVD-RAM media).
■ Some types and formats of DVD-R (Dual Layer) and DVD+R (Double
Layer) discs may be unreadable.
■ 2.6GB and 5.2GB DVD-RAM media cannot be read from or written to.
■ DISC created in DVD-R (Dual Layer) format4 (Layer Jump Recording)
cannot be read.
■ If the disc is poor in quality, or is dirty or damaged, writing or rewriting
errors may be noted - ensure that you check all discs for dirt or damage
before you use them.
■ The actual number of rewrites to CD-RW, DVD-RW, DVD+RW or DVDRAM media will be affected by the quality of the disc itself and the way
in which it is used.
■ There are two types of DVD-R media available, authoring discs and
general use discs. Do not attempt to use authoring discs as only
general use discs can be written to by a computer drive.
■ You can use both DVD-RAM discs that can be removed from a
cartridge and DVD-RAM discs designed without a cartridge.
■ You may find that other computer DVD-ROM drives or other DVD
players may not be able to read DVD-R, DVD-R (Dual Layer), DVDRW, DVD+R, DVD+R (Double Layer) or DVD+RW discs.
■ Data written to a CD-R, DVD-R, DVD-R (Dual Layer), DVD+R or
DVD+R (Double Layer) discs cannot be deleted either in whole or in
part.
■ Data deleted/erased from a CD-RW, DVD-RW, DVD+RW or DVD-RAM
disc cannot be recovered. You must check the content of the disc
carefully before you delete it, taking care that, if multiple drives that can
write data to discs are connected, you do not delete data from the
wrong one.
■ In writing to DVD-R, DVD-R (Dual Layer), DVD-RW, DVD+R, DVD+R
(Double Layer), DVD+RW or DVD-RAM media, some space is required
for file management, so you may not be able to write to the full capacity
of the disc.
■ Since the disc is based on the DVD standard, it might be filled with
dummy data if the written data is less than about 1GB. Therefore, in
these circumstance, even if you write only a small amount of data, it
might take additional time to fill in the dummy data.
■ When multiple drives that can write data to discs are connected, be
sure that you do not write to or delete data from the wrong drive.
■ Be sure to connect the AC adaptor to the computer before you write or
rewrite any information.
User’s Manual
4-36
Operating Basics
■ Before you enter either Sleep Mode or Hibernation Mode, take care to
ensure that any DVD-RAM writing has been completed. In this instance,
writing is finished if you can eject the DVD-RAM media.
■ Be sure to close all other software programs except for the writing
software itself.
■ Do not run software such as a screen saver which can put a heavy load
on the processor.
■ Operate the computer at its full power settings - do not use any powersaving features.
■ Do not write information while virus checking software is running,
instead wait for it to finish, then disable the virus protection applications,
including any software that checks files automatically in the
background.
■ Do not use any hard disk utilities, including those that are intended to
enhance hard disk drive access speeds, as they may cause unstable
operation and damage data.
■ CD-RW (Ultra Speed +) media should not be used as data may be lost
or damaged.
■ You should always write from the computer's hard disk drive onto the
CD/DVD - do not try to write from shared devices such as a server or
any other network device.
■ Writing with software other than TOSHIBA Disc Creator has not been
confirmed, therefore operation with other software applications cannot
be guaranteed.
When writing or rewriting
Please observe the following points while you write or rewrite data to CD-R,
CD-RW, DVD-R, DVD-R (Dual Layer), DVD-RW, DVD+R, DVD+R (Double
Layer), DVD+RW or DVD-RAM media:
■ Always copy data from the hard disk drive to the optical media - do not
use the cut-and-paste function as the original data will be lost if there is
a write error.
■ Do not perform any of the following actions:
■ Change users in the Windows Vista® operating system.
■ Operate the computer for any other function, including such tasks as
using a mouse or Touch Pad, or closing/opening the display panel.
■ Start a communication application such as a modem.
■ Apply impact or vibration to the computer.
■ Install, remove or connect external devices, including such items as
a PC Card, Smart Card, SD/SDHC Card, USB device, external
monitor, i.LINK device, or an optical digital device.
■ Use the audio/video control button to reproduce music or voice.
■ Open the optical disc drive.
■ Do not use shut down, log off, Sleep Mode or Hibernation Mode
functions while writing or rewriting.
User’s Manual
4-37
Operating Basics
■ Make sure that the write/rewrite operation is completed before going
into either Sleep Mode or Hibernation Mode (writing is completed if you
can remove an optical media on the DVD Super Multi drive).
■ If the media is of poor quality, or is dirty or damaged, writing or rewriting
errors may occur.
■ Set the computer on a level surface and avoid places subject to
vibration such as airplanes, trains or cars. In addition, do not use the
computer on an unstable surface such as a stand.
■ Keep mobile phones and other wireless communication devices away
from the computer.
TOSHIBA Disc Creator
Please be aware of the following limitations when you use the TOSHIBA
Disc Creator:
■ DVD Video cannot be created using TOSHIBA Disc Creator.
■ DVD Audio cannot be created using TOSHIBA Disc Creator.
■ You cannot use TOSHIBA Disc Creator's 'Audio CD for Car or Home
CD Player' function to record music to DVD-R, DVD-R (Dual Layer),
DVD-RW, DVD+R, DVD+R (Double Layer) or DVD+RW media.
■ Do not use the 'Disc Backup' function of TOSHIBA Disc Creator in order
to copy DVD Video or DVD-ROM material that has copyright protection.
■ DVD-RAM discs cannot be backed up using the 'Disc Backup' function
of TOSHIBA Disc Creator.
■ You cannot back up CD-ROM, CD-R or CD-RW media to DVD-R, DVDR (Dual Layer) or DVD-RW media using the 'Disc Backup' function of
TOSHIBA Disc Creator.
■ You cannot back up CD-ROM, CD-R or CD-RW media to DVD+R,
DVD+R (Double Layer) or DVD+RW media using the 'Disc Backup'
function of TOSHIBA Disc Creator.
■ You cannot back up DVD-ROM, DVD Video, DVD-R, DVD-R (Dual
Layer), DVD-RW, DVD+R, DVD+R (Double Layer) or DVD+RW to CDR or CD-RW media using the 'Disc Backup' function of TOSHIBA Disc
Creator.
■ TOSHIBA Disc Creator cannot record in packet format.
■ You might not be able to use the 'Disc Backup' function of TOSHIBA
Disc Creator to back up a DVD-R, DVD-R (Dual Layer), DVD-RW,
DVD+R, DVD+R (Double Layer) or DVD+RW disc that was made with
other software on a different optical media recorder.
■ If you add data to a DVD-R, DVD-R (Dual Layer), DVD+R or DVD+R
(Double Layer) disc that you have already recorded to, you might not be
able to read the added data under some circumstances. For example, it
cannot be read under 16-bit operating systems, such as Windows 98SE
and Windows Me, while in Windows NT4 you will need Service Pack 6
or later, and in Windows 2000, you will need Service Pack 2. In addition
to this, some DVD-ROM and DVD-ROM / CD-R/RW drives cannot read
this added data regardless of the operating system.
User’s Manual
4-38
Operating Basics
■ TOSHIBA Disc Creator does not support recording to DVD-RAM discs to achieve this you should use Windows Explorer or another similar
utility.
■ When you back up a DVD disc, be sure that the source drive supports
recording to DVD-R, DVD-R (Dual Layer), DVD-RW, DVD+R, DVD+R
(Double Layer) or DVD+RW media - if this is not the case then the
source disc might not be backed up correctly.
■ When you back up a DVD-R, DVD-R (Dual Layer), DVD-RW, DVD+R,
DVD+R (Double Layer) or DVD+RW disc, be sure to use the same type
of disc.
■ You cannot partially delete any data written to a CD-RW, DVD-RW or
DVD+RW disc.
Data Verification
To verify that data has been written or rewritten correctly to a data CD/DVD
you should follow the steps below before you begin the write/rewrite
process:
1. Display the setting dialog box by one of the following two steps:
■ Click the Recording settings button (
) for writing on the main
toolbar in the Data Disc mode.
■ Select Settings for Each Mode -> Data Disc in the Settings menu.
2. Mark the Verify written data check box.
3. Select File Open or Full Compare mode.
4. Click the OK button.
How to learn more about TOSHIBA Disc Creator
Please refer to the Help files for additional TOSHIBA Disc Creator
information.
User’s Manual
4-39
Operating Basics
Media care
This section provides tips on protecting data stored on your CD's, DVD's
and floppy diskettes. Handle your media with care. Following the simple
precautions listed below will increase the lifetime of your media and protect
the data stored on it.
CD/DVDs
1. Store your CD's and DVD's in the containers they originally came in to
protect them and keep them clean.
2. Do not bend the CD's or DVD's.
3. Do not write on, apply a sticker to, or otherwise mar the surface of the
CD or DVD that contains the data.
4. Hold the CD or DVD by its outside edge or the edge on the center hole
- any fingerprints on the surface of the disc can prevent the drive from
properly reading data.
5. Do not expose the CD or DVD to direct sunlight, extreme heat or cold.
6. Do not place heavy objects on your CD's or DVD's.
7. If your CD's or DVD's become dusty or dirty, wipe them with a clean dry
cloth from the center hole outwards - do not wipe in a circular direction.
If necessary, you can use a cloth that has been lightly dampened in
water or a neutral cleaner but you must not use benzine, thinner or any
similar cleaning solution.
Floppy diskettes
The USB floppy diskette drive is available only as an option.
1. Store your floppy diskettes in the container they came in to protect them
and keep them clean. If a floppy diskette becomes dirty, clean it with a
soft, lightly dampened cloth - do not use cleaning fluid.
2. Never open the shutter or touch the magnetic surface of your floppy
diskette - doing this could permanently damage it and lose data.
3. Always handle floppy diskettes with care to prevent the loss of stored
data.
4. Always apply the floppy diskette label in the correct location and never
apply a new label on top of an existing one - in this instance the label
could come loose and damage the floppy diskette drive.
5. Never use a pencil for writing on a floppy diskette label as the dust from
the pencil lead could cause a system malfunction if it found its way onto
the computer's components. In this instance, always use a felt-tipped
pen and write the label first before applying it to the floppy diskette.
6. Never put a floppy diskette in a location where water or other liquid may
make contact with it, or where it is excessively damp - either of these
conditions could cause data loss.
7. Never use a wet or damp floppy diskette - this could damage the floppy
diskette drive or other devices within the computer.
User’s Manual
4-40
Operating Basics
8. Data may be lost if the floppy diskette is twisted, bent, or exposed to
direct sunlight, extreme heat or cold.
9. Do not place heavy objects on your floppy diskettes.
10. Do not eat, smoke, or use items such as erasers near your floppy
diskettes as foreign particles inside the jacket of the floppy diskette can
damage the magnetic surface.
11. Magnetic energy can destroy the data on your floppy diskettes. In view
of this you should keep your floppy diskettes away from speakers,
radios, televisions and other sources of magnetic fields.
Sound System
This section describes some of the audio control functions.
Volume Mixer
The Volume Mixer utility lets you control the audio volume for playback of
devices and applications under Windows.
■ To launch the Volume Mixer utility, right click on the speaker icon on the
Taskbar, and select Open Volume Mixer from the sub menu.
■ To adjust the volume level of speakers or headphones, move the
Speakers slider.
■ To adjust the volume level of an application that you are using, move
the slider for the corresponding application.
Microphone Level
Follow the steps below to change the microphone recording level.
1. Right click on the speaker icon on the Taskbar, and select Recording
Devices from the sub menu.
2. Select Microphone, and click Properties.
3. On the Levels tab move the Microphone slider to increase or decrease
the microphone volume level.
If you feel the microphone volume level is inadequate, move the
Microphone Boost slider to a higher level.
PC Beep Level
Follow the steps below to change the PC Beep playback level.
1. Right click on the speaker icon on the Taskbar, and select Playback
Devices in the sub menu.
2. Select Speakers, and click Properties.
3. On the Levels tab move the PC Beep slider to increase or decrease
the PC Beep volume level.
User’s Manual
4-41
Operating Basics
Audio Enhancements
In order to apply the sound effects for your current speaker, follow the steps
below.
1. Right click on the speaker icon on the Taskbar, and select Playback
Devices from the sub menu.
2. Select Speakers, and click Properties.
3. On the Enhancements tab select the sound effects you would like, and
click Apply.
Realtek HD Audio Manager
You can confirm and change the audio configuration using the Realtek
Audio Manager. To launch the Realtek Audio Manager, click Start ->
Control Panel -> Hardware and Sound -> Realtek HD Audio Manager.
When you first launch the Realtek Audio Manager, you will see two device
tabs. Speakers is the default output device. Microphone is the default
input device. To change the default device, click the Set Default Device
button under the chosen device tab.
Information
Click the information button
to view hardware information, software
information, and language setting.
Power Management
The audio controller in your computer can be turned off when the audio
function is not used. To adjust the configuration of audio power
management, click the battery button
■ When audio power management is enabled, the circle button at the
upper left of the Power Management is blue and convex.
■ When audio power management is disabled, the button is black and
concave.
Speaker Configuration
Click the playback button
to confirm the internal speakers or the
headphone sound is coming from the right direction.
Default Format
You can change the sample rate and bit depth of sound.
User’s Manual
4-42
Operating Basics
TOSHIBA Mic Effect
TOSHIBA Mic Effect provides you with a hands-free environment for
holding mutual communication via the Internet Protocol or Local Area
Network. If you wish to communicate with someone on your computer, you
can use a messenger application. However, with such an application, you
would hear your own voice returning to you as echo during the
communication if you did not use a headset system or headphone.
TOSHIBA Mic Effect will reduce these echoes generated on your
computer.
To apply the echo cancellation, follow the steps below.
1. Click the right button of a mouse on the speaker icon on the Taskbar,
and select Playback Devices in the sub menu.
2. On the Playback tab, select Speakers, and click Properties.
3. On the Advanced tab, select “16 bit, 48000 Hz (DVD Quality)” in the
pull-down menu of Default Format, and then click OK.
4. On the Recording tab, select Microphone, and click Properties.
5. On the Advanced tab, select “2 channel, 16 bit, 48000 Hz (DVD
Quality)” in the pull-down menu of the Default Format pane.
6. On the TOSHIBA Mic Effect tab, select the Enable Echo Canceller
check box, and click Apply.
Modem
This section describes how to connect and disconnect the internal modem
to and from a telephone jack.
■ Connection to any communication line other than an analog phone line
could cause a computer system failure.
■ Connect the built-in modem only to ordinary analog phone lines.
■ Never connect the built-in modem to a digital line (ISDN).
■ Never connect the built-in modem to the digital connector on a
public telephone or to a digital private branch exchange (PBX).
■ Never connect the built-in modem to a key telephone system for
residences or offices.
■ Never operate your computer on AC power during a thunderstorm. If
you see lightning or hear thunder, immediately turn off the computer.
An electric surge caused by the storm, may result in a system failure,
loss of data or hardware damage.
■ Modem functions cannot be used in models which are not equipped
with a modem.
This information is applicable to the models equipped with a built-in
modem.
User’s Manual
4-43
Operating Basics
Region selection
Telecommunication regulations vary from one region to another, so you will
need to make sure the internal modem’s settings are correct for the region
in which it will be used.
The built-in modem can be used only in specified countries and regions.
Using the modem in an area not specified for use may cause a system
failure. Check the specified areas carefully before using it.
To select a region, follow the steps as detailed below:
1. Click Start -> All Programs -> TOSHIBA -> Networking -> Modem
Region Select.
If it is available, do not use the Country/Region Select function included as
part of the modem setup utility within the Control Panel - if you change the
country/region setting this way you may find that the change does not take
effect.
2. The Region Selection icon will appear in the Windows Taskbar.
3. Click the icon with the primary (left) mouse button to display a list of
regions that the modem supports, together with a sub-menu which
details telephony location information - a check mark will appear next to
the currently selected region and telephony location.
4. Select either a region from the region menu or a telephony location from
the sub-menu.
■ When you click a region it becomes the modem's default selection
for any new dialling locations that are created within the Windows
Control Panel (Phone and Modem Options).
■ When you select a telephony location, the corresponding region is
automatically selected and becomes the modem's default setting.
Properties menu
Click the icon with the secondary (right) mouse button in order to display a
Properties menu on the screen.
Setting
Within the Properties menu you are able to either enable or disable the
following settings:
AutoRun Mode
Allows you to configure whether the Modem Region Select utility starts
automatically whenever you start up the operating system.
Open the Dialing Properties dialog box after selecting region.
Allows you to configure whether the dialing properties dialog box will be
displayed automatically after you have selected a region.
User’s Manual
4-44
Operating Basics
Location list for region selection.
Displays a sub-menu appears which details location information.
Open dialog box, if the modem and Telephony Current
Location region code do not match.
Displays a warning if the current settings for both region code and
telephony location are different.
Modem Selection
If the computer cannot recognize the internal modem, a dialog box is
displayed from which you should select the appropriate communications
port for your modem to use.
Dialing Properties
You should select this item in order to display the dialing properties.
If you are using the computer in Japan, the Telecommunications Business
Law requires that you select Japan region mode. It is illegal to use the
modem in Japan with any other selection.
Connecting the modular cable
To connect the modem's modular cable, follow the steps as detailed below:
■ Connection to any communication line other than an analog phone line
could cause a computer system failure.
■ Connect the built-in modem only to ordinary analog phone lines.
■ Never connect the built-in modem to a digital line (ISDN).
■ Never connect the built-in modem to the digital connector on a
public telephone or to a digital private branch exchange (PBX).
■ Never connect the built-in modem to a key telephone system for
residences or offices.
■ Never operate your computer on AC power during a thunderstorm. If
you see lightning or hear thunder, immediately turn off the computer.
An electric surge caused by the storm, may result in a system failure,
loss of data or hardware damage.
1. Plug the end of the modular cable into the computer's modem jack.
User’s Manual
4-45
Operating Basics
2. Plug the other end of the modular cable into a telephone jack.
Telephone jack
Modem jack
Figure 4-28 Connecting the internal modem
Do not pull on the cable or move the computer while the cable is
connected.
If you use a storage device such as an optical drive or hard disk drive
connected to a 16-bit PC Card, you might experience the following
problems with the operation of the modem:
■ The modem speed is slow or communication is periodically interrupted.
■ Skips or jumps may be noted in sound.
Disconnecting the modular cable
To disconnect the modular cable, follow the steps as detailed below:
1. Pinch the lever on the plug in the telephone jack and pull it out from
within the connector.
2. Pinch the lever on the plug in the computer's modem jack and pull it out
from within the computer.
User’s Manual
4-46
Operating Basics
Wireless communications
The computer’s wireless communication function supports both Wireless
LAN and Bluetooth devices.
Only some models are equipped with both Wireless LAN and Bluetooth
functions.
■ Do not use the Wireless LAN (Wi-Fi), Bluetooth or Wireless WAN
functionalities near a microwave oven or in areas subject to radio
interference or magnetic fields. Interference from a microwave oven or
other source can disrupt Wi-Fi, Bluetooth or Wireless WAN operation.
■ Turn Wi-Fi, Bluetooth and Wireless WAN functionalities off when near
a person who may have a cardiac pacemaker implant or other medical
electric device. Radio waves may affect pacemaker or medical device
operation, possibly resulting in serious injury. Follow the instruction of
your medical device when using any Wi-Fi or Bluetooth or Wireless
WAN functionality.
■ Always turn off Wi-Fi or Bluetooth or Wireless WAN functionality if the
computer is near automatic control equipment or appliances such as
automatic doors or fire detectors. Radio waves can cause malfunction
of such equipment, possibly resulting in serious injury.
■ It may not be possible to make a network connection to a specified
network name using the ad hoc network function.
If this occurs, the new network(*) will have to be configured for all
computers connected to the same network in order to re-enable
network connections.
* Please be sure to use new network name.
Wireless LAN
The Wireless LAN is compatible with other LAN systems based on Direct
Sequence Spread Spectrum / Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplexing
radio technology that complies with the IEEE802.11 Wireless LAN standard
(Revision A, B, G or n Draft 2.0).
Do not install or remove a memory module while Wake-up on Wireless
LAN is enabled.
■ The Wake-up on Wireless LAN function consumes power even when
the system is off. Leave the AC adaptor connected while using this
feature.
■ The Wake-up on Wireless LAN function is effective only when it is
connected with an Access Point. This function becomes invalid when
the connection is broken.
■ Frequency Channel Selection of 5GHz for IEEE 802.11a or 2.4GHz for
802.11b/g
■ Roaming over multiple channels
■ Card power management
User’s Manual
4-47
Operating Basics
■ Wired Equivalent Privacy (WEP) data encryption based on an 128-bit
encryption algorithm
■ Wi-Fi Protected Access (WPA)
The transmission speed over the wireless LAN, and the distance over
which the wireless LAN can reach, may vary depending on surrounding
electromagnetic environment, obstacles, access point design and
configuration, client design and software/hardware configurations. The
transmission rate described is the theoretical maximum speed as specified
under the appropriate standard - the actual transmission speed will be
lower than the theoretical maximum speed.
Setting
1. Please make sure that the Wireless Communication Switch is turned
on.
2. Click Start and then click Connect To to display Connect to a network
window.
3. Click Set up a connection or network.
4. Follow the wizard. You will need the name of the wireless network
together with security settings. Consult the documentation
accompanied with your router or ask your wireless network
administrator for the settings.
Security
■ TOSHIBA strongly recommend that you enable encryption functionality,
otherwise your computer will be open to illegal access by an outsider
using a wireless connection. If this occurs, the outsider may illegally
access your system, eavesdrop, or cause the loss or destruction of
stored data.
■ TOSHIBA is not liable for the loss of data due to eavesdropping or
illegal access through the wireless LAN and the damage thereof.
Bluetooth wireless technology
Bluetooth™ wireless technology eliminates the need for cables between
electronic devices such as desktop computers, printers and mobile phones.
You cannot use the computer's built-in Bluetooth functions and an optional
Bluetooth devices simultaneously. For reference, Bluetooth wireless
technology has the following features:
Worldwide operation
The Bluetooth radio transmitter and receiver operate in the 2.4GHz band,
which is license-free and compatible with radio systems in most countries
in the world.
User’s Manual
4-48
Operating Basics
Radio links
You can easily establish links between two or more devices, with these
links being maintained even if the devices are not within a line-of-sight of
each other.
Security
Two advanced security mechanisms ensure a high level of security:
■ Authentication prevents access to critical data and makes it impossible
to falsify the origin of a message.
■ Encryption prevents eavesdropping and maintains link privacy.
Bluetooth™ Stack for Windows® by TOSHIBA
Please note that this software is specifically designed for the following
operating systems:
■ Microsoft® Windows Vista®
Information regarding the use of this software with these operating systems
is listed below, with further details being contained with the electronic help
files supplied with the software.
This Bluetooth™ Stack is based on the Bluetooth™ Version
1.1/1.2/2.0+EDR specification. However, TOSHIBA cannot confirm the
compatibility between any computing products and/or other electronic
devices that use Bluetooth™, other than TOSHIBA notebook computers.
Release Notes related to the Bluetooth™ Stack for
Windows® by TOSHIBA
1. Fax application software:
Please be aware that there is some fax application software that you
cannot use on this Bluetooth™ Stack.
2. Multi-user considerations:
On Windows Vista®, the use of Bluetooth is not supported in a multiuser environment. This means that, when you use Bluetooth, other
users that are logged into the same computer will not be able to use this
type of functionality.
Product Support:
The latest information regarding operating system support, language
support or available upgrades can be found on our web site
http://www.toshiba-europe.com/computers/tnt/bluetooth.htm in Europe or
www.pcsupport.toshiba.com in the United States.
Wireless communication switch
You can enable or disable Wireless communication (Wireless LAN,
Bluetooth and Wireless WAN) functions, with the on/off switch. No
transmissions are sent or received when the switch is off. Slide the switch
to the right to turn it on and to the left to turn it off.
User’s Manual
4-49
Operating Basics
Wireless communication Indicator
The wireless communication indicator shows the status of the computer's
wireless communication functions.
Indicator status
Indication
Indicator off
The wireless communication switch is off - no
wireless functionality is available.
Indicator glows
Wireless communication switch is on. Wireless
LAN or Bluetooth is turned on by an application.
If you used the Taskbar to disable the wireless LAN, restart the computer or
perform the following procedure to re-enable it: Start -> Control Panel
-> System and Maintenance -> System -> Device Manager -> Network
adapters and right click the wireless device then choose enable.
LAN
The computer has built-in support for Ethernet LAN (10 megabits per
second, 10BASE-T), Fast Ethernet LAN (100 megabits per second,
100BASE-TX) and Gigabit Ethernet LAN (1000 megabits per second,
1000BASE-T).
This section describes how to connect/disconnect to a LAN.
Do not install or remove a memory module while Wake-up on LAN is
enabled.
■ The Wake-up on LAN function consumes power even when the system
is off. Leave the AC adaptor connected while using this feature.
■ The Link speed (10/100/1000 megabits per second) changes
automatically depending on the network conditions (connected device,
cable or noise and so on).
LAN cable types
The computer must be configured properly before connecting to a LAN.
Logging onto a LAN using the computer’s default settings could cause a
malfunction in LAN operation. Check with your LAN administrator
regarding set-up procedures.
If you are using Gigabit Ethernet LAN (1000 megabits per second,
1000BASE-T), be sure to connect with a CAT5E cable or higher. You
cannot use a CAT3 or CAT5 cable.
If you are using Fast Ethernet LAN (100 megabits per second, 100BASETX), be sure to connect with a CAT5 cable or higher. You cannot use a
CAT3 cable.
If you are using Ethernet LAN (10 megabits per second, 10BASE-T), you
can connect with a CAT3 or higher cable.
User’s Manual
4-50
Operating Basics
Connecting the LAN cable
To connect the LAN cable, follow the steps as detailed below:
■ Connect the AC adaptor before connecting the LAN cable. The AC
adaptor must remain connected during LAN use. If you disconnect the
AC Adaptor while the computer is accessing a LAN, the system may
hang up.
■ Do not connect any other cable to the LAN jack except the LAN cable.
Otherwise, malfunctions or damage may occur.
■ Do not connect any power supplying device to the LAN cable that is
connected to the LAN jack. Otherwise, malfunctions or damage may
occur.
1. Turn off the power to the computer and to all external devices
connected to the computer.
2. Plug one end of the cable into the LAN jack. Press gently until you hear
the latch click into place.
Link indicator
LAN jack
LAN cable
LAN Active indicator
Figure 4-29 Connecting the LAN cable
3. Plug the other end of the cable into a LAN hub connector or router.
Check with your LAN administrator and hardware or software vendor
before using or configuring a network connection.
When the computer is exchanging data with the LAN, the LAN Active
indicator glows orange. When the computer is connected to a LAN hub but
is not exchanging data, the Link indicator glows green.
User’s Manual
4-51
Operating Basics
Disconnecting the LAN cable
To disconnect the LAN cable, follow the steps as detailed below:
Make sure the LAN Active indicator (orange LED) is out before you
disconnect the computer from the LAN.
1. Pinch the lever on the connector in the computer’s LAN jack and pull
out the connector.
2. Disconnect the cable from the LAN hub or router in the same manner.
Check with your LAN administrator and hardware or software vendor
before disconnecting from the hub.
Computer Handling
This section explains computer handling and maintenance.
Cleaning the computer
To help ensure long, trouble-free operation, keep the computer free of dust
and dirt, and use care with all liquids around it.
■ Be careful not to spill liquids into the computer. If the computer does get
wet, turn the power off immediately and let the computer dry completely
- in these circumstance you should get the computer inspected by an
authorized service provider in order to assess the scope of any
damage.
■ Clean the plastics of the computer using a slightly water dampened
cloth.
■ You can clean the display screen by spraying a small amount of glass
cleaner onto a soft, clean cloth and then wiping the screen gently with
the cloth.
Never spray cleaner directly onto the computer or let liquid run into any
part of it. Never use harsh or caustic chemical products to clean the
computer.
Moving the computer
While the computer is designed for rugged durability you should exercise a
few simple precautions when moving it in order to help ensure trouble-free
operation.
■ Before moving the computer, it is recommended that you change the
setting associated with the Hard Disk Drive Protection feature. Please
refer to the section, Using the Hard Disk Drive (HDD) Protection, in this
chapter for further information.
■ Make sure all disk/disc activity has ended before moving the computer check that the HDD and other indicators on the front of the computer
are off.
■ Turn off (shut down) the computer.
User’s Manual
4-52
Operating Basics
■ Disconnect the AC adaptor and all peripherals before moving the
computer.
■ Close the display panel.
Always make sure the display panel is closed in Laptop mode before
turning the computer upside down.
■ Do not pick up the computer by its display panel.
■ Before carrying your computer, shut it down, disconnect the AC adaptor
and allow it to cool down - a failure to follow this instruction may result in
minor heat injury.
■ Be careful not to subject the computer to impact or shock - a failure to
follow this instruction could result in damage to computer, computer
failure or loss of data.
■ Never transport your computer with any cards installed - this may cause
damage to either the computer and/or the card resulting in product
failure.
■ Always use a suitable carry case when transporting the computer.
■ When carrying your computer, be sure to hold it securely so that it does
not fall or hit anything.
■ Do not carry your computer by holding any of its protruding elements.
Using the Hard Disk Drive (HDD) Protection
This computer has a function for reducing the risk of damage on the hard
disk drive.
Using an acceleration sensor built into the computer, TOSHIBA HDD
Protection detects vibration shocks and similar signs of movement of the
computer, and automatically moves the Hard Disk Drive head to a safe
position to reduce the risk of damage that could be caused by head-to-disk
contact.
■ This function does not guarantee that the hard disk drive will not be
damaged.
■ The secondary hard disk drive is not supported by the TOSHIBA HDD
protection function.
When vibration is detected, a message will be displayed on the screen, and
the icon in the Taskbar notification area will change to the protection state.
This message is displayed until the OK button is pressed or 30 seconds
pass. When vibration subsides, the icon returns to the normal state.
User’s Manual
4-53
Operating Basics
Taskbar icon
State
Icon
Description
Normal
TOSHIBA HDD Protection is enabled.
Protection
TOSHIBA HDD Protection is active. The
hard disk drive head is in a safe position.
OFF
TOSHIBA HDD Protection is disabled.
TOSHIBA HDD Protection Properties
You can change the TOSHIBA HDD Protection settings by using the
TOSHIBA HDD Protection Properties window. To open the window, click
Start -> All Programs -> TOSHIBA -> Utilities -> HDD Protection
Settings. The window can also be started from the icon on the Taskbar or
from the Control Panel.
HDD Protection
You can choose whether to enable or disable TOSHIBA HDD Protection.
Detection Level
This function can be set to four levels. The sensitivity levels in which
vibrations, impacts and their similar signs are detected can be set to OFF,
1, 2 and 3 in ascending order. Level 3 is recommended for better protection
of the computer. However, when the computer is used in a mobile
environment or in other unstable conditions, setting the detection level to 3
could result in frequent execution of TOSHIBA HDD Protection, which will
slow Hard Disk Drive reading and writing. Set a lower detection level when
the speed of Hard Disk Drive reading and writing is a priority.
Different detection levels can be set depending on whether the computer is
used as handheld or mobile usages, or whether it is used in a stable
environment such as on a table in the workplace or at home. By setting
different detection levels for the computer depending on whether it runs
with the AC power (desktop) or with batteries (handheld or mobile usage),
the detection level automatically switches according to the power
connection mode.
3D Viewer
This feature displays a 3D object on the screen which moves in according
to tilting or vibration of the computer.
When the TOSHIBA HDD Protection detects computer vibration the Hard
Disk Drive head is parked and the 3D object disk rotation will stop. When
the head is un-parked the disk will begin to rotate again.
The 3D Viewer can be started from the icon in the task tray.
User’s Manual
4-54
Operating Basics
■ This 3D object virtually represents the Computer's internal Hard Disk
Drive. This representation may vary from the actual number of disks,
disk rotation, head movement, part size, shape and direction.
■ This feature may use a large amount of CPU and memory on some
models. The computer may become slow or sluggish when attempting
to run other applications while the 3D Viewer is displayed.
■ Intensely shaking the computer or other subjecting it to strong impacts
may cause damage to the computer.
Details
To open the Details window, click the Setup Detail button in the TOSHIBA
HDD Protection Properties window.
Detection Level Amplification
When the AC adaptor is disconnected or the lid is closed, HDD Detection
assumes that the computer will be carried and sets the detection level to
the maximum for 10 seconds.
TOSHIBA HDD Protection Message
Specify whether to display a message when TOSHIBA HDD Protection is
active.
This function does not work when the computer is starting, in Sleep Mode,
in Hibernation Mode, in transition to Hibernation Mode, recovering from
Hibernation Mode, or powered off. Be sure to not subject the computer to
vibration or impact while the function is disabled.
Heat dispersal
To protect against overheating, the processor is equipped an internal
temperature sensor which activates a cooling fan or lowers the processing
speed if the computer's internal temperature rises to a certain level. You
are able to select whether to control this temperature by either turning on
the fan first, then if necessary lowering the processor speed, or by lowering
the processor speed first, then if necessary turning on the fan - these
functions are controlled within the Power Options.
When the processor's temperature falls to a normal range, the fan will be
turned off and the processor operation returned to its standard speed.
If the processor's temperature reaches an unacceptably high level with
either setting, the computer will automatically shuts down to prevent any
damage - in this instance all unsaved data in memory will be lost.
User’s Manual
4-55
Chapter 5
The Keyboard
The computer's keyboard layouts are compatible with a 104/105-key
enhanced keyboard - by pressing some keys in combination, all of the
104/105-key enhanced keyboard functions can be performed on the
computer.
The number of keys available on your keyboard will depend on which
country/region your computer is configured for, with keyboards being
available for numerous languages.
In use there are six different types of keys, specifically typewriter keys,
function keys, soft keys, Hot keys, Windows special keys and the keypad
overlay.
Typewriter keys
The typewriter keys produce the upper-case and lower-case letters,
numbers, punctuation marks, and special symbols that appear on the
screen. However, there are some differences between using a typewriter
and using a computer keyboard:
■ Letters and numbers produced in computer text vary in width. Spaces,
which are created by a 'space character' may also vary depending on
line justification and other factors.
■ The lowercase l (el) and the number 1 (one), together with the
uppercase O (oh) and the 0 (zero), are not interchangeable on
computers as they are on a typewriter.
■ The CAPS LOCK function key locks only the alphabetic characters into
upper-case while the Shift Lock function on a typewriter places all keys
in the shifted position.
■ The SHIFT keys, the Tab key, and the BACK SPACE key perform the
same function as their typewriter counterparts but also have special
computer functions.
Never remove the key caps on your keyboard. Doing so could cause
damage to the parts under the key caps.
User’s Manual
5-1
The Keyboard
Function keys: F1 … F12
The function keys (not to be confused with the special FN key) are the
twelve keys at the top of your keyboard - these keys function differently
from other keys.
F1 through F12 are called function keys because they execute
programmed functions when pressed and, when used in combination with
the FN key, those keys marked with icons also execute specific functions
on the computer. Please refer to the section, Soft keys: FN key
combinations, in this chapter for further information, taking care to note that
the function executed by individual keys will depend on the software you
are using.
Soft keys: FN key combinations
The FN (function) is unique to TOSHIBA computers and is used in
combination with other keys to form soft keys. Soft keys are key
combinations that enable, disable or configure specific features.
Please note that some software may disable or interfere with soft-key
operations, and that the soft-key settings are not restored when the
computer returns from Sleep Mode.
Emulating keys on an enhanced keyboard
Figure 5-1 A 104-key enhanced keyboard layout
This computer's keyboard is designed to provide all the features of the 104key enhanced keyboard.
Since the keyboard is smaller and has fewer keys, some of the enhanced
keyboard functions must be simulated using two keys instead of one on the
larger keyboard.
The FN key can be combined with the following keys to simulate functions
similar to those of keys on the 104/105 key enhanced keyboard which are
not on this computer's keyboard.
User’s Manual
5-2
The Keyboard
Press FN + F10 or FN + F11 to access the computer's integrated keypad.
When activated, the keys with grey markings on their bottom edge become
either numeric keypad keys (FN + F11) or cursor control keys (FN + F10).
Please refer to the Keypad overlay section in this chapter for more
information on how to operate these keys, taking care to note that the
power on default for both settings is off.
Press FN + F12 (ScrLock) to lock the cursor on a specific line. The power
on default is off.
Press FN + ENTER to simulate ENTER on the enhanced keyboard’s
numeric keypad.
Hot keys
Hot keys (pressing FN + a function or ESC key) let you enable or disable
certain features of the computer.
Mute: Pressing FN + ESC turns the volume on and off.
Lock: Pressing FN + F1 enters ''Lock computer mode''. To restore your
desktop, you need to log on again.
Power Plan: Pressing FN + F2 changes the power settings.
User’s Manual
5-3
The Keyboard
Sleep: Pressing FN + F3 switches the system to Sleep Mode.
Hibernate: Pressing FN + F4 switches the system to Hibernation Mode.
Output: Pressing FN + F5 changes the active display device.
Brightness Down: Pressing FN + F6 decreases the computer's display
panel brightness in individual steps.
Brightness Up: Pressing FN + F7 increases the computer's display panel
brightness in individual steps.
Wireless: Pressing FN + F8 switches the active wireless devices if the
wireless communication switch is switched on.
If no wireless communication device is installed, no dialog box will appear.
Touch Pad: Pressing FN + F9 enables or disables the Touch Pad function.
Zoom: Pressing FN + Space changes the display resolution.
User’s Manual
5-4
The Keyboard
ODD: Pressing FN + Tab turns the power of the optical disc drive on/off or
ejects the disc tray.
TOSHIBA Zooming Utility (reduce): Pressing FN + 1 reduces the icon
size on the desktop or the font sizes within one of the supported application
windows.
TOSHIBA Zooming Utility (enlarge): Pressing FN + 2 enlarges the icon
size on the desktop or the font sizes within one of the supported application
windows.
FN Sticky key
You can use the TOSHIBA Accessibility Utility to make the FN key sticky,
that is, you can press it once, release it, and then press an "F Number"
key. To start the TOSHIBA Accessibility utility, click Start -> All Programs
-> TOSHIBA -> Utilities -> Accessibility.
Windows special keys
The keyboard provides two keys that have special functions in Windows,
the Windows Start Button key activates the Start menu while the
application key has the same function as the secondary (right) mouse
button.
This key activates the Windows Start menu.
This key has the same function as the secondary (right) mouse button.
User’s Manual
5-5
The Keyboard
Keypad overlay
Your computer's keyboard does not have a separate numeric keypad but
includes a numeric keypad overlay which functions like one - this is located
in the center of the keyboard with the relevant keys having grey letters at
their front edge. The overlay provides the same functions as the numeric
keypad on a standard 104/105-key enhanced keyboard.
Turning on the overlays
The numeric keypad overlay can be used for numeric data input or cursor
and page control.
Arrow Mode
To turn on Arrow Mode, press FN + F10 - the Arrow Mode indicator lights
and you are able to access cursor and page control functions by using the
keys. You are able to press FN + F10 again to turn off this overlay function.
Numeric Mode
To turn on Numeric Mode, press FN + F11 - the Numeric Mode indicator
lights and you are able to access numeric characters by using the keys.
You are able to press FN + F11 again to turn off this overlay function.
Figure 5-2 The numeric keypad overlay
User’s Manual
5-6
The Keyboard
Temporarily using normal keyboard (overlay on)
While using the overlay, you can temporarily access the normal keyboard
functions without having to turn the overlay off:
1. Hold down FN key and press any other key - this key will operate as if
the overlay were off.
2. Type upper-case characters by holding down FN + SHIFT and pressing
a character key.
3. Release FN key to continue using the selected overlay function.
Temporarily using overlay (overlay off)
While using the normal keyboard function, you can temporarily use the
keypad overlay without having to turn it on:
1. Hold down FN key.
2. Check the keyboard indicators as pressing the FN key will turn on the
most recently used overlay function - if the Numeric Mode indicator
lights you can use the overlay for numeric entry, while if the Arrow Mode
indicator lights, you can use the overlay for cursor and page control
function.
3. Release FN key to return to normal keyboard operation.
Temporarily changing modes
If the computer is in Numeric Mode, you can switch temporarily to Arrow
Mode by pressing a SHIFT key, while if it is in Arrow Mode, you can switch
temporarily to Numeric Mode by also pressing a SHIFT key.
Generating ASCII characters
Not all ASCII characters can be generated using normal keyboard
operation, but you are able to generate these characters using their specific
ASCII codes.
With the overlay on:
1. Hold down ALT key.
2. Using the overlay keys, type the ASCII code of the character you
require.
3. Release ALT - the ASCII character will appear on the display screen.
With the overlay off:
1. Hold down ALT + FN.
2. Using the overlay keys, type the ASCII code of the character you
require.
3. Release ALT + FN - the ASCII character will appear on the display
screen.
User’s Manual
5-7
Chapter 6
Power and Power-Up Modes
The computer's power resources include the AC adaptor, battery pack and
any internal batteries. This chapter provides details on making the most
effective use of these resources, and includes information on charging and
changing batteries, tips for saving battery power, and information on the
different power-up modes.
Power conditions
The computer's operating capability and battery charge status are affected
by different power conditions, including whether an AC adaptor is
connected, whether a battery pack is installed and what the charge level is
for that battery.
Table 6-1 Power conditions
AC
adaptor
connected
User’s Manual
Power on
Power off
(no operation)
Main Battery
fully charged
• Operates
• No charge
• LED: Battery green
DC IN green
• No charge
• LED: Battery green
DC IN green
Main Battery
partially
charged or no
charge
• Operates
• Charge*1
• LED: Battery orange
DC IN green
• Quick charge*1
• LED: Battery orange
DC IN green
No Main battery
installed
• Operates
• No charge
• LED: Battery off
DC IN green
• No charge
• LED: Battery off
DC IN green
6-1
Power and Power-Up Modes
Table 6-1 Power conditions continued
AC
adaptor
connected
AC
adaptor
not
connected
User’s Manual
Power on
Power off
(no operation)
2nd battery fully
charged
• Operates
• No charge
• LED: 2nd battery green
DC IN green
• No charge
• LED: 2nd battery green
DC IN green
2nd battery
partially
charged or no
charge
• Operates
• Quick charge*2
• LED: 2nd battery orange
• Charge*
• LED: 2nd battery orange
DC IN green
DC IN green
No 2nd battery
installed
• Operates
• No charge
• LED: 2nd battery off
DC IN green
Main battery
charge is above
low battery
trigger point
• Operates
• LED: Battery off
DC IN off
Main battery
charge is below
low battery
trigger point
• Operates
• LED: Battery
flashes orange
DC IN off
Main battery
charge is
exhausted
Computer shuts down *3
No main battery
installed
• No operation *4
• No charge
• LED: 2nd battery off
DC IN green
• LED: Battery off
DC IN off
6-2
Power and Power-Up Modes
Table 6-1 Power conditions continued
Power on
AC
adaptor
not
connected
2nd battery
charge is above
low battery
trigger point
• Operates
• LED: 2nd battery off
DC IN off
2nd battery
charge is below
low battery
trigger point
• Operates
• LED: 2nd battery
flashes orange
DC IN off
2nd battery
charge is
exhausted
Computer shuts down *3
No 2nd battery
is installed
• No operation *5
• LED: 2nd battery off
DC IN off
Power off
(no operation)
1 When the Slice Expansion Battery is not charging.
*2 When the main battery is not charging.
*3 For the computer to shut down in Hibernation Mode, the Hibernation
feature must be enabled in Power Options. If a main battery and a Slice
Expansion Battery are installed, the computer does not shut down until
the charge in both batteries is exhausted.
*4 When no Slice Expansion Battery is installed.
*5 When no main battery is installed.
When batteries are charged, the main battery is charged first. When it is
fully charged, the Slice Expansion Battery is charged.
User’s Manual
6-3
Power and Power-Up Modes
Monitoring of power condition
As shown in the below table, the Battery, 2nd battery, DC IN and Power
indicators on the system indicator alert you to the computer’s operating
capability and battery charge status.
Battery indicator
Check the Battery indicator to determine the status of the main battery and
the 2nd battery indicator to determine the status of the Slice Expansion
Battery. The following indicator lights indicate the battery status:
Flashing orange
The battery charge is low, the AC adaptor must be
connected in order to recharge the battery.
Orange
Indicates the AC adaptor is connected and the
battery is charging.
Green
Indicates the AC adaptor is connected and the
battery is fully charged.
No light
Under any other conditions, the indicator does not
light.
If the battery pack becomes too hot while it is being charged, the charge
will stop and the Battery indicator will go out. When the battery pack's
temperature falls to a normal range, charging will resume - this process will
occur regardless of whether the computer's power is on or off.
DC IN indicator
Check the DC IN indicator to determine the power status with the AC
adaptor connected - the following indicator conditions should be noted:
User’s Manual
Green
Indicates the AC adaptor is connected and is
correctly supplying power to the computer.
Flashing orange
Indicates a problem with the power supply. You
should initially try plugging the AC adaptor into
another power outlet - if it still does not operate
properly, you should contact your reseller or dealer.
No light
Under any other conditions, the indicator does not
light.
6-4
Power and Power-Up Modes
Power indicator
Check the Power indicator to determine the power status of the computer the following indicator conditions should be noted:
Green
Indicates power is being supplied to the computer
and the computer is turned on.
Blinking orange
Indicates that the computer is in Sleep Mode and
that there is sufficient power available (AC adaptor
or battery) to maintain this condition. In Sleep
Mode, this indicator will turn on for one second and
off for two seconds.
No light
Under any other conditions, the indicator does not
light.
Battery
This section explains battery types, use, recharging methods and handling.
Battery types
The computer has three different types of batteries.
Battery pack
When the AC adaptor is not connected, the computer's main power source
is a removable lithium ion battery pack, also referred to in this manual as
the main battery. You can purchase additional battery packs for extended
use of the computer away from an AC power source although you should
not change the battery pack while the AC adaptor is connected.
Before you remove the battery pack, save your data and shut down the
computer, or place the computer into Hibernation Mode. Please be aware
that, when placing the computer into Hibernation Mode, the contents of
memory will be saved to the hard disk drive, although for safety sake, it is
best to also save your data manually.
Slice Expansion Battery (Is included some models)
The Slice Expansion Battery is included with some models, or can be
purchased separately as an optional accessory.
For detailed information on this battery, refer to Connecting and
disconnecting the Slice Expansion Battery.
User’s Manual
6-5
Power and Power-Up Modes
Real Time Clock (RTC) battery
The Real Time Clock (RTC) battery provides power for the internal real time
clock and calendar function and also maintains the system configuration
while the computer is turned off. If the RTC battery becomes completely
discharged, the system will lose this information and the real time clock and
calendar will stop working - in this instance the following message will be
displayed when you turn on the power:
**** RTC battery is low or CMOS checksum is
inconsistent ****
Press [F1] key to set Date/Time.
You can change the Real Time Clock settings by turning the computer on
while pressing the ESC key and then the F1 key when prompted. Please
refer to Chapter 8 Troubleshooting for further information.
The RTC battery does not charge while the computer is turned off even if
the AC adaptor is attached.
Care and use of the battery pack
This section provides the important safety precautions in order to handle
your battery pack properly.
Refer to the enclosed Instruction Manual for Safety and Comfort for
detailed precautions and handling instructions.
■ Make sure the battery is securely installed in the computer before
attempting to charge the battery pack. Improper installation could
generate smoke or fire, or cause the battery pack to rupture.
■ Keep the battery pack out of reach of infants and children. It can cause
injury.
■ The battery pack and Slice Expansion Battery are lithium ion battery,
which can explode if not replaced, used, handled or disposed of
properly. Dispose of the battery as required by local ordinances or
regulations. Use only batteries recommended by TOSHIBA as
replacements.
■ The computer's RTC battery is a Ni-MH battery and should be replaced
only by your dealer or by a TOSHIBA service representative. The
battery can explode if not properly replaced, used, handled or
disposed. Dispose of the battery as required by local ordinances or
regulations.
■ Charge the battery pack only in an ambient temperature between 5 and
35 degrees Celsius. Otherwise, the electrolyte solution might leak,
battery pack performance might deteriorate and the battery life might
be shortened.
■ Never install or remove the battery pack without first turning off the
power and disconnecting the AC adaptor. Never remove the battery
pack while the computer is in Sleep Mode. Data could be lost.
User’s Manual
6-6
Power and Power-Up Modes
■ Never remove the battery pack while the Wake-up on LAN function is
enabled. Data will be lost. Before you remove a battery pack, disable
the Wake-up on LAN function.
■ Never remove the battery pack while the Wake-up on Wireless LAN
function is enabled. Data will be lost. Before you remove a battery
pack, disable the Wake-up on Wireless LAN function.
Charging the batteries
When the power in the battery pack becomes low, the Battery indicator will
flash orange to indicate that only a few minutes of battery power remain. If
you continue to use the computer while the Battery indicator flashes, the
computer will enable Hibernation Mode so that you do not lose any data,
and automatically turn itself off.
You must recharge a battery pack when it becomes discharged.
Procedures
To recharge a battery pack while it is installed in the computer, connect the
AC adaptor to the DC IN 15V jack and plug the other end into a working
outlet - the Battery indicator will glow orange while the battery is being
charged.
Use only the computer connected to an AC power source or optional
TOSHIBA Battery charger to charge the battery pack. Never attempt to
charge the battery pack with any other charger.
Time
The following table shows the approximate time required to fully charge a
discharged battery.
Charging time (hours)
Battery type
Power on
Power off
Battery pack (4700mAh)
about 3.0 to 13.0
about 3.0
Slice Expansion Battery
(4000mAh)
about 3.0 to 9.5
about 2.5
RTC battery
24
Doesn't charge
Please be aware that the charging time when the computer is on is
affected by ambient temperature, the temperature of the computer and
how you are using the computer - if you make heavy use of external
devices for example, the battery might scarcely charge at all during
operation. Please refer to the section Maximizing battery operating time,
for further information.
User’s Manual
6-7
Power and Power-Up Modes
Battery charging notice
The battery may not begin charging immediately under the following
conditions:
■ The battery is extremely hot or cold (if the battery is extremely hot, it
might not charge at all). To ensure the battery charges to its full
capacity, you should charge it at room temperature of between 5° to
35°C (41° to 95°F).
■ The battery is nearly completely discharged. In this instance you should
leave the AC adaptor connected for a few minutes and the battery
should begin charging.
The Battery indicator may show a rapid decrease in battery operating time
when you try to charge a battery under the following conditions:
■ The battery has not been used for a long time.
■ The battery has completely discharged and been left in the computer
for a long time.
■ A cool battery is installed in a warm computer.
In such cases you should follow the steps as detailed below:
1. Fully discharge the battery by leaving it in the computer with the power
on until the system automatically turns itself off.
2. Connect the AC adaptor to the DC IN 15V jack of the computer, and to
a wall outlet that is supplying power.
3. Charge the battery until the Battery indicator glows green.
Repeat these steps two or three times until the battery recovers normal
capacity.
Monitoring battery capacity
Remaining battery power can be monitored using the following methods.
■ Clicking the battery icon on the Taskbar
■ Via the Battery Status in the Windows Mobility Center window
■ You should wait at least 16 seconds after turning on the computer
before trying to monitor the remaining operating time. This is because
the computer needs this time to check the battery's remaining capacity
and then calculate the remaining operating time, based on this together
with the current power consumption.
■ Please be aware that the actual remaining operating time may differ
slightly from the calculated time.
■ With repeated discharges and recharges, the battery's capacity will
gradually decrease. In view of this it will be noted that an often used,
older battery will not operate for as long as a new battery even when
both are fully charged.
User’s Manual
6-8
Power and Power-Up Modes
Maximizing battery operating time
A battery's usefulness depends on how long it can supply power on a
single charge, while how long the charge lasts in a battery depends on:
■ Processor speed
■ Screen brightness
■ System Sleep Mode
■ System Hibernation Mode
■ Display power off period
■ Hard disk drive power off period
■ How often and for how long you use the hard disk drive and external
disk(c) drives, for example, optical disc and floppy diskette drive.
■ How much charge the battery contained to begin with.
■ How you use optional devices, such as a PC Cards, to which the
battery supplies power.
■ Whether you enable Sleep Mode, which can conserve battery power if
you are frequently turning the computer off and on.
■ Where you store your programs and data.
■ Whether you close the display panel when you are not using the
keyboard - closing the display saves power.
■ The environmental temperature - operating time decreases at low
temperatures.
■ The condition of the battery terminals - you should always ensure the
terminals stay clean by wiping them with a clean dry cloth before
installing the battery pack.
Retaining data with power off
When you turn off your computer with fully charged batteries, the batteries
retain data for the following approximate time periods:
Retention time
User’s Manual
Battery type
State and Retention Time
Battery pack (4700mAh)
about 2 days (Sleep Mode)
about 75 days (Boot Mode)
Slice Expansion Battery (4000mAh)
about 2 days (Sleep Mode)
about 65 days (Boot Mode)
RTC battery
30 days
6-9
Power and Power-Up Modes
Extending battery life
To maximize the life of your battery packs:
■ At least once a month, disconnect the computer from a power source
and operate it on battery power until the battery pack fully discharges.
Before doing so, follow the steps as detailed below.
1. Turn off the computer's power.
2. Disconnect the AC adaptor and turn on the computer's power - if it
does not turn on then go to Step 4.
3. Operate the computer on battery power for five minutes. If you find
that the battery pack has at least five minutes of operating time,
continue operating until the battery pack is fully discharged,
however, if the Battery indicator flashes or there is some other
warning to indicate a low battery condition, go to Step 4.
4. Connect the AC adaptor to the DC IN 15V jack of the computer, and
to a wall outlet that is supplying power. The DC IN indicator should
glow green, and the Battery indicator should glow orange to
indicate that the battery pack is being charged, however, in the
event that DC IN indicator does not glow this indicates that power is
not being supplied - check the connections for the AC adaptor and
the power cord.
5. Charge the battery pack until the Battery indicator glows green.
■ If you have extra battery packs, rotate their use.
■ If you will not be using the system for an extended period, for example
for more than one month, remove the battery pack from the computer.
■ Store spare battery packs in a cool dry place out of direct sunlight.
Replacing the battery pack
Please be aware that the battery pack is classified as a consumable item.
The operating life of the battery pack will gradually reduce through
repeated charging and discharging, and will need to be replaced when it
reaches the end of its operating life. In addition to this, you might also
replace a discharged battery pack with a charged spare when you are
operating your computer away from an AC power source for an extended
period of time.
This section explains how to remove and install the battery pack, and
begins with the removal process which is detailed through the following
steps.
■ Do not remove the battery pack while the computer is in Sleep Mode.
Data is stored in RAM, so if the computer loses power it could be lost.
■ In Hibernation Mode, data will be lost if you remove the battery pack or
disconnect the AC adaptor before the save is completed. Wait for the
Hard Disk Drive indicator to go out.
■ Do not touch the battery release latch while holding the computer or the
battery pack might fall out due to the unintentional release of the
battery release latch and cause injuries.
User’s Manual
6-10
Power and Power-Up Modes
Removing the battery pack
To remove a discharged battery, follow the steps as detailed below:
1. Save your work.
2. Turn the computer's power off - ensure that the Power indicator is off.
3. Remove all cables and peripherals that are connected to the computer.
4. Close the display panel and turn the computer upside down.
Always make sure the display panel is closed in Laptop mode before
turning the computer upside down.
5. Slide the battery lock towards the release (
battery release latch movable.
) position to make the
Battery pack
Battery lock
Figure 6-1 Releasing the battery pack (1)
6. Slide and hold the battery release latch (1) to disengage the battery
pack and then remove it from the computer (2).
Battery release
latch
Battery pack
Figure 6-2 Releasing the battery pack (2)
User’s Manual
6-11
Power and Power-Up Modes
Installing the battery pack
To install a battery pack, follow the steps as detailed below:
Do not touch the battery release latch while holding the computer or the
battery pack might fall out due to the unintentional release of the battery
release latch and cause injuries.
1. Insert the battery pack as far as it will go into the computer (1).
2. Ensure that the battery pack is securely in place and the battery lock (2)
is in its (
) position.
Battery pack
Battery lock
Figure 6-3 Securing the battery pack
3. Turn your computer over.
Connecting and disconnecting the Slice Expansion Battery
This battery pack increases your computer's operating time when a main
battery pack is also installed.
This section explains how to connect and disconnect the Slice Expansion
Battery, and begins with the removal process which is detailed through the
following steps.
Connecting the Slice Expansion Battery
To connect the Slice Expansion Battery to the computer, follow the steps
as detailed below:
When handling Slice Expansion Battery, be careful not to short circuit the
terminals. Also do not drop, hit or otherwise apply impact; do not scratch or
break the casing and do not twist or bend the latches of it.
1. Be sure the computer’s power is off and all cables are disconnected.
2. Close the display panel and turn the computer upside down.
Always make sure the display panel is closed in Laptop mode before
turning the computer upside down.
User’s Manual
6-12
Power and Power-Up Modes
3. Remove the protective cap from the Slice Expansion Battery.
4. Open latches on the Slice Expansion Battery and fit a tab on the battery
into the docking port on the underside of the computer.
Latches
Tab
Tab
Tab
Docking port
Figure 6-4 Seating the Slice Expansion Battery
5. Close the latches to secure the Slice Expansion Battery to the
computer.
Latches
Figure 6-5 Securing the latches
Disconnecting the Slice Expansion Battery
To disconnect the Slice Expansion Battery from the computer, follow the
steps as detailed below:
1. Save your work.
2. Turn the computer’s power off. Make sure the Power indicator is off.
3. Remove all cables connected to the computer.
4. Close the display panel and turn the computer upside down.
Always make sure the display panel is closed in Laptop mode before
turning the computer upside down.
User’s Manual
6-13
Power and Power-Up Modes
5. Open the release latches in the direction of the arrows.
Latches
Figure 6-6 Releasing the latches
6. Lift off the Slice Expansion Battery.
Figure 6-7 Removing the Slice Expansion Battery
7. Be sure to replace the protective cap before storing the Slice Expansion
Battery.
TOSHIBA Password Utility
The TOSHIBA Password Utility provides two levels of password security:
User and Supervisor.
Passwords set by the TOSHIBA Password Utility function are different
from the Windows password.
User’s Manual
6-14
Power and Power-Up Modes
User Password
To start the utility, point to or click the following items:
Start -> All Programs -> TOSHIBA -> Utilities ->Password Utility
The User Password dialog box contains two main fields: User Password
and User Token.
User authentication may be required to validate user rights when using
"TOSHIBA Password Utility" to delete or change passwords, or create
tokens, etc.
User Password field
■ Set (button)
Click this button to register a password of up to 50 characters. After a
password is set, you will be prompted to enter it when you start the
computer. Check "Set the same string simultaneously as the HDD User
Password" when setting the HDD User Password.
■ After you set the password, a dialog box will be displayed asking
whether you want to save it to a floppy diskette or other media. If you
forget the password, you can open the password file on another
computer. Be sure to keep the media in a safe place.
■ When entering the character string to register the password, enter from
the keyboard character by character and do not enter as ASCII code or
copy-and-paste the character string. In addition, ensure that the
registered password is correct by outputting the character string to the
password file.
■ When entering a password, do not enter any characters (for example
"!" or "#") produced by pressing the SHIFT or ALT keys and so on.
■ Delete (button)
Click this button to delete a registered password. Before you can delete
a password, you must first enter the current password correctly or insert
a proper token. Please use BIOS Setup to change or delete the HDD
Passwords or to set the HDD Master Password.
■ Change (button)
Click this button to change a registered password. Before you can
change a password, you must first enter the current password correctly
or insert a proper token. Please use BIOS Setup to change or delete
the HDD Passwords or to set the HDD Master Password.
■ Owner String (text box)
You can use this box to associate text with the password. After you
enter text, click Apply or OK. When the computer is started, this text
will be displayed together with the prompt asking you to enter a
password.
User’s Manual
6-15
Power and Power-Up Modes
■ If you forget your HDD User Password, TOSHIBA will NOT be able to
assist you, and your HDD will be rendered COMPLETELY and
PERMANENTLY INOPERABLE. TOSHIBA will NOT be held
responsible for any loss of any data, any loss of use or access to your
HDD, or for any other losses to you or any other person or organization
that result from the loss of access to your HDD. If you can’t accept this
risk, don’t register the HDD User Password.
■ If you want to register the HDD master Password or the password for
the Ultra Slim Bay HDD, you can set them by the BIOS SETUP
Program.
■ When saving the HDD User Password shut down or restart the
computer. If the computer is not shut down or restarted, the saved data
may not be correctly reflected. For more information on shutting down
or restarting the computer, refer to Turning on the power in Chapter 1.
Refer to Starting and Ending the BIOS Setup Program section in Chapter 7
for more information.
User Token field
■ Create (button)
You can use an SD Card token, instead of entering the password. After
you have registered a password, insert an SD Card in SD Card slot and
click Create. You can use an SD Card of any capacity, but it must be
formatted correctly.
If an unformatted card or one with an incompatible format is inserted,
you will be prompted to format it with a tool named TOSHIBA SD
Memory Card Format. To start the format tool, point to or click the
following items:
Start -> All Programs -> TOSHIBA -> Utilities -> SD Memory
Card Format
When you format an SD memory card, all data will be deleted. Be sure to
save data on the card to other media before you format the card.
■ Disable (button)
Click this button to invalidate the token. You cannot re-validate old
tokens, but you can use the same SD Cards to create new tokens.
After using the token created for authentication, do not leave it inserted in
the SD Card slot, ensure that the token is removed from the slot and stored
in a safe location. If the token is left in the slot, there is a danger of theft or
a third party using it for authentication and operating the user's computer
(resulting in extraction, modification or deletion of data) when the user is
not at their desk.
User’s Manual
6-16
Power and Power-Up Modes
Supervisor Password
If you set a Supervisor Password, some functions might be restricted when
a user logs on with the User Password. To set a Supervisor Password,
execute the file TOSPU.EXE. The file is located at:
C:\Program Files\Toshiba\PasswordUtility\TOSPU.exe
This utility lets you do the following:
■ Register, delete or change the Supervisor Password.
■ Create or invalidate a Supervisor Password token.
This function in the TOSHIBA Password Utility lets you invalidate only
supervisor tokens or all tokens, including user and supervisor tokens.
■ Specify restrictions for general users.
Starting the computer by password
If you have already registered a password, there are four ways to start the
computer:
■ Insert an SD Card token before you turn on the computer. The
computer will start normally, without displaying a password prompt.
■ Swipe your fingerprint on the sensor if you have already registered the
fingerprint with the Fingerprint utility and enabled Fingerprint System
Boot Authentication. If you would not like to swipe your finger or cannot
authenticate the fingerprint for some reasons, push the BACK SPACE
key to skip the fingerprint authentication screen. You can try to swipe
the fingerprint up to five times. If you failed fingerprint authentication
five times, you must enter the password manually to start the computer.
■ Log on with the Tablet PC Pen when in Tablet mode. Refer to Tablet
mode section in this chapter.
■ Enter the password manually.
The password is necessary only if the computer was Shutdown and
Hibernation in Boot Mode.
It is not needed in Sleep Mode and Restart.
To enter a password manually, follow the steps as detailed below:
1. Turn on the power as described in Chapter 1, Getting Started. The
following message will appear in the screen:
Password=
2. Enter the Password.
3. Press ENTER.
If you enter the password incorrectly three times in a row, the computer
shuts off. In this case, you must turn the computer back on to retry
password entry.
User’s Manual
6-17
Power and Power-Up Modes
Tablet mode
Enter your password by tapping the on-screen keyboard using the Tablet
PC Pen or your finger.
On-screen keyboard can not be used in Display screen model.
Figure 6-8 On-screen keyboard
■ The beep sounds when tapping the on-screen keyboard with the Tablet
PC Pen or your finger. An * (asterisk) is displayed after "Password ="
and one character is input for every tapping.
Register your password to the computer in the Laptop mode using the
standard keyboard. Refer to TOSHIBA Password Utility, in this chapter for
the detail.
Power-up modes
The computer has three different power-up modes as follows:
■ Boot Mode : The computer will shut down without saving data - in view
of this you must always save your work before you turn the computer
off.
■ Hibernation Mode : Data in memory will be saved to the hard disk drive.
■ Sleep Mode : Data will be maintained in the computer's memory.
Please refer to the sections Turning on the power and Turning off the
power in Chapter 1, Getting Started for further information.
Windows utilities
You can configure various settings associated with both Sleep Mode and
Hibernation Mode within the Power Options (to access it, Start -> Control
Panel -> System and Maintenance -> Power Options).
User’s Manual
6-18
Power and Power-Up Modes
Hot keys
You can use the FN + F3 hot key to enter Sleep Mode or FN + F4 to enter
Hibernation Mode - please refer to Chapter 5, The Keyboard for further
details.
Panel power on/off
You can set up your computer so that power is turned off automatically
when you close the display panel, and turned on again when you open it.
Please note that this function is only available for Sleep Mode or
Hibernation Mode, not for Boot Mode.
If the panel power off function is enabled, and you manually shut down
Windows, do not close the display panel until the shut down process has
been completed.
System Auto Off
This feature turns the system off automatically if it is not used for a set
period of time, and can be configured for both Sleep Mode or Hibernation
Mode.
User’s Manual
6-19
Chapter 7
HW Setup & BIOS Setup
This chapter explains how to use the TOSHIBA HW Setup program to
configure your computer, and provides information on settings for various
functions.
Accessing HW Setup
To run the HW Setup program, click Start -> All Programs -> TOSHIBA ->
Utilities -> HWSetup.
HW Setup window
The HW Setup window contains a number of tabs (General, Display, Boot
Priority, Keyboard, CPU, LAN, Device Config and USB) to allow specific
functions of the computer to be configured.
In addition there are also three buttons : OK, Cancel and Apply.
User’s Manual
OK
Accepts your changes and closes the HW Setup
window.
Cancel
Closes the window without accepting your
changes.
Apply
Accepts all your changes without closing the HW
Setup window.
7-1
HW Setup & BIOS Setup
General
This window displays the BIOS version and contains two buttons : Default
and About.
Default
Return all HW Setup values to the factory
settings.
About
Display the HW Setup version.
Setup
This field displays the installed BIOS version and date.
Display
This tab lets you customize your computer’s display settings for either the
internal display or an external monitor.
Power On Display
This tab allows you to select the display to be used when the computer is
started. Please note that this setting is only available on standard VGA
mode and is not available as part of the Windows Desktop properties.
Auto-Selected
Selects an external monitor if one is connected,
otherwise, it selects the internal display (default).
LCD + Analog RGB
Selects both the internal display and an external
monitor for simultaneous display.
System LCD Only
Selects the internal display even if the external
monitor is connected.
If the connected external monitor does not support the computer's current
video mode, selecting the LCD + Analog RGB mode will not display any
image on the external monitor.
User’s Manual
7-2
HW Setup & BIOS Setup
Boot Priority
Boot Priority Options
This tab allows you to select the priority for booting the computer - the
following settings are available:
FDD !HDD !CDROM !LAN
The computer looks for bootable files on devices
in the following order: 1. floppy diskette drive*1, 2.
hard disk drive, 3. CD-ROM*2, 4. LAN.
HDD !FDD !CDROM !LAN
The computer looks for bootable files on devices
in the following order: 1. hard disk drive, 2. floppy
diskette drive*1, 3. CD-ROM*2, 4. LAN.
FDD !CD-ROM !
LAN !HDD
The computer looks for bootable files on devices
in the following order: 1. floppy diskette drive*1, 2.
CD-ROM*2, 3. LAN, 4. hard disk drive.
HDD !CD-ROM !
LAN !FDD
The computer looks for bootable files on devices
in the following order: 1. hard disk drive, 2. CDROM*2, 3. LAN, 4. floppy diskette drive*1.
CD-ROM !LAN !
FDD !HDD
The computer looks for bootable files on devices
in the following order: 1. CD-ROM*2, 2. LAN, 3.
floppy diskette drive*1, 4. hard disk drive.
CD-ROM !LAN !
HDD !FDD
The computer looks for bootable files on devices
in the following order: 1. CD-ROM*2, 2. LAN, 3.
hard disk drive, 4. floppy diskette drive*1.
You can override the settings and manually select a boot device by
pressing one of the following keys while the computer is booting:
Selects the USB floppy diskette drive.
Selects the network.
Selects the built-in hard disk drive.
Selects the secondary hard disk drive.
Selects the CD-ROM*2.
Selects the USB memory drive.
*1 The floppy diskette drive will be used to start the computer when there is
a bootable disk contained in the external drive. If SD memory card is
installed as well, the external floppy diskette drive will be checked first,
followed by the SD memory device itself.
*2 The optical disc drive will be used to start the computer when there is a
bootable disk contained in the drive.
User’s Manual
7-3
HW Setup & BIOS Setup
To change the boot drive, follow the steps below.
1. Hold down F12 and boot the computer.
2. The following menu will be displayed with the following icons: Built-in
hard disk drive, Ultra Slim Bay hard disk drive, CD-ROM, FDD (or SD
memory card), Network (LAN), USB Memory boot.
Please note that a highlighted bar will only appear under the selected
device.
3. Use the left/right cursor keys to highlight the boot device you want and
press ENTER.
If a Supervisor Password has been set, manual boot device selection
functions may be restricted.
The boot device selection methods described above will not change the
boot priority settings that have been configured in HW Setup. In addition, if
you press a key other than one of those listed, or if the selected device is
not installed, the system will continue to boot according to the current and
available settings in HW Setup.
HDD Priority Options
If more than one hard disk drive is installed in the computer, this option
allows you to set the priority associated with hard disk drive detection - the
first hard disk drive detected that has a valid boot command on it will be the
device from which the computer will start.
Built-in HDD ->
2nd HDD -> USB
(Default)
The priority is set as built-in HDD -> 2nd HDD ->
USB.
2nd HDD -> Built- The priority is set as 2nd HDD -> built-in HDD ->
in HDD -> USB
USB.
User’s Manual
Built-in HDD ->
USB -> 2nd HDD
The priority is set as built-in HDD -> USB -> 2nd
HDD.
2nd HDD -> USB ->
Built-in HDD
The priority is set as 2nd HDD -> USB -> built-in
HDD.
USB -> Built-in
HDD -> 2nd HDD
The priority is set as USB -> built-in HDD -> 2nd
HDD.
USB -> 2nd HDD ->
Built-in HDD
The priority is set as USB -> 2nd HDD -> built-in
HDD.
7-4
HW Setup & BIOS Setup
■ If a boot command is not found on the first detected hard disk drive, the
system will not boot from next hard disk drive in the list, instead it will
search for the next device in the Boot Priority list and startup from this
as appropriate.
■ Please be aware that some modules may not be displayed.
USB Memory BIOS Support Type
This option allows you to set the type of the USB memory to be used as a
startup device.
HDD
Sets the USB memory to be the equivalent of a
hard disk drive (default). With this setting, the
USB memory device can be used to start the
computer as though it were a hard disk drive
based on the hard disk drive settings within both
the Boot Priority and HDD Priority options
detailed previously.
FDD
Sets the USB memory to be the equivalent of a
floppy diskette drive. With this setting, the USB
memory device can be used to start the
computer as though it were a floppy diskette
based on the floppy diskette drive settings within
the Boot Priority option detailed previously.
Keyboard
Wake-up on Keyboard
When this feature is enabled, and the computer is in Sleep Mode, you can
turn on the system by pressing any key. However, please be aware that
this option will only work with the internal keyboard and only when the
computer is in Sleep Mode.
User’s Manual
Enabled
Enables the Wake-up on Keyboard function.
Disabled
Disables the Wake-up on Keyboard function (Default).
7-5
HW Setup & BIOS Setup
CPU
This function allows you to set the processor's operating mode.
Dynamic CPU Frequency Mode
This option allows you to configure the power saving modes associated
with the processor - the following settings are available:
Dynamically
Switchable
The processor's power consumption and
automatic clock speed switching functions are
enabled - in use the processor's operation is
automatically switched when necessary (default).
Always High
The processor's power consumption and
automatic clock speed switching functions are
disabled - in use the processor will always run at
its highest level of power consumption and its
highest speed.
Always Low
The processor's power consumption and
automatic clock speed switching functions are
disabled - in use the processor will always run at
a lower level of power consumption and a low
speed.
LAN
Wake-up on LAN
This feature lets the computer’s power be turned on when it receives a
wake-up signal from the LAN.
Do not install or remove a memory module while Wake-up on LAN is
enabled.
■ The Wake-up on LAN function consumes power even when the system
is off. Leave the AC adaptor connected while using this feature.
■ To enable it, you must check both the "Allow the device to wake the
computer" and "Only allow management stations to wake the
computer" check box within the "Intel Network Connection".
Power will be automatically turned on when a signal is received from an
administrator's computer which is connected via a network.
The following settings can be changed when the Built-in LAN is Enabled.
Connect the AC adaptor when using the Wake-up on LAN function. The
battery retention time will be shorter than the times listed in this manual
when this function is enabled. Refer to the section in chapter 6, Retaining
data with power off.
User’s Manual
Enabled
Enables Wake-up on LAN (Default).
Disabled
Disables Wake-up on LAN.
7-6
HW Setup & BIOS Setup
Built-in LAN
This feature enables or disables the Built-in LAN.
Enabled
Enables Built-in LAN functions (Default).
Disabled
Disables Built-in LAN functions.
Device Config
Device Configuration
This option allows you to set how the computer's hardware devices will be
configured.
All Devices
The computer's BIOS will setup and configure all
devices.
Setup by OS
The operating system will setup and configure all
of the devices that it can control (default).
USB
USB KB/Mouse Legacy Emulation
You can use this option to enable or disable USB keyboard/mouse legacy
emulation so that, even if your operating system does not support USB
devices, you can still use a standard USB mouse and keyboard - to achieve
this you should set the appropriate option(s) to Enabled.
Enabled
Enables the USB KB/Mouse Legacy Emulation
function (Default).
Disabled
Disables the USB KB/Mouse Legacy Emulation
function.
USB-FDD Legacy Emulation
Use this option to enable or disable USB floppy diskette drive legacy
emulation. If your operating system does not support USB, you can still use
a USB floppy diskette drive by setting the USB-FDD Legacy Emulation
item to Enabled.
User’s Manual
Enabled
Enables the USB floppy diskette drive legacy
emulation function (Default).
Disabled
Disables the USB floppy diskette drive legacy
emulation function.
7-7
HW Setup & BIOS Setup
BIOS Setup Program
Settings for some features are carried out in the BIOS setup program.
Notes Before Using the BIOS Setup Application
■ In most cases, changes to the system's configuration should be made
within Windows by using applications such as TOSHIBA HW Setup,
TOSHIBA Password Utility, Windows Device Manager and so forth.
If you make changes to the configuration through the BIOS setup
program, please be aware that the configuration set through the
Windows applications will take priority.
■ Changes to the settings within the BIOS setup program will not be
erased even if the power supply is turned off and the main battery
removed. However, if the built-in Real Time Clock (RTC) battery runs
out of power, most of the settings will revert back to their default
values. However, please note that the following items will not be
affected in this instance:
• Password
• Hard Disk Drive Password
• Security Controller
• Fingerprint patterns
Starting and Ending the BIOS Setup Program
Starting the BIOS Setup Program
1. Turn on the computer while pressing the ESC key - if the Password =
prompt is displayed, enter either the Supervisor Password, if one is set,
or the User Password and press the ENTER key. Please refer to
Chapter 6, the TOSHIBA Password Utility for further details about the
User Password.
2. At the Check system. Then press [F1] key. prompt, press the
F1 key - the BIOS setup application will start up.
Please refer to the operating instructions displayed in the settings screen.
Ending the BIOS Setup Program
In order to save the changes you have made and end the BIOS setup
application, follow the steps as detailed below:
1. Press the END key - this will cause the Are you sure? (Y/N). The
changes you made will cause the system to reboot.
prompt to be displayed at the bottom of the screen.
2. Press the Y key - this will save the configuration changes and end the
BIOS setup application, automatically restarting the computer.
User’s Manual
7-8
HW Setup & BIOS Setup
Ending the BIOS Setup Program Halfway
The configuration settings can be terminated halfway without saving any of
the changes made by following the steps detailed below:
1. Press the ESC key - the Exit without saving? (Y/N) prompt to
be displayed at the bottom of the screen.
2. Press the Y key - the BIOS setup application will exit and the computer
will automatically restart.
Supervisor Password
This setting, which is displayed on the first page of the setup screen, Allows
you to register a Supervisor Password of the computer.
Not Registered
Supervisor Password has not been registered
(Default).
Registered
Supervisor Password has been registered.
The User Password and Supervisor Password configured in BIOS SETUP
can also be changed or deleted using the TOSHIBA Password Utility.
When unable to perform the following operations, use the TOSHIBA
Password Utility to change the configuration or delete the Supervisor
Password.
■ Configuration changes in the BIOS Setup Program
■ Configuration changes in the HW Setup utility
■ Selection of the startup device during computer recovery
Core Multi - Processing
The Core Multi-Processing sets the CPU operating mode.
Enabled is Dual Core mode.
Disabled is Single Core mode.
User’s Manual
Enabled
Enables Core Multi - Processing functions
(Default).
Disabled
Disables Core Multi - Processing functions.
7-9
HW Setup & BIOS Setup
Virtualization Technology
Virtualization Technology sets enable or disable of the Intel® Virtualization
Technology installed in the CPU.
Intel® Virtualization Technology is the technique that allows one machine to
operate as multiple virtual machines.
The Virtualization Technology is supported with some models.
The Disabled command does not allow use of the Intel® Virtualization
Technology.
The Enabled command allows use of the Intel® Virtualization Technology.
Enabled
Enables Virtualization Technology.
Disabled
Disables Virtualization Technology (Default).
Enhanced C-States
This feature enables or disables the Enhanced C-States.
Enabled
This lowers the power consumption (Default).
Disabled
This does not lower the power consumption.
Execute-Disable Bit Capability
This setting, which is displayed on the first page of the setup screen,
configures the Execute-Disable Bit function of the computer's processor.
This function is specific to Intel® processors and, when activated, helps to
reduce security threats to the computer by preventing certain classes of
malicious 'buffer overflow' attacks when combined with a supporting
operating system such as Windows Vista®.
User’s Manual
Available
Makes the processor's Execute-Disable Bit
Capability available for use (Default).
Not Available
Disables the processor's Execute-Disable Bit
Capability so that it is not available for use.
7-10
HW Setup & BIOS Setup
Auto Power On
This is a function for automatically turning on the computer. This item
shows the current Auto Power On setting. When Alarm Time, Wake-up on
LAN, or Critical Battery Wake-up are Enabled, Auto Power On is also
Enabled.
Alarm Time, Wake-up on LAN, on Battery and Critical Battery Wake-up can
be configured under OPTIONS.
Enabled
Either Alarm Time, Wake-up on LAN, or Critical
Battery Wake-up is set to Enabled (Default).
Disabled
Alarm Time, Wake-up on LAN, and Critical
Battery Wake-up are Disabled.
on Battery
The setting is available when the Wake-up on LAN is Enabled.
Enabled
Enables Wake-up on LAN function when
operating from the battery.
Disabled
Disables Wake-up on LAN function when
operating from the battery (Default).
Critical Battery Wake-up
Configures what action is taken when the remaining battery power is close
to running out while the system is in Sleep Mode.
This setting is only available when the Critical battery action in Windows is
set to Hibernate (Default).
To access it, Start -> Control Panel -> System and Maintenance ->
Power Options -> Edit Plan Settings -> Change advanced power
settings -> Battery.
The operation of this function is dependent upon battery status.
User’s Manual
Enabled
When the remaining battery power is about to run
out while the system is in Sleep Mode, the
system is automatically woken up and then
switched to Hibernation Mode (Default).
Disabled
No action is taken even if the remaining battery
power is about to run out while the system is in
Sleep Mode.
7-11
HW Setup & BIOS Setup
Security controller
Please note that the security controller settings are available on the second
page of the BIOS setup application.
TPM
This setting enables or disables the computer's Trusted Platform Module
(TPM) security controller.
The Trusted Platform Module security controller is supported with some
models.
Enabled
Enable Trusted Platform Module security.
Disabled
Disable Trusted Platform Module security
(default).
Clear TPM Owner
This setting is used to erase the data stored as part of the Trusted Platform
Module, as would be required, for example, when disposing of the
computer or when the owner of the computer changes. Once this operation
is carried out, the Trusted Platform Module configuration settings are
erased such that any encrypted data can no longer be decrypted and the
files can no longer be read. In view of this you must ensure that you backup
or delete the data as necessary before carrying out this operation.
The procedure to follow is as detailed below:
1. Move the cursor to the Clear TPM Owner setting and press either the
Space key or BACK SPACE key.
2. A message is displayed at which you should press the Y, E, S, and
ENTER keys in sequence - the Trusted Platform Module information will
then be erased.
3. The Trusted Platform Module setting will then change from being
Enable to Disabled and the setting no longer displayed.
When using TPM, please refer to the Infineon TPM Installation Guide
from the C:\TOSAPINS\Infineon TPM Installation Guide and
ensure that the user reads as it contains usage information and notes on
using TPM security.
Diagnostic Mode
Allows you to set whether the BIOS diagnostic test is enabled or disabled.
User’s Manual
Disabled
The diagnostic test is disabled (Default).
Enabled
The diagnostic test is enabled.
7-12
HW Setup & BIOS Setup
SATA Controller Mode
This feature sets the SATA Controller Mode.
The SATA Controller Mode is supported with some models.
AHCI
Sets AHCI which is the mode for Windows Vista®
(Default).
Compatibility
Sets the mode for legacy OS. Use this mode
when the driver corresponding to AHCI is not
used.
USB Sleep and Charge function
This section describes the settings for "USB Sleep and Charge function".
For more information, please refer to the USB Sleep and Charge function
section in Chapter 3, Hardware, Utilities and Options.
The default setting in BIOS Setup is [Disabled]. Changing the setting to
[Enabled] enables the use of this function.
There are two modes, Mode-1 and Mode-2 in [Enabled]. For normal use,
set the setting to Mode-1.
If the function does not work with Mode-1 setting, change it to Mode-2.
Some external devices may not be able to use this function in either mode.
When this happens, change the setting to [Disabled].
User’s Manual
Enabled (Mode-1)
Enables USB Sleep and Charge function.
Enabled (Mode-2)
Enables USB Sleep and Charge function.
Disabled
Disables USB Sleep and Charge function
(Default).
7-13
Chapter 8
Troubleshooting
TOSHIBA have designed this computer for durability, however, should
problems occur you are able to use the procedures detailed in this chapter
to help determine the cause.
All users should become familiar with this chapter as knowing what might
go wrong can help prevent problems from occurring in the first place.
Problem solving process
Resolving problems will be much easier if you observe the following
guidelines:
■ Stop immediately when you recognize a problem exists as taking
further action may result in data loss or damage, or you may destroy
valuable problem related information that can help solve the problem.
■ Observe what is happening - write down what the system is doing and
what actions you performed immediately before the problem occurred.
If you have a printer attached, print a copy of the screen using the
computer's PRTSC key.
Please also be aware that the questions and procedures described in this
chapter are meant only as a guide, they are not definitive problem solving
techniques. In reality many problems can be solved simply, but a few may
require help from your reseller, dealer or service provider - if you find you
need to consult others, be prepared to describe the problem in as much
detail as possible.
User’s Manual
8-1
Troubleshooting
Preliminary checklist
You should always consider the simplest solution first - the items detailed in
this checklist are easy to fix and yet can cause what appears to be a
serious problem:
■ Make sure you turn on all peripheral devices before you turn on the
computer - this includes your printer and any other external device you
are using.
■ Before you attach an external device you should first turn the computer
off, then when you turn the computer back on again it will recognize the
new device.
■ Make sure all optional accessories are configured properly in the
computer's setup program and that all required driver software has
been loaded (please refer to the documentation included with the
optional accessories for further information on its installation and
configuration).
■ Check all cables to ensure they are correctly and firmly attached to the
computer - loose cables can cause signal errors.
■ Inspect all connecting cables for loose wires and all connectors for
loose pins.
■ Check that your floppy diskette, CD or DVD media is correctly loaded
and, in the case of a floppy diskette, that its write protect tab is correctly
set.
Always try to make detailed notes of your observations and keep them in a
permanent error log - this will help you to describe your problems to your
reseller, dealer or service provider. In addition, if a problem recurs, the log
you have made will help to identify the problem faster.
Analyzing the problem
Sometimes the computer will give you clues that can help you identify why
it is malfunctioning. In view of this you should keep the following questions
in mind:
■ Which part of the computer is not operating properly - keyboard, hard
disk drive, display panel, touch pad, touch pad control buttons - as each
device will produce different symptoms.
■ Check the options within the operating system to ensure that its
configuration is set properly.
■ What appears on the display? Does it display any messages or random
characters? If you have a printer attached, print a copy of the screen
using the PRTSC key and, if possible, look up the messages in the
documentation included with the computer, software or operating
system.
■ Check that all connecting cables are correctly and firmly attached as
loose cables can cause erroneous or intermittent signals.
■ Do any indicators light, if so, which ones, what color are they and do
they stay on or blink? Write down what you see.
User’s Manual
8-2
Troubleshooting
■ Do you hear any beeps, if so how many, are they long or short and are
they high pitched or low pitched? In addition, is the computer making
any unusual noises? Write down what you hear.
Record your observations so you can describe them in detail to your
reseller, dealer or service provider.
Software
Hardware
The problems may be caused by your software or disk. If
you cannot load a software package, the media may be
damaged or the program might be corrupted - in these
instances try loading another copy of the software if
possible.
If an error message appears while you are using a software
package you should refer to the documentation supplied
with it as this will usually include a problem solving section
or a summary of error messages.
Next, you should check any error messages against the
operating system documentation.
If you cannot find a software problem, you should then
check the setup and configuration of your hardware. First
run through the items in the preliminary checklist as
described previously then, if you still cannot correct the
problem, try to identify the source - the next section
provides checklists for individual components and
peripherals.
Before using a peripheral device or application software that is not an
authorized Toshiba part or product, make sure the device or software can
be used with your computer. Use of incompatible devices may cause injury
or may damage your computer.
Hardware and system checklist
This section discusses problems caused by your computer’s hardware or
attached peripherals. Basic problems may occur in the following areas:
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
User’s Manual
System start-up
Self test
Power
Password
Keyboard
Internal display panel
Hard disk drive
DVD Super Multi drive
USB floppy diskette drive
PC Card
Smart Card
SD/SDHC Card
Memory Stick
xD picture card
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
MultiMediaCard
Pointing Device
Fingerprint Sensor
USB device
Additional memory module
Sound system
External monitor
i.LINK (IEEE1394) device
Modem
LAN
Wireless LAN
Bluetooth
Recovery Discs
8-3
Troubleshooting
System start-up
When the computer does not start properly, check the following items:
■ Self Test
■ Power Sources
■ Power-on Password
Self test
While booting up the computer, self test is executed automatically and the
TOSHIBA logo is displayed on the screen.
This message remains on the screen for a few seconds.
If the self test is successful, the computer tries to load the operating system
according to how the Boot Priority option is set within the TOSHIBA HW
Setup program.
If any of the following conditions are present, the self test has failed:
■ The computer stops and does not proceed to display information or
messages except for the TOSHIBA logo.
■ Random characters appear on the screen and the system does not
function normally.
■ The screen displays an error message.
In these instances, turn off the computer, check all cable connections and
then restart it - if the self test fails again, contact your reseller, dealer or
service provider.
Power
When the computer is not plugged into an AC power outlet, the battery
pack is the primary power source. However, your computer also has a
number of other power resources, including an intelligent power supply and
a Real Time Clock (RTC) battery, all of which are interrelated with any one
having the ability to produce apparent power problems.
This section provides checklists for AC power and the battery. If you cannot
resolve a problem after following them, the cause may lie with another
power related resource - in such an instance you should contact your
reseller, dealer or service provider.
Overheating power down
In the event that the computer's internal operating temperature becomes
too high, the system will automatically enter either Hibernation Mode or
Sleep Mode and shut itself down.
User’s Manual
Problem
Procedure
Computer shuts down
and DC IN indicator
blinks orange
Leave the computer off until the DC IN indicator
stops blinking.
8-4
Troubleshooting
It is recommended to leave the computer off until the interior reaches room
temperature even though the DC IN indicator stops blinking.
If the computer has reached room temperature
and it still does not start, or if it starts but shuts
down quickly, contact your reseller, dealer or
service provider.
Computer shuts down
and its DC IN indicator
is flashing green
This indicates a problem with the heat dispersal
system - you should contact your reseller, dealer
or service provider.
AC power
If you have trouble turning on the computer with the AC adaptor connected
you should check the status of the DC IN indicator. Please refer to Chapter
6, Power and Power-Up Modes for further information.
Problem
Procedure
AC adaptor doesn’t
power the computer
(DC IN indicator does
not glow green)
Check the connections to make sure that the
power cord/adaptor is firmly connected to the
computer and a working power outlet.
Check the condition of the cord and terminals. If
the cord is frayed or damaged it should be
replaced, while if the terminals are soiled, they
should be cleaned with a clean cotton cloth.
If the AC adaptor still does not power the
computer, you should contact your reseller,
dealer or service provider.
Battery
If you suspect a problem with the battery, you should check the status of
the DC IN indicator as well as the Battery indicator. Please refer to Chapter
6, Power and Power-Up Modes for more information on these indicators,
together with general battery operation.
User’s Manual
Problem
Procedure
Battery doesn’t power
the computer
The battery may be discharged - connect the AC
adaptor to recharge the battery.
8-5
Troubleshooting
Problem
Procedure
Battery doesn’t charge
when the AC adaptor is
attached (Battery
indicator does not glow
orange).
If the battery is completely discharged, it will not
begin charging immediately, in these instances
you should wait a few minutes before trying again.
If the battery still does not charge, you should
check that the power outlet the AC adaptor is
connected to is supplying power - this can be
tested by plugging another appliance into it.
Check whether the battery is hot or cold to the
touch - if so, it will not charge properly and should
be allowed to reach room temperature before
you try again.
Unplug the AC adaptor and remove the battery to
make sure its connecting terminals are clean - if
necessary wipe them with a soft dry cloth lightly
dipped in alcohol.
Connect the AC adaptor and replace the battery,
taking care to ensure that it is securely seated in
the computer.
Check the Battery indicator - if it does not glow,
allow the computer to charge the battery for at
least twenty minutes. If the Battery indicator
starts to glow after this period, allow the battery
to continue to charge for at least another twenty
minutes before turning on the computer.
However, if the indicator still does not glow, the
battery may be at the end of its operating life and
should be replaced. However, if you do not
believe the battery is at the end of its operating
life, you should speak to your reseller, dealer or
service provider.
Battery doesn’t power If you frequently recharge a partially charged
the computer as long as battery, the battery might not charge to its full
expected
potential - in these instances you should fully
discharge the battery and then attempt to charge
it again.
Check the Power saver option under Select a
power plan in the Power Options.
User’s Manual
8-6
Troubleshooting
Real Time Clock
Problem
Procedure
The following message
is Displayed on the
screen:
RTC battery is
low or CMOS
checksum is
inconsistent.
Press [F1] key to
set Date/Time.
The charge in the Real Time Clock (RTC) battery
has run out - you will need to set the date and
time in the BIOS setup application by using the
following steps:
1. Press the F1 key - the BIOS setup application
will load.
2. Set the date in the System Date field.
3. Set the time in the System Time field.
4. Press the END key - a confirmation message
will be displayed.
5. Press the Y key - the BIOS setup application
will end and the computer will restart.
Password
Problem
Procedure
Cannot enter password Please refer to the TOSHIBA Password Utility
section in Chapter 6, Power and Power-Up
Modes for further information.
Keyboard
Keyboard problems can be caused by the setup and configuration of the
computer - please refer to Chapter 5, The Keyboard for further information.
User’s Manual
Problem
Procedure
Some letter keys
produce numbers
Check that the numeric keypad overlay is not
activated - press the FN + F11 hot key and try
typing again.
Output to screen is
garbled
Please refer to your software's documentation to
ensure that its is not remapping the keyboard in
any way (remapping involves changing or
reassigning the function of each key).
If you are still unable to use the keyboard, you
should contact your reseller, dealer or service
provider.
8-7
Troubleshooting
Internal display panel
Apparent computer's display panel problems may be related to the
computer's setup and configuration - please refer to Chapter 7, HW Setup
& BIOS Setup, for further information.
Problem
Procedure
No display
Press the FN + F5 hot keys to adjust the display
priority, and to make sure it is not set for output to
an external monitor.
Markings appear on the These marks may have come from contact with
the keyboard and Touch Pad while the display
computer's display
panel.
panel has been closed. You should try to remove
the marks by gently wiping the display panel with
a clean dry cloth or, if this fails, with a good
quality LCD screen cleaner. In this latter instance
you should always follow the instructions with the
screen cleaner and always ensure you let the
display panel dry properly before closing it.
Problems above remain You should initially refer to the documentation
supplied with you software to determine if it is
unresolved or other
this that is causing the problems. Alternatively
problems occur
you may wish to run the TOSHIBA PC
Diagnostic Tool to check the general operation
of the computer.
If you are still unable to resolve the problem,
contact your reseller, dealer or service provider.
Hard disk drive
Problem
Procedure
Computer does not boot Check to see whether that is a floppy diskette in
from hard disk drive
the floppy diskette drive or a CD-ROM/DVDROM in the optical disc drive - if so remove it and
try to start the computer again.
If this has no effect, check the Boot Priority
setting within the TOSHIBA HW Setup utility please refer to the Boot Priority section in
Chapter 7, HW Setup & BIOS Setup for further
information.
Please refer to your operating system
documentation in order to determine whether
there is a problem with any of the operating
system files or settings.
User’s Manual
8-8
Troubleshooting
Problem
Procedure
Slow performance
The files on the hard disk drive may be
fragmented - in this instance you should run the
disk Defragmentation utility to check the
condition of your files and the hard disk drive.
Please refer to the operating system's
documentation or online Help File for further
information on operating and using the
Defragmentation utility.
As a last resort you should reformat the hard disk
drive and then reload the operating system and
all other files and data. If you are still unable to
resolve the problem, contact your reseller, dealer
or service provider.
DVD Super Multi drive
For more information, refer to Chapter 4, Operating Basics.
Problem
Procedure
You cannot access
a CD/DVD in the drive
Make sure the drive’s disc tray is securely
closed.
Press gently until it clicks into place.
Check whether the drive power is on. If the
power is off, press the FN + Tab hot key and turn
on the power.
Open the disc tray and make sure the CD/DVD is
properly seated. It should lie flat with the label
facing up.
A foreign object in the disc tray could block laser
light from reading the CD/DVD. Make sure there
is no obstruction. Remove any foreign object.
Check whether the CD/DVD is dirty. If it is, wipe it
with a clean cloth dipped in water or a neutral
cleaner. Refer to the Media care section in
Chapter 4 for details on cleaning.
Some CD/DVDs run
The software or hardware configuration may be
correctly, but others do causing a problem. Make sure the hardware
not
configuration matches your software’s needs.
Check the CD/DVD's documentation.
User’s Manual
8-9
Troubleshooting
Check the type of CD/DVD you are using. The
drive supports:
DVD-ROM: DVD-ROM, DVD-Video
CD-ROM:
CD-DA, CD-Text, Photo CDTM
(single/multi-session), CD-ROM
Mode 1, Mode 2, CD-ROM XA
Mode 2 (Form1, Form2), Enhanced
CD (CD-EXTRA), Addressing
Method 2
Recordable DVD: DVD-R/-R DL, DVD+R/+R DL,
DVD-RW, DVD+RW, DVD-RAM
Check the region code on the DVD. It must
match that on the DVD Super Multi drive. Region
codes are listed in the Optical disc drives section
in Chapter 2, The Grand Tour.
USB floppy diskette drive
For further information, please refer to Chapter 3, Hardware, Utilities and
Options.
Problem
Procedure
Drive does not operate Check the connection between the computer and
the drive to ensure that it is properly attached.
Some programs run
correctly but others do
not
The computer's software or hardware
configuration may be causing a problem - ensure
that these configurations match your
requirements (refer to any relevant
documentation, for example that supplied with
any software in use, for further information).
You cannot access the Try another floppy diskette in the drive - if you are
external floppy diskette able to access this disk then it indicates the
original disk and not the drive is probably causing
drive
the problem.
If you are still unable to resolve the problem,
contact your reseller, dealer or service provider.
User’s Manual
8-10
Troubleshooting
PC Card
For further information, please refer to Chapter 3, Hardware, Utilities and
Options.
Problem
Procedure
PC Card error occurs
Remove the PC Card from the computer and
then reinsert it in order to ensure it is firmly
connected.
In the event that the PC Card is attached to an
external peripheral device, ensure that this
connection is properly made.
If the problem persists, then you should refer to
the documentation supplied with your PC Card
for further information.
If you are still unable to resolve the problem,
contact your reseller, dealer or service provider.
Smart Card
For further information, please refer to Chapter 3, Hardware, Utilities and
Options.
Problem
Procedure
Smart Card error occurs Remove the Smart Card from the computer,
make sure to confirm that the card oriented
correctly and reinsert it in order to ensure it is
firmly connected.
If the problem persists, then you should refer to
the documentation supplied with your Smart
Card for further information.
SD/SDHC Card
For further information, please refer to Chapter 3, Hardware, Utilities and
Options.
User’s Manual
Problem
Procedure
SD/SDHC Card error
occurs
Remove the SD/SDHC Card from the computer
and then reinsert it in order to ensure it is firmly
connected.
If the problem persists, then you should refer to
the documentation supplied with your SD/SDHC
Card for further information.
You cannot write to an
SD/SDHC Card
Remove the SD/SDHC Card from the computer
and check to ensure that it is not write protected.
8-11
Troubleshooting
Problem
Procedure
You cannot read a file
Check to ensure the required file is actually on
the SD/SDHC Card that is inserted into the
computer.
If you are still unable to resolve the problem,
contact your reseller, dealer or service provider.
Memory Stick
For further information, please refer to Chapter 3, Hardware, Utilities and
Options.
Problem
Procedure
Memory Stick/Memory
Stick PRO/Memory
Stick PRO Duo error
occurs
Remove the Memory Stick/Memory Stick
PRO/Memory Stick PRO Duo from the computer
and then reinsert it in order to ensure it is firmly
connected.
If the problem persists, then you should refer to
the documentation supplied with your Memory
Stick/Memory Stick PRO/Memory Stick PRO
Duo for further information.
You cannot write to an
Memory Stick/Memory
Stick PRO/Memory
Stick PRO Duo
Remove the Memory Stick/Memory Stick
PRO/Memory Stick PRO Duo from the computer
and check to ensure that it is not write protected.
You cannot read a file
Check to ensure the required file is actually on
the Memory Stick/Memory Stick PRO/Memory
Stick PRO Duo that is inserted into the computer.
If you are still unable to resolve the problem,
contact your reseller, dealer or service provider.
xD picture card
For further information, please refer to Chapter 3, Hardware, Utilities and
Options.
User’s Manual
Problem
Procedure
xD picture card error
occurs
Remove the xD picture card from the computer
and then reinsert it in order to ensure it is firmly
connected.
If the problem persists, then you should refer to
the documentation supplied with your xD picture
card for further information.
8-12
Troubleshooting
Problem
Procedure
You cannot read a file
Check to ensure the required file is actually on
the xD picture card that is inserted into the
computer.
If you are still unable to resolve the problem,
contact your reseller, dealer or service provider.
MultiMediaCard
For further information, please refer to Chapter 3, Hardware, Utilities and
Options.
Problem
Procedure
MultiMediaCard error
occurs
Remove the MultiMediaCard from the computer
and then reinsert it in order to ensure it is firmly
connected.
If the problem persists, then you should refer to
the documentation supplied with your
MultiMediaCard for further information.
You cannot write to a
MultiMediaCard
Remove the MultiMediaCard from the computer
and check to ensure that it is not write protected.
You cannot read a file
Check to ensure the required file is actually on
the MultiMediaCard that is inserted into the
computer.
If you are still unable to resolve the problem,
contact your reseller, dealer or service provider.
Pointing device
If you are using a USB mouse, you should also refer to both the USB
device section in this chapter, and the documentation supplied with your
mouse.
Touch Pad
Problem
Procedure
On-screen pointer does In this instance the system might be busy - Try
not respond to pointing moving the mouse again after waiting a short
device operation
while.
User’s Manual
8-13
Troubleshooting
User’s Manual
Problem
Procedure
Double-tapping does
not work
In this instance, you should initially try changing
the double-click speed setting within the Mouse
Control utility.
1. To access this utility, click Start -> Control
Panel -> Hardware and Sound -> Mouse
icon.
2. Within the Mouse Properties window, click
the Buttons tab.
3. Set the double-click speed as required and
click OK.
The mouse pointer
moves too fast or too
slow
In this instance, you should initially try changing
the speed setting within the Mouse Control utility.
1. To access this utility, click Start -> Control
Panel -> Hardware and Sound -> Mouse
icon.
2. Within the Mouse Properties window, click
the Pointer Options tab.
3. Set the pointer speed as required and click
OK.
The reaction of Touch
pad is either too
sensitive or not
sensitive enough.
Adjust the touch Sensitivity.
1. Click Start -> Control Panel -> Hardware
and Sound -> Mouse icon.
2. Within the Mouse Properties window, click
the Advanced tab.
3. Click the Advanced feature settings...
button.
4. Advanced feature settings is displayed.
5. Within the Pointer speed and tapping
settings, click Settings... button.
6. Detailed Touch Pad settings window is
displayed.
7. Move the slider bar to adjust the sensitivity in
the Touch Sensitivity.
8. Click OK button.
9. Click the OK button on Advanced feature
setting screen.
If you are still unable to resolve the problem,
contact your reseller, dealer or service provider.
8-14
Troubleshooting
USB mouse
Problem
Procedure
On-screen pointer does In this instance the system might be busy - Try
not respond to mouse moving the mouse again after waiting a short
operation
while.
Remove the mouse from the computer and then
reconnect it to a free USB port it in order to
ensure it is firmly attached.
User’s Manual
Double-clicking does
not work
In this instance, you should initially try changing
the double-click speed setting within the Mouse
Control utility.
1. To access this utility, click Start -> Control
Panel -> Hardware and Sound -> Mouse
icon.
2. Within the Mouse Properties window, click
the Buttons tab.
3. Set the double-click speed as required and
click OK.
The mouse pointer
moves too fast or too
slow
In this instance, you should initially try changing
the speed setting within the Mouse Control utility.
1. To access this utility, click Start -> Control
Panel -> Hardware and Sound -> Mouse
icon.
2. Within the Mouse Properties window, click
the Pointer Options tab.
3. Set the pointer speed as required and click
OK.
The mouse pointer
moves erratically
The elements of the mouse responsible for
detecting movement might be dirty - please refer
to the documentation supplied with the mouse for
instructions on how to clean it.
If you are still unable to resolve the problem,
contact your reseller, dealer or service provider.
8-15
Troubleshooting
Fingerprint Sensor
User’s Manual
Problem
Procedure
Reading of the
fingerprint was not
successful.
In this instance you should try the fingerprint
reading operation again using the correct finger
position - please refer to Using the Fingerprint
Sensor in Chapter 4, Operating Basics for further
information.
Alternatively, you should try the recognition
process again using another enrolled finger.
The fingerprint sensor compares and analyzes
the unique characteristics in a fingerprint.
However, there may be instances where certain
users are unable to register their fingerprints due
to insufficient unique characteristics in their
fingerprints.
The recognition success rate may differ from
user to user.
The fingerprint cannot
be read due to injuries
to the finger.
In this instance you should try the recognition
process again using another enrolled finger.
However, if fingerprints from all the enrolled
fingers cannot be read, you should instead log
into the computer by using the keyboard to input
the password.
If you are still unable to resolve the problem,
contact your reseller, dealer or service provider.
8-16
Troubleshooting
USB device
In addition to the information in this section, please also refer to the
documentation supplied with your USB device.
Problem
Procedure
USB device does not
work
Remove the USB device from the computer and
then reconnect it to a free port it in order to
ensure it is firmly attached.
Ensure that any required USB device drivers are
properly installed - to achieve this you should
refer to both the device documentation and the
operating system documentation.
If you are using an operating system that does
not support USB, you are still able to use a USB
mouse and/or USB keyboard by setting the USB
KB/Mouse Emulation option within the
TOSHIBA HW Setup utility to Enabled.
If you are still unable to resolve the problem,
contact your reseller, dealer or service provider.
USB Sleep and Charge function
Problem
Procedure
I cannot use the "USB
Sleep and Charge
function".
The setting of "USB Sleep and Charge function"
may be [Disabled]. Change the setting to
[Enabled] in the BIOS Setup.
When there is a current overflow of the external
device connected to the compatible port, USB
bus power (DC5V) supply may be stopped for
safety reasons. When this happens, disconnect
an external device if some external devices are
connected. After that, turn the power of the
computer ON/OFF to restore the function. If this
function can not be still used even if only one
external device is connected, stop using the
external device because its current is over the
acceptable value of this computer.
User’s Manual
8-17
Troubleshooting
Problem
Procedure
Some external devices may not be able to use
the "USB Sleep and Charge function". In this
case, please try one or more of the following
methods.
■ Change a mode setting of [Enabled] by the
BIOS Setup.
■ Turn OFF the computer while external
devices are connected.
■ Connect external devices after turning OFF of
the computer.
If this function can not be still used, change the
setting to [Disabled] in the BIOS Setup and stop
using this function.
User’s Manual
The battery depletes
quickly even when I
turned OFF the power
of the computer.
When "USB Sleep and Charge function" is set to
[Enabled] in the BIOS Setup, USB bus power
(DC5V) will be supplied to the external device
connected to the compatible port. If external
device is connected to the compatible port when
the AC adaptor is not connected to the computer,
the battery of the computer will be depleted even
when the power of the computer is turned OFF.
Connect the AC adaptor to the computer or
change the "USB Sleep and Charge function"
setting to [Disabled] in the BIOS Setup.
Instead use an USB port that does not have the
USB Sleep and Charge function-compatible icon
).
External devices
connected to the
compatible ports do not
work when connected
to a compatible port.
Some external devices may not work when
connected to a compatible port when the "USB
Sleep and Charge function" is [Enabled] in the
BIOS Setup.
Reconnect the external device after turning ON
the computer.
If the external device still does not work, connect
device to an USB port that does not have the
USB Sleep and Charge function-compatible icon
) or change the "USB Sleep and Charge
function" setting to [Disabled] in the BIOS Setup.
8-18
Troubleshooting
Problem
Procedure
The "USB WakeUp
When "USB Sleep and Charge function" is set to
function" does not work. [Enabled] in the BIOS Setup, the "USB WakeUp
function" does not work for ports that support the
USB Sleep and Charge function.
In that case, use an USB port that does not have
the USB Sleep and Charge function-compatible
icon (
) or change the "USB Sleep and
Charge function" setting to [Disabled] in the BIOS
Setup.
Additional memory module
Please also refer to Chapter 3, Hardware, Utilities and Options, for further
information on installing and removing memory modules.
User’s Manual
Problem
Procedure
If there is a memory
malfunction, the Power
indicator will repeatedly
flash (on for 0.5
seconds, off for 0.5
seconds) in the
following patterns;
If there is an error in
only slot A or no
memory module is
inserted in Slot A:
orange twice, then
green once.
If there is an error in
Slot B: orange once,
then green twice.
If there are errors in
both Slot A and Slot B:
orange twice, then
green twice.
In the event the Power indicator flashes when
the computer is turned on, you should first check
that the installed memory module(s) are
compatible with the computer. If there is an error
with a compatible memory module, there is a
possibility the memory module is damaged.
An error will occur if a
memory module is
inserted into Slot B
while no memory
module is inserted in
Slot A.
Remove the memory module from Slot B and
insert it into Slot A.
If you determine that an incompatible module has
been installed, you should follow the steps as
detailed below:
1. Turn off the computer.
2. Disconnect the AC adaptor and all peripheral
devices.
3. Remove the battery pack.
4. Remove the incompatible memory module.
5. Install the battery and/or connect the AC
adaptor.
6. Turn on the computer.
If you are still unable to resolve the problem,
contact your reseller, dealer or service provider.
8-19
Troubleshooting
Sound system
In addition to the information in this section, please also refer to the
documentation supplied with your audio device.
Problem
Procedure
No sound is heard
Adjust the volume control dial.
Check the software volume settings.
Please check to see if Mute is turned to Off
Check to make sure the headphone connection
is secure.
Check within the Windows Device Manager
application to ensure the sound device is
enabled and that the device is properly working.
For further information, please refer to
"Troubleshooting in Windows" section of
Windows Help and Support.
Annoying sound is
heard
User’s Manual
In this instance you may be experiencing
feedback from either the internal microphone or
an external microphone connected to the
computer - please refer to Sound System in
Chapter 4, Operating Basics for further
information.
If you are still unable to resolve the problem,
contact your reseller, dealer or service provider.
8-20
Troubleshooting
External monitor
Please also refer to Chapter 3, Hardware, Utilities and Options, and to the
documentation supplied with your monitor for further information.
Problem
Procedure
Monitor does not turn
on
After confirming that the monitor's power switch
is on, you should check the connections to make
sure that the power cord/adaptor is firmly
connected to the monitor and to a working power
outlet.
No display
Try adjusting the contrast and brightness controls
on the external monitor.
Press the FN + F5 hot key in order to change the
display priority and ensure that it is not set for the
internal display only.
Check to see if the external monitor is connected.
When the external monitor is set as the primary
display device in extended desktop mode, it will
not display when the computer wakes up from
Sleep Mode if the external monitor has been
disconnected while in Sleep Mode.
To keep this from happening, do not disconnect
the external monitor while the computer is in
Sleep or Hibernation Mode.
Remember to turn off the computer before
disconnecting the external monitor.
When the display panel and an external monitor
are set to clone mode and they are turned off by
the timer, the display panel or the external
monitor may not display when turned on again.
If this occurs, press FN + F5 to re-set the display
panel and external monitor to clone mode.
Display error occurs
User’s Manual
Check that the cable connecting the external
monitor to the computer is firmly attached.
If you are still unable to resolve the problem,
contact your reseller, dealer or service provider.
8-21
Troubleshooting
i.LINK (IEEE1394) device
Problem
Procedure
i.LINK device does not
function
Make sure the cable is securely connected to the
computer and to the device.
Make sure the device’s power is turned on.
Reinstall the drivers. Open the Windows
Control Panel and double-click the Add
Hardware icon. Follow the on-screen
directions.
Restart Windows.
If problems persist, contact your dealer.
Modem
For additional information, please also refer to Appendix C, AT Commands
and Appendix D, S-registers.
This information is applicable to the models equipped with a built-in
modem.
User’s Manual
Problem
Procedure
Communication
software can’t initialize
modem
Make sure the computer's internal modem
settings are correct - please refer to the Phone
and Modem Options link within the Windows
Control Panel.
You can hear a dial
tone but can’t make a
call
If the call is going through a Private Branch
Exchange (PBX), take care to ensure that the
communication application's tone dial detection
feature is disabled.
You are also able to use the ATX command please refer to Appendix C, AT Commands for
further information.
You place a call, but a
connection can’t be
made
Make sure that the settings are correct within
your communication application.
After making a call you
can’t hear a ring
Ensure that the communication application's tone
or pule dialling selection feature is set correctly.
You are also able to use the ATD command please refer to Appendix C, AT Commands for
further information.
8-22
Troubleshooting
Problem
Procedure
Communication is cut
off unexpectedly
The computer will automatically cut off
communication when connection with the carrier
is not successful for a set time interval - try
lengthening this time interval within your
communication application.
A CONNECT display is
quickly replaced by NO
CARRIER
Ensure that the communication application's
error control feature is set correctly.
You are also able to use the AT\N command please refer to Appendix C, AT Commands for
further information.
Character display
becomes garbled
during a
communication
When transmitting data you should ensure that
the parity bit and stop bit settings correspond
with those of the remote computer - you should
check the flow control and communication
protocol settings within your communication
application.
You cannot receive an
incoming call
Ensure that the communication application's
rings before auto answer feature is set correctly.
You are also able to use the ATS0 command please refer to Appendix D, S-registers for further
information.
If you are still unable to resolve the problem,
contact your reseller, dealer or service provider.
Problem
Procedure
Cannot access LAN
Check for a firm cable connection between the
LAN jack and the LAN hub.
Wake-up on LAN does
not work
Make sure the AC adaptor is connected. The
Wake-up on LAN function consumes power even
when the system is off.
If problems persist, consult your LAN
administrator.
LAN
User’s Manual
8-23
Troubleshooting
Wireless LAN
If the following procedures do not restore LAN access, consult your LAN
administrator. For more information on wireless communication, refer to
Chapter 4, Operating Basics.
Problem
Procedure
Cannot access
Wireless LAN
Make sure the computer's Wireless
communication switch is set to on.
If problems persist, contact your LAN
administrator.
Bluetooth
For further information on Bluetooth wireless communication, please refer
to Chapter 4, Operating Basics.
Problem
Procedure
Cannot access
Bluetooth device
Check to ensure the computer's Wireless
Communication Switch is set to on.
Check to ensure the Bluetooth Manager
application is running on the computer and that
power to the external Bluetooth device is turned
on.
Check to ensure that no optional Bluetooth
Adaptor is installed in the computer - the built-in
Bluetooth hardware cannot operate
simultaneously with another Bluetooth controller.
If you are still unable to resolve the problem,
contact your reseller, dealer or service provider.
User’s Manual
8-24
Troubleshooting
Recovery Discs
Problem
Procedure
The following message
appears when
executing Recovery
Disc Creator.
"The Recovery Disc
Creator can not be
launched because
there is no
recovery
partition."
You will see this message if you have previously
chosen to remove the partition and are trying to
create "Recovery Media".
When there is no recovery partition, the
Recovery Disc Creator cannot make Recovery
Media.
However, if you have already created a
"Recovery Media", you can use it to restore the
recovery partition.
Simply follow the instructions in Restoring the
pre-installed software from your created
Recovery Discs section in Chapter1, Getting
Started.
You will be directed to select "Restore Original
Factory Image" from the drop-down menu.
If you have not created "Recovery Media",
please contact TOSHIBA support for assistance.
Disposing of the computer and the computer's batteries
■ Discard this computer in accordance with applicable laws and
regulations. For further information, contact your local government.
■ This computer contains rechargeable batteries. After repeated use, the
batteries will finally lose their ability to hold a charge and you will need
to replace them. Under certain applicable laws and regulation, it may be
illegal to dispose of old batteries by placing them in the trash.
■ Please be kind to our shared environment. Check with your local
government authority for details regarding where to recycle old
batteries or how to dispose of them properly.
■ If your hard disk drive or other storage media contains sensitive data,
you should be aware that standard deletion procedures do not remove
data from the media. These standard deletion procedures include:
■ Selecting Delete for a target file
■ Putting files in the Recycle Bin and emptying the Recycle Bin
■ Reformatting the media
■ Reinstalling an operating system from the recovery CD-ROM
The procedures above delete only the initial part of the data used for file
management. This makes the file invisible to the operating system, but
the data can still be read by specialized utilities. If you dispose of the
computer, please delete all the data on its hard disk drive. Doing so
prevents unauthorized use of such data. To ensure your data is not
used for unauthorized purposes, you can:
■ Physically destroy the hard disk drive
User’s Manual
8-25
Troubleshooting
■ Use a proven specialized utility to overwrite all data
■ Take the hard disk drive to a professional deletion service
All data deletion costs will be borne by you.
TOSHIBA support
If you require any additional help using your computer or if you are having
problems operating the computer, you may need to contact TOSHIBA for
additional technical assistance.
Before you call
Some problems you experience may be related to software or the operating
system so it is important that you investigate other sources of assistance
first. Before contacting TOSHIBA, try the following:
■ Review troubleshooting sections in the documentation supplied with
your software and/or peripheral devices.
■ If a problem occurs when you are running software applications, consult
the software documentation for troubleshooting suggestions and
consider calling the software company's technical support department
for assistance.
■ Consult the reseller or dealer from where you purchased your computer
and/or software - they are your best resource for current information
and support.
Where to write
If you are still unable to solve the problem and suspect that it is hardware
related, write to TOSHIBA at the nearest location listed below:
User’s Manual
Outside of Europe
In Europe
Australia
TOSHIBA Australia Pty. Ltd.
Information Systems Division
Building C, 12-24 Talavera Rd,
North Ryde, 2113, NSW, Australia.
Germany & Austria
TOSHIBA Europe (I.E.) GmbH
Geschäftsbereich,
Deutschland-Österreich
Hammfelddamm 8, D-41460 Neuss,
Germany
Canada
TOSHIBA of Canada Ltd.
191 McNabb Street, Markham,
Ontario L3R 8H2
France
TOSHIBA Systèms France S.A.
7, Rue Ampère B.P. 131, 92804
Puteaux Cedex
China
TOSHIBA Personal Computer &
Network (Shanghai) Co., Ltd.
43F, Hong Kong New World Tower,
No. 300 Huaihai Zhong Road,
Shanghai, P. R. China 200021
Netherlands
TOSHIBA Information Systems,
Benelux B.V.
Rivium Boulevard 41 2909 LK
Capelle a/d IJssel
8-26
Troubleshooting
Outside of Europe
In Europe
Singapore
TOSHIBA Singapore Pte. Ltd.
438B Alexandra Road #06-01
Alexandra Technopark Singapore
119968
Spain
TOSHIBA Information Systems,
ESPAÑA
Parque Empresarial San Fernando
Edificio Europa, la Planta, Escalera
A 28830 Madrid
United States of America
TOSHIBA America Information
Systems, Inc.
9740 Irvine Boulevard Irvine,
California 92618 USA
United Kingdom
TOSHIBA Information Systems
(U.K.) Ltd.
TOSHIBA Court Weybridge
Business Park Addlestone Road
Weybridge, Surrey KT15 2UL
The Rest of Europe
TOSHIBA Europe (I.E.) GmbH
Geschäftsbereich, DeutschlandÖsterreich Hammfelddamm 8, D41460 Neuss, Germany
User’s Manual
8-27
Appendix A
Specifications
This appendix summarizes the computer’s technical specifications.
Physical Dimensions
This section summarizes the computer’s technical specifications.
Physical Dimensions
Weight (typical)*
2.0 kilograms, configured with: 12.1"WXGA,
1,024 MB RAM, 80GB HDD, DVD Super Multi
drive, LAN (1000M bps), Wireless LAN, modem,
Tablet PC Pen.
*Digitizer screen model equipped with UJ-862.
Weight will vary with other configurations. Above
weight is measured at specific criteria. It is not
guaranteed as the maximum weight of the actual
product.
Size
305 (w) x 239 (d) x 37.4/39.4 (h) millimeters (not
including parts that extend beyond the main
body).
Environmental Requirements
User’s Manual
Conditions
Ambient temperature
Relative humidity
Operating
5°C (41°F) to 35°C (95°F)
20% to 80%
Non-operating
-20°C (-4°F) to 65°C (149°F) 10% to 90%
A-1
Specifications
Wet-bulb
temperature
26°C maximum
Conditions
Altitude (from sea level)
Operating
-60 to 3,000 meters
Non-operating
-60 to 10,000 meters
maximum
Power Requirements
AC adaptor
100-240 volts AC
50 or 60 hertz (cycles per second)
Computer
15 V DC
5.0 amperes
Built-in Modem
This information is applicable to the models equipped with a built-in
modem.
Network control unit (NCU)
Type of NCU
AA
Type of line
Telephone line (analog only)
Type of dialing
Pulse
Tone
Control command
AT commands
EIA-578 commands
Monitor function
Computer’s speaker
Communication specifications
User’s Manual
Communication
system
Data:
Fax:
Full duplex
Half duplex
Communication
protocol
Data
ITU-T-Rec
(Former CCITT)
Bell
Fax
ITU-T-Rec
(Former CCITT)
V.21/V.22/V.22bis/V.32/V.32
bis/V.34/V.90
103/212A
V.17/V.29/V.27ter/V.21 ch2
A-2
Specifications
User’s Manual
Communication
speed
Data transmission and reception
300/1200/2400/4800/7200/9600/12000/14400/16
800/19200/21600/24000/26400/28800/31200/33
600 bps
Data reception only with V.90
28000/29333/30666/32000/33333/34666/36000/
37333/38666/40000/41333/42666/44000/45333/
46666/48000/49333/50666/52000/53333/54666/
56000 bps
Fax
2400/4800/7200/9600/12000/14400 bps
Transmitting level
-10 dBm
Receiving level
-10 to -40 dBm
Input/output
impedance
600 ohms ±30%
Error correcting
MNP class 4 and ITU-T V.42
Data compression
MNP class 5 and ITU-T V.42bis
Power supply
+3.3V (supplied by computer)
A-3
Appendix B
Display Controller and Video mode
Display controller
The display controller interprets software commands into hardware
commands that turn particular parts on the screen on or off.
Due to the display panel's increased resolution, lines may appear broken
in when displaying images in full-screen text mode.
The display controller also controls the video mode and uses industry
standard rules to govern the screen resolution and the maximum number of
colors that can be displayed at any one time. Therefore, software written for
a given video mode will run on any computer that supports that mode.
Video mode
Video mode settings are configured via the Display Properties dialog.
To open the Display Properties dialog, click Start -> Control Panel ->
Appearance and Personalization -> Personalization -> Display
Settings.
If you are running some applications (for example a 3D application or video
playback and so on), you may see some disturbance, flickering or frame
dropping on your screen.
If that occurs, adjust the resolution of display, lowering it until the screen is
displayed properly.
You could also disable Windows® Aero™ to help correct this situation.
User’s Manual
B-1
Appendix C
AT Commands
This information is applicable to the models equipped with a built-in
modem.
In most cases, you will not need to type AT commands manually. However,
there might be some occasions when you will need to do so.
This chapter describes AT commands for data mode. Fax and voice
commands are taken care of by application software.
The format for entering AT commands is:
ATXn
where X is the AT command, and n is the specific value for that command.
After you type in the command press ENTER.
Any command issued is acknowledged with a response in either text or
numeric values known as result codes.
All commands and command-values accepted by the modem are
described in this section; any entry other than those listed results in an
error.
+++
Escape sequence
The escape sequence allows the modem to exit data mode and enter online command mode. While in on-line command mode, you can
communicate directly to your modem using AT commands. Once you
finish, you can return to data mode using the ATO command.
A pause, the length of which is set by Escape Guard Time (S12), must be
completed after an escape sequence is entered. This pause prevents the
modem from interpreting the escape sequence as data.
The value of the escape sequence character may be changed using
register S2.
User’s Manual
C-1
AT Commands
A/
Repeat last command
This command repeats the last command string entered. Do not precede
this command with an AT prefix or conclude it by pressing ENTER.
Answer command
This command instructs the modem to go off-hook and answer an incoming
call.
Bn
Communication standard setting
This command determines the communication standard CCITT or Bell.
B0
Selects CCITT V.22 mode when the modem is at 1200 bps.
B1
Selects Bell 212A when the modem is at 1200 bps (default).
B15 Selects V.21 when the modem is at 300 bps.
B16 Selects Bell 103J when the modem is at 300 bps (default).
Result Codes:
OK
n=0,1,15,16
ERROR Otherwise
Dn
Dial
This command instructs the modem to dial a telephone number. Enter n
(the telephone number and any modifiers) after the ATD command.
Any digit or symbol (0-9, *, #, A, B, C, D) may be dialed as touch-tone
digits. Characters such as spaces, hyphens, and parentheses do not count.
They are ignored by the modem, but you may want to include them to make
the number and modifiers easier to read.
The following may be used as phone number modifiers:
Pulse dialing.
Touch-tone dialing (default).
Pause during dialing. Pause for time specified in Register S8
before processing the next character in the dial string.
Wait for dial tone. Modem waits for a second dial tone before
processing the dial string.
Wait for quiet answer. Wait for five seconds of silence after
dialing the number. If silence is not detected, the modem
sends a NO ANSWER result code back to the caller.
Hook flash. Causes the modem to go on-hook for 0.5
seconds and then return to off-hook.
Return to command mode. Causes the modem to return to
command mode after dialing a number, without
disconnecting the call.
S=n Dial a telephone number previously stored using the &Zn=X
command (See &Zn=X command for more information). The
range is 0-3.
User’s Manual
C-2
AT Commands
En
Echo command
This command controls whether or not the characters entered from your
computer keyboard are displayed on your monitor (echoed) while the
modem is in command mode.
E0
Disables echo to the computer.
E1
Enables echo to the computer (default).
Result Codes:
OK
n=0,1
ERROR Otherwise
Hn
Hook control
This command instructs the modem to go on-hook to disconnect a call, or
off-hook to make the phone line busy.
H0
Modem goes on-hook (default).
H1
Modem goes off-hook.
Result Codes:
OK
n=0,1
ERROR Otherwise
In
Request ID information
This command displays product information about the modem.
I0
Returns modem identity string and driver version number.
I3
Same as I0.
I9
Returns region ID in English.
Result Codes:
OK
n=0,3,9
ERROR Otherwise
Ln
Monitor speaker volume
This command sets speaker volume to low, medium, or high.
L0
Low volume.
L1
Low volume. (Same as L0)
L2
Medium volume (default).
L3
High volume.
Result Codes:
OK
n=0,1,2,3
ERROR Otherwise
Mn
Monitor speaker mode
This command turns the speaker on or off.
M0
The speaker is off.
M1
The speaker is on until the modem detects the carrier signal
(default).
User’s Manual
C-3
AT Commands
M2
M3
The speaker is always on when modem is off-hook.
Speaker is on until the carrier is detected, except when
dialing.
Result Codes:
OK
n=0,1,2,3
ERROR Otherwise
Nn
Modulation handshake
This command controls whether or not the local modem performs a
negotiated handshake at connection time with the remote modem when the
communication speed of the two modems is different.
N0
When originating or answering, this is for handshake only at
the communication standard specified by S37 and the ATB
command.
N1
When originating or answering, begin the handshake at the
communication standard specified by S37 and the ATB
command (default).
During handshake, a lower transmission speed may be
selected.
Result Codes:
OK
n=0,1
ERROR Otherwise
On
Return on-line to data mode
O0
Instructs the modem to exit on-line command mode and
return to data mode (see AT escape sequence, +++).
O1
This command issues a retrain before returning to on-line
data mode.
O3
This command issues a rate renegotiation before returning to
on-line data mode.
Result Codes:
OK
n=0,1,3
ERROR Otherwise
Select pulse dialing
This command configures the modem for pulse (non touch-tone) dialing.
Dialed digits are pulsed until a T command or dial modifier is received.
Tone dial is the default setting.
Qn
Result code control
Result codes are informational messages sent from the modem and
displayed on your monitor. Basic result codes are OK, CONNECT, RING, NO
CARRIER, and ERROR. The ATQ command allows the user to turn result
codes on or off.
Q0
Enables modem to send result codes to the computer
(default).
User’s Manual
C-4
AT Commands
Q1
Disables modem from sending result codes to the computer.
Result Codes:
OK
n=0,1
ERROR Otherwise
Select tone dialing
This command instructs the modem to send DTMF tones while dialing.
Dialed digits are tone dialed until a P command or dial modifier is received.
This is the default setting.
Vn
DCE response format
This command controls whether result codes (including call progress and
negotiation progress messages) are displayed as words or their numeric
equivalents.
V0
Displays result codes as digits.
V1
Displays result codes as text (default).
Result Codes:
OK
n=0,1
ERROR Otherwise
Xn
Result code selection, call progress monitoring
This command selects which result codes will be used by the modem.
Command
Dial tone
detect
Busy
signal
detect
Supported Result Code
X0
Disable
Disable
OK, CONNECT, RING, NO CARRIER,
ERROR
X1
Disable
Disable
OK, RING, NO CARRIER, ERROR,
CONNECT 
X2
Enable
Disable
OK, RING, NO CARRIER, ERROR,
NODIALTONE, CONNECT 
X3
Disable
Enable
OK, RING, NO CARRIER, ERROR, BUSY,
CONNECT , BLACKLISTED
X4 (default)
Enable
Enable
OK, RING, NO CARRIER, ERROR,
NODIALTONE, BUSY, CONNECT ,
DELAYED, BLACKLISTED, REORDER,
WARBLE, CALL WAITING DETECTED
X5
Enable
Enable
OK, RING, NO CARRIER, ERROR,
NODIALTONE, BUSY, CONNECT ,
RRING, NO BONGTONE, DELAYED,
BLACKLISTED, REORDER, WARBLE, CALL
WAITING DETECTED
User’s Manual
C-5
AT Commands
Dial tone detect
Disabled: The modem dials a call regardless of whether it detects a dial
tone.
Enabled: The modem dials only upon detection of a dial tone, and
disconnects the call if the dial tone is not detected within 10
seconds.
Busy tone detect
Disabled: The modem ignores any busy tones it receives.
Enabled: The modem monitors for busy tones.
Result Codes:
OK
n=0,1,2,3,4,5
ERROR Otherwise
Zn
Recall stored profile
The modem performs a soft reset and restores (recalls) the configuration
profile according to the parameter supplied. If no parameter is specified,
zero is assumed. Either Z0 or Z1 restores the profile.
Result Codes:
OK
n=0,1
ERROR Otherwise
&Cn Data Carrier Detect (DCD) control
Data Carrier Detect is a signal from the modem to the computer indicating
that a carrier signal is being received from a remote modem. DCD normally
turns off when the modem no longer detects the carrier signal.
&C0 The state of the carrier from the remote modem is ignored.
DCD circuit is always on.
&C1 DCD turns on when the remote modem’s carrier signal is
detected, and off when the carrier signal is not detected
(default).
Result Codes:
OK
n=0,1
ERROR Otherwise
&Dn DTR control
This command interprets how the modem responds to the state of the DTR
signal and changes to the DTR signal.
&D0 Ignore. The modem ignores the true status of DTR and treats
it as always on. This should only be used if your
communication software does not provide DTR to the
modem
&D1 If the DTR signal is not detected while in on-line data mode,
the modem enters command mode, issues an OK result
code, and remains connected.
User’s Manual
C-6
AT Commands
&D2
If the DTR signal is not detected while in on-line data mode,
the modem disconnects (default).
&D3 Reset on the on-to-off DTR transition.
Result Codes:
OK
n=0,1,2,3
ERROR Otherwise
&F
Load factory settings
This command loads the configuration stored and programmed at the
factory. This operation replaces all of the command options and the Sregister settings in the active configuration with factory values.
&F
Recall factory setting as active configuration.
&Gn V.22bis guard tone control
This command determines which guard tone, if any, to transmit while
transmitting in the high band (answer mode). This command is only used in
V.22 and V.22bis mode. This option is not used in North America and is for
international use only.
&G0 Guard tone disabled (default).
&G1 Sets guard tone to 550 Hz.
&G2 Sets guard tone to 1800 Hz.
Result Codes:
OK
n=0,1,2
ERROR Otherwise
&Kn Local flow control selection
&K0 Disable flow control.
&K3 Enable CTS/RTS flow control (default).
&K4 Enable XON/XOFF flow control.
Result Codes:
OK
n=0,3,4
ERROR Otherwise
&Pn Select Pulse Dial Make/Break Ratio (WW)
&P0
&P1
&P2
Selects 39% - 61% make/break ratio at 10 pulses per
second.
Selects 33% - 67% make/break ratio at 10 pulses per
second.
Selects 33% - 67% make/break ratio at 20 pulses per
second.
Result Codes:
OK
n=0,1,2
ERROR Otherwise
User’s Manual
C-7
AT Commands
&Tn Self-test commands
These tests can help to isolate problems if you experience periodic data
loss or random errors.
&T0 Abort. Stops any test in progress.
&T1 Local analog loop. This test verifies modem operation, as
well as the connection between the modem and computer.
Any data entered at the local DTE is modulated, then
demodulated, and returned to the local DTE. To work
properly, the modem must be off-line.
Result Codes:
OK
n=0
CONNECT n=1
ERROR
Otherwise
&V
Display Current Configuration
This command displays the current configuration of the modem. If
nonvolatile memory is supported the stored profiles are displayed as well.
&V
View profiles.
&W
Store current configuration
Saves the current (active) configuration (profile), including S-Registers.
The current configuration comprises a list of storable parameters illustrated
in the &V command. These settings are restored to the active configuration
upon receiving a Zn command or at power up. Refer to the &V command.
&W Stores the current configuration.
&Zn=x
Store telephone number
This command is used to store up to four dialing strings in the modem’s
nonvolatile memory for later dialing. The format for the command is
&Zn=“stored number” where n is the location 0-3 to which the number
should be written. The dial string may contain up to 34 characters. The
ATDS=n command dials using the string stored in location n.
Result Codes:
OK
n=0, 1, 2, 3
ERROR Otherwise
\Nn
Error control mode selection
This command determines the type of error control used by the modem
when sending or receiving data.
\N0
Buffer mode. No error control.
\N1
Direct mode.
\N2
MNP or disconnect mode. The modem attempts to connect
using MNP2-4 error control procedures. If this fails, the
modem disconnects.
This is also known as MNP reliable mode.
User’s Manual
C-8
AT Commands
\N3
V.42, MNP, or buffered (default).
The modem attempts to connect in V.42 error control mode.
If this fails, it attempts to connect in MNP mode. If this fails, it
connects in buffer mode and continues operation. This is
also known as V.42/MNP auto reliable mode (same as &Q5).
\N4
V.42 or disconnect. The modem attempts to connect in V.42
error control mode. If this fails, the modem disconnects.
\N5
V.42. MNP or buffered (same as \N3).
\N7
V.42. MNP or buffered (same as \N3).
Result Codes:
OK
n=0,1,2,3,4,5,7
ERROR Otherwise
\Qn
Local flow control selection
\Q0
Disable flow control.
\Q1
XON/XOFF software flow control.
\Q3
CTS/RTS to DTE (default).
Result Codes:
OK
n=0,1,3
ERROR Otherwise
\Vn
Protocol result code
\V0
\V1
Disable protocol result code appended to DCE speed.
Enable protocol result code appended to DCE speed
(default).
Result Codes:
OK
n=0,1
ERROR Otherwise
%B
View numbers in blacklist
If blacklisting is in effect, this command displays the numbers for which the
last call attempted in the past two hours failed. The ERROR result code
appears in regions that do not require blacklisting.
%Cn
Data compression control
This command determines the operation of V.42bis and MNP class 5 data
compression. On-line changes do not take effect until a disconnect occurs
first.
%C0 V.42bis/MNP 5 disabled. No data compression.
%C3 V.42bis/MNP 5 enabled. Data compression enabled
(default).
Result Codes:
OK
n=0,3
ERROR Otherwise
User’s Manual
C-9
Appendix D
S-registers
This information is applicable to the models equipped with a built-in
modem.
S-registers contain the settings that determine how a number of functions
of the internal modem operate. For example, how many times to let the
telephone ring before the modem answers and how long to wait before it
hangs up if a connection fails. You can also customize certain AT
commands such as the escape sequence and command line termination.
The contents of the registers are changed automatically when you modify
corresponding settings in your communication software. If you choose,
however, you can display and edit the contents of the registers manually
when the modem is in command mode. If the value is out of the acceptable
range, then an error is generated.
This chapter describes the settings for each S-register.
S-register values
The format for displaying the value of an S-register is:
ATSn?
where n is the register number. After you type in the register press ENTER.
The format for modifying the value of an S-register is:
ATSn=r
where n is the register number, and r is the new register value. After you
type in the register and its new value press ENTER.
Some registers vary from one country/region to another.
User’s Manual
D-1
S-registers
S0
Auto answer ring number
This register determines the number of rings the modem will count
before automatically answering a call. Enter 0 (zero) if you do not
want the modem to automatically answer at all. When disabled,
the modem can only answer with an ATA command.
Range:0-255
Default:0
Units:rings
S1
Ring counter
This register is read only. The value of S1 is incremented with
each ring. If no ring occurs over a six-second interval, this register
is cleared.
Range:0-225
Default:0
Units:rings
S2
AT escape character (user defined)
This register determines the ASCII values used for an escape
sequence. The default is the + character. The escape sequence
allows the modem to exit data mode and enter command mode
when on-line. Values greater than 127 disable the escape
sequence.
Range:0-255, ASCII decimal
Default:43
Units:ASCII
S3
Command line termination character (user defined)
This register determines the ASCII values as the carriage return
character. This character is used to end command lines and result
codes.
Range:0-127, ASCII decimal
Default:13 (carriage return)
Units:ASCII
S4
Response formatting character (user defined)
This register determines the ASCII value used as the line feed
character. The modem uses a line feed character in command
mode when it responds to the computer.
Range:0-127, ASCII decimal
Default:10 (line feed)
Units:ASCII
User’s Manual
D-2
S-registers
S5
Command line editing character (user defined)
This register sets the character recognized as a backspace and
pertains to asynchronous only. The modem will not recognize the
backspace character if it is set to a value that is greater than 32
ASCII. This character can be used to edit a command line. When
the echo command is enabled, the modem echoes back to the
local DTE the backspace character, an ASCII space character,
and a second backspace character. This means a total of three
characters are transmitted each time the modem processes the
backspace character.
Range:0-127, ASCII decimal
Default:8 (backspace)
Units:ASCII
S6
Wait before dialing
This register sets the length of time, in seconds, that the modem
must wait (pause) after going off-hook before dialing the first digit
of the telephone number. The modem always pauses for a
minimum of two seconds, even if the value of S6 is less that two
seconds. The wait for dial tone call progress feature (W dial
modifier in the dial string) will override the value in register S6.
This operation, however, may be affected by some ATX options
according to country/region restrictions. In some countries/regions,
S6 will set dial tone detect time.
Range:3-255
Default:3
Units:seconds
S7
Connection completion time-out
This register sets the time, in seconds, that the modem must wait
before hanging up because carrier is not detected. The timer is
started when the modem finishes dialing (originate), or goes offhook (answer). In originate mode, the timer is reset upon detection
of an answer tone if allowed by county restriction. The timer also
specifies the wait for silence time for the @ dial modifier in
seconds. S7 is not associated with the W dial modifier.
Range:1-255
Default:50
Units:seconds
User’s Manual
D-3
S-registers
S8
Comma pause time
This register sets the time, in seconds, that the modem must
pause when it encounters a comma (,) in the dial command string.
In some countries/regions, S8 will set both wait before dialing and
comma pause time.
Range:0-255
Default:2
Units:seconds
S11
DTMF dialing speed
This register determines the dialing speed which is prefixed for
each country/region.
Range:50-255
Default:95
Units:.001 seconds
S12
Escape guard time
This register sets the value (in 20 millisecond increments) for the
required pause after the escape sequence.
Range:0-255
Default:50
Units:.02 seconds
S37
User’s Manual
Dial line rate
S37 = 0 (default)
maximum modem speed
S37 = 1
reserved
S37 = 2
1200/75 bps
S37 = 3
300 bps
S37 = 4
reserved
S37 = 5
1200 bps
S37 = 6
2400 bps
S37 = 7
4800 bps
S37 = 8
7200 bps
S37 = 9
9600 bps
D-4
S-registers
S37 = 10
12000 bps
S37 = 11
14400 bps
S37 = 12
16800 bps
S37 = 13
19200 bps
S37 = 14
21600 bps
S37 = 15
24000 bps
S37 = 16
26400 bps
S37 = 17
28800 bps
S37 = 18
31200 bps
S37 = 19
33600 bps
AT command set result codes
The following table shows the result codes.
The result code summary
Result Code
Numeric
OK
Command executed
CONNECT
Modem connected to line
RING
A ring signal has been
detected
NO CARRIER
Modem lost carrier signal, or
does not detect carrier
signal, or does not detect
answer tone
Invalid command
Connection at 1200 bps
NO DIAL TONE
No dial tone detected
BUSY
Busy signal detected
No quiet answer
10
Connection at 2400 bps
ERROR
CONNECT 1200 EC
*1
NO ANSWER
CONNECT 2400
User’s Manual
Description
EC*
D-5
S-registers
CONNECT 4800 EC*
11
Connection at 4800 bps
*1
12
Connection at 9600 bps
EC*
13
Connection at 14400 bps
*1
CONNECT 9600 EC
CONNECT 14400
14
Connection at 19200 bps
*1
24
Connection at 7200 bps
EC*
25
Connection at 12000 bps
*1
86
Connection at 16800 bps
CONNECT 19200 EC
CONNECT 7200 EC
CONNECT 12000
CONNECT 16800 EC
CONNECT 300
EC*
40
Connection at 300 bps
CONNECT 21600 EC
*1
55
Connection at 21600 bps
CONNECT 24000 EC
*1
56
Connection at 24000 bps
EC*
57
Connection at 26400 bps
CONNECT 28800 EC
*1
58
Connection at 28800 bps
CONNECT 31200 EC
*1
59
Connection at 31200 bps
EC*
60
Connection at 33600 bps
88
Delay is in effect for the
dialed number
89
Dialed number is blacklisted
90
Blacklist is full
CONNECT 26400
CONNECT 33600
DELAYED
*2
BLACKLISTED*2
BLACKLIST FULL
*2
*1: EC only appears when the Extended Result Codes configuration option
is enabled. EC is replaced by one of the following symbols, depending
upon the error control method used:
V.42bis - V.42 error control and V.42bis data compression.
V.42 - V.42 error control only.
MNP 5 - MNP class 4 error control and MNP class 5 data
compression.
MNP 4 - MNP class 4 error control only.
NoEC - No error control protocol.
*2: In some countries/regions, these result codes may not appear.
User’s Manual
D-6
Appendix E
V.90
This information is applicable to the models equipped with a built-in
modem.
The TOSHIBA internal modem uses V.90 technology. The modem is
capable of downstream speeds of 56kbps (kilobits per second) when
connected to an Internet service provider that supports V.90. As with any
modem, the actual throughput (speed of data transfer) depends on analog
telephone line conditions, which can vary considerably. Therefore, many
users will experience throughput in the range of 28-50kbps under normal
telephone line conditions. Upstream data flows at the V.34 rate.
V.90 rates can be achieved only when one V.90-capable host modem is
connected to another. The TOSHIBA Internal modem will select
automatically V.34 if the remote modem lacks V.90 capability or if a
combination of network and/or phone line conditions prevent V.90
connection.
V.90 mode
User’s Manual
Function
Transmission speed
Data V.90
From 56kbps (maximum) to 28kbps
(minimum)
Reception only
E-1
V.90
Table E-1 Result codes for a V.90 connection
User’s Manual
No.
Result code
Description
70
CONNECT 32000 EC*
Connection at 32000 bps
72
CONNECT 36000 EC*
Connection at 36000 bps
74
CONNECT 40000 EC*
Connection at 40000 bps
76
CONNECT 44000 EC*
Connection at 44000 bps
78
CONNECT 48000 EC*
Connection at 48000 bps
80
CONNECT 52000 EC*
Connection at 52000 bps
82
CONNECT 56000 EC*
Connection at 56000 bps
100
CONNECT 28000 EC*
Connection at 28000 bps
101
CONNECT 29333 EC*
Connection at 29333 bps
102
CONNECT 30666 EC*
Connection at 30666 bps
103
CONNECT 33333 EC*
Connection at 33333 bps
104
CONNECT 34666 EC*
Connection at 34666 bps
105
CONNECT 37333 EC*
Connection at 37333 bps
106
CONNECT 38666 EC*
Connection at 38666 bps
107
CONNECT 41333 EC*
Connection at 41333 bps
108
CONNECT 42666 EC*
Connection at 42666 bps
109
CONNECT 45333 EC*
Connection at 45333 bps
110
CONNECT 46666 EC*
Connection at 46666 bps
111
CONNECT 49333 EC*
Connection at 49333 bps
112
CONNECT 50666 EC*
Connection at 50666 bps
113
CONNECT 53333 EC*
Connection at 53333 bps
114
CONNECT 54666 EC*
Connection at 54666 bps
E-2
V.90
* EC stands for the Error Control method, which appears only when the
extended result codes configuration option is enabled. EC is replaced by
one of the following symbols, depending on the error control method
used.
V42bis
V.42 error control and V.42bis data compression
V42
V.42 error control only
NoEC
No error control protocol
AT Command
User’s Manual
-V90=*
V.90 Dial Line Rate
-V90 sets the maximum V.90 downstream that the
modem attempts to connect.
-V90=0
V.90 disabled
-V90=1
V.90 enabled: automatic speed selection maximum modem speed (default)
E-3
Appendix F
Wireless LAN
This appendix is intended to help you get your Wireless LAN network up
and running, with a minimum of parameters.
Card Specifications
Form Factor
Compatibility
Network Operating
System
Media Access
Protocol
User’s Manual
PCI Express Mini Card
■ IEEE 802.11 Standard for Wireless LANS
■ Wi-Fi (Wireless Fidelity) certified by the Wi-Fi
Alliance. The ‘Wi-Fi CERTIFIED’ logo is a
certification mark of the Wi-Fi Alliance.
■ Microsoft Windows® Networking
■ CSMA/CA (Collision Avoidance) with
Acknowledgment (ACK)
F-1
Wireless LAN
Radio Characteristics
Radio Characteristics of Wireless LAN Cards may vary according to:
■ Country/region where the product was purchased
■ Type of product
Wireless communication is often subject to local radio regulations.
Although Wireless LAN wireless networking products have been designed
for operation in the license-free 2.4GHz and 5GHz band, local radio
regulations may impose a number of limitations to the use of wireless
communication equipment.
Refer to the “Information sheet” for regulatory information that may apply in
your country/region.
R-F Frequency
■ Band 5GHz (5150-5850 MHz) (Revision A, n
Draft 2.0)
■ Band 2.4GHz (2400-2483.5 MHz) (Revision
B, G, n Draft 2.0)
The range of the wireless signal is related to the transmit rate of the
wireless communication. Communications at lower transmit range may
travel larger distances.
■ The range of your wireless devices can be affected when the antennas
are placed near metal surfaces and solid high-density materials.
■ Range is also impacted due to "obstacles" in the signal path of the radio
that may either absorb or reflect the radio signal.
User’s Manual
F-2
Wireless LAN
Supported Frequency Sub-bands
Subject to the radio regulations that apply in the countries/regions, your
Wireless LAN card may support a different set of 5 GHz/2.4 GHz channels.
Consult your Authorized Wireless LAN or TOSHIBA Sales office for
information about the radio regulations that apply in the countries/regions.
Wireless IEEE 802.11 Channels Sets (Revision B, G and n Draft 2.0)
Frequency Range
Channel ID
2400-2483.5 MHz
2412
2417
2422
2427
2432
2437
2442
2447
2452
10
2457*1
11
2462
12
2467*2
13
2472*2
*1 Factory-set default channels
*2 Refer to the sheet Approved Countries/Regions for use for the
countries/regions that in which these channels can be used. When
installing Wireless LAN cards, the channel configuration is managed as
follows:
■ For wireless clients that operate in a Wireless LAN Infrastructure, the
Wireless LAN card will automatically start operation at the channel
identified by the Wireless LAN Access Point. When roaming between
different access points the station can dynamically switch to another
channel if required.
■ For Wireless LAN cards installed in wireless clients that operating in a
peer-to-peer mode, the card will use the default channel 10.
User’s Manual
F-3
Wireless LAN
■ In a Wireless LAN Access Point, the Wireless LAN card will use the
factory-set default channel (printed in bold), unless the LAN
Administrator selected a different channel when configuring the
Wireless LAN Access Point device.
Wireless IEEE 802.11 Channels Sets (Revision A and n Draft 2.0)
User’s Manual
Frequency Range
Channel ID
5150-5850 MHz
34
5170*2
36
5180*2
38
5190*2
40
5200*2
42
5210*2
44
5220*2
46
5230*2
48
5240*2
52
5260*2
56
5280*2
60
5300*2
64
5320*2
100
5500*2
104
5520*2
108
5540*2
112
5560*2
116
5580*2
120
5600*2
124
5620*2
128
5640*2
132
5660*2
136
5680*2
140
5700*2
149
5745*2
153
5765*2
157
5785*2
F-4
Wireless LAN
161
5805*2
165
5825*2
*1 Factory-set default channels
*2 Refer to the sheet Approved Countries/Regions for use for the
countries/regions that in which these channels can be used. When
installing Wireless LAN cards, the channel configuration is managed as
follows:
■ For wireless clients that operate in a Wireless LAN Infrastructure, the
Wireless LAN card will automatically start operation at the channel
identified by the Wireless LAN Access Point. When roaming between
different access points the station can dynamically switch to another
channel if required.
■ For Wireless LAN cards installed in wireless clients that operating in a
peer-to-peer mode, the card will use the default channel 10.
■ In a Wireless LAN Access Point, the Wireless LAN card will use the
factory-set default channel (printed in bold), unless the LAN
Administrator selected a different channel when configuring the
Wireless LAN Access Point device.
User’s Manual
F-5
Appendix G
Intel® Matrix Storage Manager
If you are installing the operating system on a computer system which is
configured for AHCI mode, you must pre-install the Intel® Matrix Storage
Manager driver using the F6 installation method described in the Manually
Setting up Windows (Windows Vista®) or Manually Setting up Windows
Manually (Windows XP) sections.
This model does not support RAID functionality.
If you have already installed the operating system on a system configured
for AHCI mode, double-click iata_cd.exe and respond to each of the
prompts in order to install the Intel® Matrix Storage Manager.
All installed files (readme.txt, help, etc.) are copied to the following path by
default:
\Program Files\Intel\Intel Matrix Storage
Manager
Manually Setting up Windows (Windows Vista®)
Use the following procedures to manually set up your Windows operating
system.
Before Setting up Windows
Before setting up Windows, create an Intel® Matrix Storage Manager Disk.
Creating an Intel® Matrix Storage Manager Disk
1. Connect the USB floppy diskette drive and insert a floppy diskette.
2. Copy all of the files located in the "C:\TOSAPINS\Intel Matrix Storage
Manager\Inf setup" folder to the floppy diskette.
User’s Manual
G-1
Intel® Matrix Storage Manager
Windows Setup Procedure
1. Connect the USB floppy diskette drive and insert the above disk.
2. Insert the Windows Setup DVD into the optical disc drive and boot the
computer from the DVD. The Windows Setup program will start.
3. Carry out the setup process by following the instructions displayed on
the setup screen. When the message "Which type of
installation do you want?" appears, select Custom
(advanced).
4. When the message "Where do you want to install Windows?"
appears, click Load Driver.
5. Click the Browse button and then select Floppy Disk Drive(A:).
6. Select "Intel(R) 82801GBM SATA AHCI Controller" from the
list that appear, and click Next.
7. When the message "Where do you want to install Windows?"
appears again, select the destination drive and then click Next.
8. Continue to follow the onscreen instructions to finish installing windows.
■ Please use only hard disk drives that the computer supports. The
system may not function correctly if unsupported hard disk drives are
used.
■ Errors may occur in the following situations:
■ When using applications which directly access the hardware and
read from or write to the hard disk drive.
■ When using another operating system, such as Linux, to run
application that read from or right to the hard disk drive.
Manually Setting up Windows Manually (Windows XP)
Use the following procedures to manually set up your Windows operating
system.
Before Setting up Windows
Before setting up Windows, create an Intel® Matrix Storage Manager Disk.
Creating the Intel® Matrix Storage Manager Disk
1. Connect the USB floppy diskette drive and insert a floppy diskette.
2. Copy all of the files located in the "C:\TOSAPINS\Intel Matrix
Storage Manager\Inf setup" folder to the floppy diskette.
Windows Setup Procedure
1. Connect the USB floppy diskette drive and insert the disk created in the
previous step.
2. Insert the Windows Setup CD-ROM into the optical disc drive and boot
the computer up from the CD. The Windows Setup program will start.
User’s Manual
G-2
Intel® Matrix Storage Manager
3. When the message "Press F6 if you need to install a
third party SCSI or RAID driver" appears on the screen,
press the F6 key.
4. When the message "Setup will load support for the
following mass storage device(s):" appears on the screen,
press the S key.
5. Select "Intel(R) 82801GBM SATA AHCI Controller" and press
the ENTER key.
6. Follow the onscreen instructions to continue setting up windows.
■ Please use only hard disk drives that the computer supports. The
system may not function correctly if unsupported hard disk drives are
used.
■ Errors may occur in the following situations:
■ When using applications which directly access the hardware and
read from or write to the hard disk drive.
■ When using another operating system, such as Linux, to run
application that read from or right to the hard disk drive.
How to install Intel® Matrix Storage Manager on Windows XP
or Windows Vista®:
To install this software on Windows XP or Windows Vista® logon with an
account that has administrator user privileges.
1. Double-click the Intel® Matrix Storage Manager setup file
("iata_cd.exe") located in the
C:\TOSAPINS\Intel Matrix Storage Manager folder.
2. Follow the onscreen installation instructions.
3. Restart the system.
User’s Manual
G-3
Appendix H
Bluetooth wireless technology
Interoperability
Bluetooth™ Adaptor from TOSHIBA are designed to be interoperable with
any product with Bluetooth wireless technology that is based on Frequency
Hopping Spread Spectrum (FHSS) radio technology, and is compliant to:
■ Bluetooth Specification Ver. 2.0+EDR, as defined and approved by The
Bluetooth Special Interest Group.
■ Logo certification with Bluetooth wireless technology as defined by The
Bluetooth Special interest Group.
User’s Manual
H-1
Bluetooth wireless technology Interoperability
■ Bluetooth wireless technology is a new innovative technology, and
TOSHIBA has not confirmed compatibility of its Bluetooth™ products
with all computers and/or equipment using Bluetooth wireless
technology other than TOSHIBA portable computers.
Always use Bluetooth™ Adaptor from TOSHIBA in order to enable
wireless networks over two or more (up to a total of seven) TOSHIBA
portable computers using these cards. Please contact TOSHIBA PC
product support on Web site
http://www.toshiba-europe.com/computers/tnt/bluetooth.htm in Europe
or
http://www.pc.support.global.toshiba.com in the United States for more
information.
■ When you use Bluetooth™ Adaptor from TOSHIBA close to 2.4 GHz
Wireless LAN devices, Bluetooth transmissions might slow down or
cause errors. If you detect certain interference while you use
Bluetooth™ Adaptor from TOSHIBA, always change the frequency,
move your computer to the area outside of the interference range of 2.4
GHz Wireless LAN devices (40 meters/43.74 yards or more) or stop
transmitting from your computer. Please contact TOSHIBA PC product
support on Web site
http://www.toshiba-europe.com/computers/tnt/bluetooth.htm in Europe
or
http://www.pc.support.global.toshiba.com in the United States for more
information.
■ Bluetooth™ and Wireless LAN devices operate within the same radio
frequency range and may interfere with one another. If you use
Bluetooth™ and Wireless LAN devices simultaneously, you may
occasionally experience a less than optimal network performance or
even lose your network connection.
If you should experience any such problem, immediately turn off either
one of your Bluetooth™ or Wireless LAN.
Please contact TOSHIBA PC product support on web site
http://www.toshiba-europe.com/computers/tnt/bluetooth.htm in Europe
or
http://www.pc.support.global.toshiba.com in the United States for more
information.
User’s Manual
H-2
Bluetooth wireless technology Interoperability
Bluetooth wireless technology and your Health
The products with Bluetooth wireless technology, like other radio devices,
emit radio frequency electromagnetic energy. The level of energy emitted
by devices with Bluetooth wireless technology however is far much less
than the electromagnetic energy emitted by wireless devices like for
example mobile phones.
Because products with Bluetooth wireless technology operate within the
guidelines found in radio frequency safety standards and
recommendations, TOSHIBA believes Bluetooth wireless technology is
safe for use by consumers. These standards and recommendations reflect
the consensus of the scientific community and result from deliberations of
panels and committees of scientists who continually review and interpret
the extensive research literature.
In some situations or environments, the use of Bluetooth wireless
technology may be restricted by the proprietor of the building or responsible
representatives of the organization. These situations may for example
include:
■ Using the equipment with Bluetooth wireless technology on board of
airplanes, or
■ In any other environment where the risk of interference to other devices
or services is perceived or identified as harmful.
If you are uncertain of the policy that applies on the use of wireless devices
in a specific organization or environment (e.g. airports), you are
encouraged to ask for authorization to use the device with Bluetooth
wireless technology prior to turning on the equipment.
Regulatory statements
General
This product complies with any mandatory product specification in any
country/region where the product is sold. In addition, the product complies
with the following.
European Union (EU) and EFTA
This equipment complies with the R&TTE directive 1999/5/EC and has
been provided with the CE mark accordingly.
Canada - Industry Canada (IC)
This device complies with RSS 210 of Industry Canada.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not
cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference,
including interference that may cause undesired operation of this device.
User’s Manual
H-3
Bluetooth wireless technology Interoperability
L ‘ utilisation de ce dispositif est autorisée seulement aux conditions
suivantes: (1) il ne doit pas produire de brouillage et (2) l’ utilisateur du
dispositif doit étre prét à accepter tout brouillage radioélectrique reçu,
même si ce brouillage est susceptible de compromettre le fonctionnement
du dispositif.
The term “IC” before the equipment certification number only signifies that
the Industry Canada technical specifications were met.
USA-Federal Communications Commission (FCC)
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a
Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of FCC Rules. These limits are
designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a
residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate
radio frequency energy. If not installed and used in accordance with the
instructions, it may cause harmful interference to radio communications.
However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a
particular installation.
If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television
reception, which can be determined by tuning the equipment off and on, the
user is encouraged to try and correct the interference by one or more of the
following measures:
■ Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna
■ Increase the distance between the equipment and the receiver.
■ Connect the equipment to outlet on a circuit different from that to which
the receiver is connected.
■ Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.
TOSHIBA is not responsible for any radio or television interference caused
by unauthorized modification of the devices included with this Bluetooth™
Adaptor from TOSHIBA, or the substitution or attachment of connecting
cables and equipment other than specified by TOSHIBA.
The correction of interference caused by such unauthorized modification,
substitution or attachment will be the responsibility of the user.
User’s Manual
H-4
Bluetooth wireless technology Interoperability
Caution: Exposure to Radio Frequency Radiation
The radiated output power of the Bluetooth™ Adaptor from TOSHIBA is far
below the FCC radio frequency exposure limits. Nevertheless, the
Bluetooth™ Adaptor from TOSHIBA shall be used in such a manner that the
potential for human contact during normal operation is minimized. The
antenna(s) used in this device are located beneath the palm rest, and this
device has been tested as a portable device as defined in Section 2.1093
of FCC rules. In addition, Bluetooth has been tested with Wireless LAN
transceiver for co-location requirements. This device and its antenna(s)
must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna
or transmitter. The installer of this radio equipment must ensure that the
antenna is located or pointed such that it does not emit RF field in excess of
Health Canada limits for the general population; consult Safety Code 6,
obtainable from Health Canada's website www.hc-sc.gc.ca/rpb.
Taiwan
User’s Manual
Article 12
Without permission granted by the DGT or NCC, any
company, enterprise, or user is not allowed to change
frequency, enhance transmitting power or alter original
characteristic as well as performance to an approved low
power radio-frequency devices.
Article 14
The low power radio-frequency devices shall not influence
aircraft security and interfere legal communications; If found,
the user shall cease operating immediately until no
interference is achieved.
The said legal communications means radio communications
is operated in compliance with the Telecommunications Act.
The low power radio-frequency devices must be susceptible
with the interference from legal communications or ISM radio
wave radiated devices.
H-5
Bluetooth wireless technology Interoperability
Using Bluetooth™ Adaptor from TOSHIBA equipment in
Japan
In Japan, the frequency bandwidth of 2,400 - 2,483.5 MHz for second
generation low-power data communication systems such as this equipment
overlaps that of mobile object identification systems (premises radio station
and specified low-power radio station).
1. Sticker
Please put the following sticker on computer incorporating this product.
The frequency bandwidth of this equipment may operate
within the same range as industrial devices, scientific
devices, medical devices, microwave ovens, licensed radio
stations and non-licensed specified low-power radio stations
for mobile object identification systems (RFID) used in
factory production lines (Other Radio Stations).
1. Before using this equipment, ensure that it does not
interfere with any of the equipment listed above.
2. If this equipment causes RF interference to other radio
stations, promptly change the frequency being used,
change the location of use, or turn off the source of
emissions.
3. Contact TOSHIBA Direct PC if you have problems with
interference caused by this product to Other Radio Stations.
2. Indication
The indication shown below appears on this equipment.
(1) 2.4 : This equipment uses a frequency of 2.4 GHz.
(2) FH : This equipment uses FH-SS modulation.
(3) 1: The interference range of this equipment is less than 10 m.
(4)
User’s Manual
This equipment uses a frequency bandwidth from
2,400 MHz to 2,483.5 MHz.
It is impossible to avoid the band of mobile object
identification systems.
H-6
Bluetooth wireless technology Interoperability
3. TOSHIBA Direct PC
Monday - Friday
: 10:00-17:00
Toll Free Tel
: 0120-15-1048
Direct Dial
: 03-3457-4850
FAX
: 03-3457-4868
Device Authorization
This device obtains the Technical Conditions Compliance Approval, and it
belongs to the device class of radio equipment of low-power data
communication system radio station stipulated in the Telecommunications
Business Law.
The Name of the radio equipment: EYTFXCS
JAPAN APPROVALS INSTITUTE FOR TELECOMMUNICATIONS
EQUIPMENT
Approval Number: D07-0040001
The following restrictions apply:
Do not disassemble or modify the device.
Do not install the embedded wireless module into other device.
User’s Manual
H-7
Appendix I
AC Power Cord and Connectors
The power cord’s AC input plug must be compatible with the various
international AC power outlets and the cord must meet the standards for
the country/region in which it is used. All cords must meet the following
specifications:
Length:
Minimum 1.7 meters
Wire size:
Minimum 0.75 mm2
Current rating:
Minimum 2.5 amperes
Voltage rating:
125 or 250 VAC
(depending on country/region’s power standards)
Certification agencies
U.S. and Canada: UL listed and CSA certified
No. 18 AWG, Type SVT or SPT-2
Australia:
AS
Japan:
DENANHO
Europe:
User’s Manual
Austria:
OVE
Italy:
IMQ
Belgium:
CEBEC
The Netherlands:
KEMA
Denmark:
DEMKO
Norway:
NEMKO
I-1
AC Power Cord and Connectors
Finland:
FIMKO
Sweden:
SEMKO
France:
LCIE
Switzerland:
SEV
Germany:
VDE
United Kingdom:
BSI
In Europe, two conductors power cord must be VDE type, H05VVH2-F or
H03VVH2-F and for three conductors power cord must be VDE type,
H05VV-F.
For the United States and Canada, two pin plug configuration must be a 215P (250V) or 1-15P (125V) and three pin plug configuration must be 615P (250V) or 5-15P (125V) as designated in the U.S. National Electrical
code handbook and the Canadian Electrical Code Part II.
The following illustrations show the plug shapes for the U.S.A. and Canada,
the United Kingdom, Australia and Europe.
USA
UL approved
Australia
AS approved
United Kingdom
BS approved
Europe
Approved by the
appropriate agency
Canada
CSA approved
User’s Manual
I-2
Appendix J
TOSHIBA Anti-theft Protection Timer
This feature allows you to set up a timer-activated BIOS password that will
prevent unauthorised system access in the event of theft.
When the time limit is exceeded, you are required to provide the Password
or fingerprint authentication for the BIOS and Hard Disk Drive to gain
access to the system.
To set permissions and limits for the TOSHIBA Anti-theft Protection Timer
please use the TOSHIBA Password Utility.
The settings can only be activated or modified by a user with supervisor
authority. If the supervisor password is not set, click on the Set button in
Supervisor Password from the supervisor tab in TOSHIBA Password
Utility and set the password on the dialog screen that appears.
Then, click on the Set button in TOSHIBA Anti-theft Protection Timer.
Take the following action if the set limit is exceeded.
■ If the Supervisor Password is registered but the User Password is not,
enter the Supervisor Password to boot up the computer.
■ If both the Supervisor Password and the User Password are registered,
enter either the Supervisor Password, the User Password or the
fingerprint authentication to boot up the computer.
■ The limit counts the number of days from the last time Windows is
logged on till the next time the computer is booted up. The range can
be set from 1 to 28 days.
■ Authentication is required if the computer’s clock is significantly
modified.
■ If the Supervisor Password is deleted, this function becomes disabled.
User’s Manual
J-1
Appendix K
Legal Footnotes
This chapter states the Legal Footnotes information applicable to TOSHIBA
computers. In the text in this manual, *XX is used to show which Legal
Footnotes description is related to TOSHIBA computers.
Description(s) related to this computer are marked with a blue *XX in this
manual. Clicking on *XX will display the related description.
Non-applicable Icons*1
Certain computer chassis are designed to accommodate all possible
configurations for an entire product series. Therefore, please be aware that
your selected model may not have all the features and specifications
corresponding to all of the icons or switches shown on the computer
chassis.
CPU*2
Central Processing Unit ("CPU") Performance Legal Footnotes.
CPU performance in your computer product may vary from specifications
under the following conditions:
■ use of certain external peripheral products
■ use if battery power instead of AC power
■ use of certain multimedia, computer generated graphics or video
applications
■ use of standard telephone lines or low speed network connections
■ use of complex modeling software, such as high end computer aided
design applications
■ use of several applications or functionalities simultaneously
■ use of computer in areas with low air pressure (high altitude >1,000
meters or >3,280 feet above sea level)
User’s Manual
K-1
Legal Footnotes
■ use of computer at temperatures outside the range of 5°C to 30°C
(41°F to 86°F) or >25°C (77°F) at high altitude (all temperature
references are approximate and may vary depending on the specific
computer model - please refer to your computer documentation or visit
the Toshiba website at www.pcsupport.toshiba.com for details).
CPU performance may also vary from specifications due to design
configuration.
Under some conditions, your computer product may automatically shutdown. This is a normal protective feature designed to reduce the risk of lost
data or damage to the product when used outside recommended
conditions. To avoid risk of lost data, always make back-up copies of data
by periodically storing it on an external storage medium. For optimum
performance, use your computer product only under recommended
conditions. Read additional restrictions under "Environmental Conditions"
in your computer documentation.
Contact Toshiba Technical Service and Support for more information.
64-Bit Computing
64-bit processors are designed to take advantage of 32 and 64 bit
computing.
64-bit computing requires that the following hardware and software
requirements are met:
■ 64-bit Operating System
■ 64-bit CPU, Chipset and BIOS (Basic Input/Output System)
■ 64-bit Device drivers
■ 64-bit applications
Certain device drivers and/or applications may not be compatible with a 64bit CPU and therefore may not function properly. A 32-bit version of the
operating system is preinstalled on your computer unless explicitly stated
that the operating system is 64-bit.
Memory (Main System)*3
Part of the main system memory may be used by the graphics system for
graphics performance and therefore reduce the amount of main system
memory available for other computing activities. The amount of main
system memory allocated to support graphics may vary depending on the
graphics system, applications utilized, system memory size and other
factors. For computer's configured with 4 GB of system memory, the full
system memory space for computing activities will be considerably less
and will vary by model and system configuration.
User’s Manual
K-2
Legal Footnotes
Battery Life*4
Battery life may vary considerably depending on product model,
configuration, applications, power management settings and features
utilized, as well as the natural performance variations produced by the
design of individual components. Published battery life numbers are
achieved on select models and configurations tested by Toshiba at the time
of publication. Recharge time varies depending on usage. Battery may not
charge while computer is consuming full power.
After going through many charge and discharge cycles, the battery will lose
its ability to perform at maximum capacity and will need to be replaced.
This is a normal phenomenon for all batteries. To purchase a new battery
pack, see the accessories information that is shipped with your computer.
Hard Disk Drive (HDD) Capacity*5
1 Gigabyte (GB) means 109 = 1,000,000,000 bytes using powers of 10. The
computer operating system, however, reports storage capacity using
powers of 2 for the definition of 1 GB = 230 = 1,073,741,824 bytes, and
therefore shows less storage capacity. Available storage capacity will also
be less if the product includes one or more pre-installed operating systems,
such as Microsoft Operating System and/or pre-installed software
applications, or media content. Actual formatted capacity may vary.
LCD*6
Over a period of time, and depending on the usage of the computer, the
brightness of the LCD screen will deteriorate. This is an intrinsic
characteristic of LCD technology.
Maximum brightness is only available when operating in AC power mode.
Screen will dim when the computer is operated on battery power and you
may not be able to increase the brightness of the screen.
Graphics Processor Unit ("GPU")*7
Graphics processor unit ("GPU") performance may vary depending on
product model, design configuration, applications, power management
settings and features utilized. GPU performance is only optimized when
operating in AC power mode and may decrease considerably when
operating in battery power mode.
Total Available Graphics Memory is the total of, as applicable, Dedicated
Video Memory, System Video Memory and Shared System Memory.
Shared System Memory will vary depending on system memory size and
other factors.
User’s Manual
K-3
Legal Footnotes
Wireless LAN*8
The transmission speed over the wireless LAN and the distance over which
wireless LAN can reach may vary depending on surrounding
electromagnetic environment, obstacles, access point design and
configuration, and client design and software/hardware configurations.
The actual transmission speed will be lower than the theoretical maximum
speed.
The wireless AGN (802.11a/g/n) adapter is based on a draft release
version of the IEEE 802.11n specification and; may not be compatible with,
or support all features (e.g., security) of, certain Wi-Fi® equipment.
Copy Protection*9
Applicable copy protection standards included in certain media may
prevent or limit recording or viewing of the media.
Images*10
All images are simulated for purposes of illustration.
User’s Manual
K-4
Glossary
The terms in this glossary cover topics related to this manual. Alternate
naming is included for reference.
Abbreviations
AC: alternating current
ANSI: American National Standards Institute
ASCII: American Standard Code for Information Interchange
BIOS: basic input output system
bps: bits per second
CD: compact disc
CD-ROM: Compact Disc-Read Only Memory
CD-RW: Compact Disc-ReWritable
CMOS: complementary metal-oxide semiconductor
CPU: central processing unit
CRT: cathode ray tube
DC: direct current
DDC: display data channel
DDR: double data rate
DIMM: dual inline memory module
DMA: direct memory access
DOS: disk operating system
DVD: digital versatile disc
DVD-R: Digital Versatile Disc-Recordable
DVD-RAM: Digital Versatile Disc-Random Access Memory
DVD-R (Dual Layer): Digital Versatile Disc Recordable Dual Layer
DVD-ROM: Digital Versatile Disc-Read Only Memory
DVD-RW: Digital Versatile Disc-ReWritable
DVD+R (Double Layer): Digital Versatile Disc Recordable Double Layer
ECP: extended capabilities port
FDD: floppy diskette drive
FIR: fast infrared
GB: gigabyte
HDD: hard disk drive
User’s Manual
Glossary-1
Glossary
IDE: integrated drive electronics
IEEE: Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers
I/O: input/output
IRQ: interrupt request
KB: kilobyte
LCD: liquid crystal display
LED: light emitting diode
LSI: large scale integration
MB: megabyte
PC: personal computer
PCI: peripheral component interconnect
RAM: random access memory
RGB: red, green, and blue
ROM: read only memory
RTC: real time clock
SCSI: small computer system interface
SIO: serial input/output
SDRAM: synchronous dynamic random access memory
TFT: thin-film transistor
UART: universal asynchronous receiver/transmitter
USB: Universal Serial Bus
UXGA: ultra extended graphics array
VGA: video graphics array
VRT: voltage reduction technology
WXGA: wide extended graphics array
XGA: extended graphics array
adaptor: A device that provides an interface between two dissimilar
electronic devices. For example, the AC adaptor modifies the power
from a wall outlet for use by the computer. This term also refers to
the add-in circuit cards that control external devices, such as video
monitors and magnetic tape devices.
allocate: To assign a space or function for a specific task.
alphanumeric: Keyboard characters including letters, numbers and other
symbols, such as punctuation marks or mathematical symbols.
alternating current (AC): Electric current that reverses its direction of flow
at regular intervals.
analog signal: A signal whose characteristics such as amplitude and
frequency vary in proportion to (are an analog of) the value to be
transmitted. Voice communications are analog signals.
User’s Manual
Glossary-2
Glossary
ANSI: American National Standards Institute. An organization established
to adopt and define standards for a variety of technical disciplines.
For example, ANSI defined the ASCII standard and other
information processing requirements.
antistatic: A material used to prevent the buildup of static electricity.
application: A group of programs that together are used for a specific task
such as accounting, financial planning, spreadsheets, word
processing and games.
ASCII: American Standard Code for Information Interchange. ASCII code
is a set of 256 binary codes that represent the most commonly used
letters, numbers, and symbols.
async: Short for asynchronous.
asynchronous: Lacking regular time relationship. As applied to computer
communications, asynchronous refers to the method of transmitting
data that does not require a steady stream of bits to be transmitted
at regular time intervals.
backup: A duplicate copy of files kept as a spare in case the original is
destroyed.
batch file: A file that can be executed from the system prompt containing
a sequence of operating system commands or executable files.
binary: The base two number system composed of zeros and ones (off or
on), used by most digital computers. The right-most digit of a binary
number has a value of 1, the next a value of 2, then 4, 8, 16, and so
on. For example, the binary number 101 has a value of 5. See also
ASCII.
BIOS: Basic Input Output System. The firmware that controls data flow
within the computer. See also firmware.
bit: Derived from "binary digit," the basic unit of information used by the
computer. It is either zero or one. Eight bits is one byte. See also
byte.
board: A circuit board. An internal card containing electronic components,
called chips, which perform a specific function or increase the
capabilities of the system.
boot: Short for bootstrap. A program that starts or restarts the computer.
The program reads instructions from a storage device into the
computer’s memory.
bps: Bits per second. Typically used to describe the data transmission
speed of a modem.
buffer: The portion of the computer’s memory where data is temporarily
stored. Buffers often compensate for differences in the rate of flow
from one device to another.
bus: An interface for transmission of signals, data or electric power.
User’s Manual
Glossary-3
Glossary
byte: The representation of a single character. A sequence of eight bits
treated as a single unit; also the smallest addressable unit within the
system.
cache memory: High speed memory which stores data that increases
processor speed and data transfer rate. When the CPU reads data
from main memory, it stores a copy of this data in cache memory.
The next time the CPU needs that same data, it looks for it in the
cache memory rather than the main memory, which saves time. The
computer has two cache levels. Level one is incorporated into the
processor and level two resides in external memory.
capacity: The amount of data that can be stored on a magnetic storage
device such as a floppy diskette or hard disk drive. It is usually
described in terms of kilobytes (KB), where one KB = 1024 bytes,
megabytes (MB), where one MB = 1024 KB and gigabytes (GB),
where one GB = 1024 MB.
card: Synonym for board. See board.
CardBus: An industry standard bus for 32-bit PC Cards.
CD-ROM: A Compact Disc-Read Only Memory is a high capacity disc that
can be read from but not written to. The CD-ROM drive uses a laser,
rather than magnetic heads, to read data from the disc.
CD-R: A Compact Disc-Recordable disc can be written once and read
many times. See also CD-ROM.
CD-RW: A Compact Disc-ReWritable disc can be rewritten many times.
See also CD-ROM.
character: Any letter, number, punctuation mark, or symbol used by the
computer. Also synonymous with byte.
chassis: The frame containing the computer.
chip: A small semiconductor containing computer logic and circuitry for
processing, memory, input/output functions and controlling other
chips.
CMOS: Complementary Metal-Oxide Semiconductor. An electronic circuit
fabricated on a silicon wafer that requires very little power.
Integrated circuits implemented in CMOS technology can be tightly
packaged and are highly reliable.
cold start: Starting a computer that is currently off (turning on the power).
COM1, COM2, COM3 and COM4: The names assigned to the serial and
communication ports.
commands: Instructions you enter at the terminal keyboard that direct the
actions of the computer or its peripheral devices.
communications: The means by which a computer transmits and
receives data to and from another computer or device. See serial
interface.
User’s Manual
Glossary-4
Glossary
compatibility: 1) The ability of one computer to accept and process data
in the same manner as another computer without modifying the data
or the media upon which it is being transferred.
2) the ability of one device to connect to or communicate with
another system or component.
components: Elements or parts (of a system) which make up the whole
(system).
computer program: A set of instructions written for a computer that
enable it to achieve a desired result.
computer system: A combination of hardware, software, firmware, and
peripheral components assembled to process data into useful
information.
configuration: The specific components in your system (such as the
terminal, printer, and disk drives) and the settings that define how
your system works. You use the HW Setup program to control your
system configuration.
control keys: A key or sequence of keys you enter from the keyboard to
initiate a particular function within a program.
controller: Built-in hardware and software that controls the functions of a
specific internal or peripheral device (e.g. keyboard controller).
co-processor: A circuit built into the processor that is dedicated to
intensive math calculations.
CPS: Characters Per Second. Typically used to indicate the transmission
speed of a printer.
CPU: Central Processing Unit. The portion of the computer that interprets
and executes instructions.
CRT: Cathode Ray Tube. A vacuum tube in which beams projected on a
fluorescent screen-producing luminous spots. An example is the
television set.
cursor: A small, blinking rectangle or line that indicates the current
position on the display screen.
data: Information that is factual, measurable or statistical that a computer
can process, store, or retrieve.
data bits: A data communications parameter controlling the number of bits
(binary digits) used to make up a byte. If data bits = 7 the computer
can generate 128 unique characters. If data bits = 8 the computer
can generate 256 unique characters.
DC: Direct Current. Electric current that flows in one direction. This type of
power is usually supplied by batteries.
default: The parameter value automatically selected by the system when
you or the program do not provide instructions. Also called a preset
value.
User’s Manual
Glossary-5
Glossary
delete: To remove data from a disk or other data storage device.
Synonymous with erase.
device driver: A program that controls communication between a specific
peripheral device and the computer.
dialog box: A window that accepts user input to make system settings or
record other information.
disk drive: The device that randomly accesses information on a disk and
copies it to the computer’s memory. It also writes data from memory
to the disk. To accomplish these tasks, the unit physically rotates
the disk at high speed past a read-write head.
disk storage: Storing data on magnetic disk. Data is arranged on
concentric tracks much like a phonograph record.
display: A CRT, LCD, or other image producing device used to view
computer output.
documentation: The set of manuals and/or other instructions written for
the users of a computer system or application. Computer system
documentation typically includes procedural and tutorial information
as well as system functions.
DOS: Disk Operating System. See operating system.
driver: A software program, generally part of the operating system, that
controls a specific piece of hardware (frequently a peripheral device
such as a printer or mouse).
DVD-R (+R, -R): A Digital Versatile Disc-Recordable disk can be written
once and read many times. The DVD-R drive uses a laser to read
data from the disc.
DVD-RAM: A Digital Versatile Disc-Random Access Memory is a highcapacity, high performance disc that lets you store large volumes of
data. The DVD-ROM drive uses a laser to read data from the disc.
DVD-R (Dual Layer): A disc having two layers on one side with the DVD-R
storage capacity about 1.8 times larger than before. The DVD-RW
drive uses a laser to read data from the disc.
DVD-ROM: A Digital Versatile Disc-Read Only Memory is a high capacity,
high performance disc suitable for play back of video and other
high-density files. The DVD-ROM drive uses a laser to read data
from the disc.
DVD-RW (+RW, -RW): A Digital Versatile Disc-ReWritable disc can be
rewritten many times.
DVD+R (Double Layer): A disc having two layers on one side with the
DVD+R storage capacity about 1.8 times larger than before. The
DVD-RW drive uses a laser to read data from the disc.
User’s Manual
Glossary-6
Glossary
echo: To send back a reflection of the transmitted data to the sending
device. You can display the information on the screen, or output it to
the printer, or both. When a computer receives back data it
transmitted to a CRT (or other peripheral device) and then
retransmits the data to printer, the printer is said to echo the CRT.
erase: See delete.
escape: 1) A code (ASCII code 27), signaling the computer that what
follows are commands; used with peripheral devices such as
printers and modems.
2) A means of aborting the task currently in progress.
escape guard time: A time before and after an escape code is sent to the
modem which distinguishes between escapes that are part of the
transmitted data, and escapes that are intended as a command to
the modem.
execute: To interpret and execute an instruction.
Extended Capability Port: An industry standard that provides a data
buffer, switchable forward and reverse data transmission, and run
length encoding (RLE) support.
fast infrared: An industry standard that enables cableless infrared serial
data transfer at speeds of up to 4 Mbps.
file: A collection of related information; a file can contain data, programs,
or both.
fingerprint sensor: The fingerprint sensor compares and analyzes the
unique characteristics in a fingerprint.
firmware: A set of instructions built into the hardware which controls and
directs a microprocessor’s activities.
floppy diskette: A removable disk that stores magnetically encoded data.
floppy diskette drive (FDD): An electromechanical device that reads and
writes to floppy diskettes.
Fn-esse: A TOSHIBA utility that lets you assign functions to hot keys.
folder: An icon in Windows used to store documents or other folders.
format: The process of readying a blank disk for its first use. Formatting
establishes the structure of the disk that the operating system
expects before it writes files or programs onto the disk.
function keys: The keys labeled F1 through F12 that tell the computer to
perform certain functions.
gigabyte (GB): A unit of data storage equal to 1024 megabytes. See also
megabyte.
User’s Manual
Glossary-7
Glossary
graphics: Drawings, pictures, or other images, such as charts or graphs,
to present information.
hard disk: A non-removable disk usually referred to as drive C. The
factory installs this disk and only a trained engineer can remove it
for servicing. Also called fixed disk.
hard disk drive (HDD): An electromechanical device that reads and writes
a hard disk. See also hard disk.
hardware: The physical electronic and mechanical components of a
computer system: typically, the computer itself, external disk drives,
etc. See also software and firmware.
hertz: A unit of wave frequency that equals one cycle per second.
hexadecimal: The base 16 numbering system composed of the digits 0
through 9 and the letters A, B, C, D, E, and F.
host computer: The computer that controls, regulates, and transmits
information to a device or another computer.
hot key: The computer’s feature in which certain keys in combination with
the extended function key, FN, can be used to set system
parameters, such as speaker volume.
HW Setup: A TOSHIBA utility that lets you set the parameters for various
hardware components.
icon: A small graphic image displayed on the screen or in the indicator
panel. In Windows, an icon represents an object that the user can
manipulate.
i.LINK (IEEE1394): This port enables high-speed data transfer directly
from external devices such as digital video cameras.
input: The data or instructions you provide to a computer, communication
device or other peripheral device from the keyboard or external or
internal storage devices. The data sent (or output) by the sending
computer is input for the receiving computer.
instruction: Statements or commands that specify how to perform a
particular task.
interface: 1) Hardware and/or software components of a system used
specifically to connect one system or device to another.
2) To physically connect one system or device to another to
exchange information.
3) The point of contact between user, the computer, and the
program, for example, the keyboard or a menu.
interrupt request: A signal that gives a component access to the
processor.
I/O: Input/output. Refers to acceptance and transfer of data to and from a
computer.
User’s Manual
Glossary-8
Glossary
I/O devices: Equipment used to communicate with the computer and
transfer data to and from it.
jumper: A small clip or wire that allows you to change the hardware
characteristics by electrically connecting two points of a circuit.
K: Taken from the Greek word kilo, meaning 1000; often used as
equivalent to 1024, or 2 raised to the 10th power. See also byte and
kilobyte.
KB: See kilobyte.
keyboard: An input device containing switches that are activated by
manually pressing marked keys. Each keystroke activates a switch
that transmits a specific code to the computer. For each key, the
transmitted code is, in turn, representative of the (ASCII) character
marked on the key.
kilobyte (KB): A unit of data storage equal to 1024 bytes. See also byte
and megabyte.
level 2 cache: See cache memory.
Light Emitting Diode (LED): A semiconductor device that emits light
when a current is applied.
Liquid Crystal Display (LCD): Liquid crystal sealed between two sheets
of glass coated with transparent conducting material. The viewingside coating is etched into character forming segments with leads
that extend to the edge of the glass. Applying a voltage between the
glass sheets alters the brightness of the liquid crystal.
LSI: Large Scale Integration.
1) A technology that allows the inclusion of up to 100,000 simple
logic gates on a single chip.
2) An integrated circuit that uses large scale integration.
main board: See motherboard.
megabyte (MB): A unit of data storage equal to 1024 kilobytes. See also
kilobyte.
megahertz: A unit of wave frequency that equals 1 million cycles per
second. See also hertz.
menu: A software interface that displays a list of options on the screen.
Also called a screen.
User’s Manual
Glossary-9
Glossary
microprocessor: A hardware component contained in a single integrated
circuit that carries out instructions. Also called the central
processing unit (CPU), one of the main parts of the computer.
mode: A method of operation, for example, the Boot Mode, Sleep Mode or
the Hibernation Mode.
modem: Derived from modulator/demodulator, a device that converts
(modulates) digital data for transmission over telephone lines and
then converts modulated data (demodulates) to digital format where
received.
monitor: A device that uses rows and columns of pixels to display
alphanumeric characters or graphic images. See also CRT.
motherboard: A name sometimes used to refer to the main printed circuit
board in processing equipment. It usually contains integrated
circuits that perform the processor’s basic functions and provides
connectors for adding other boards that perform special functions.
Sometimes called a main board.
MP3: An audio compression standard that enables high-quality
transmission and real-time playback of sound files.
non-system disk: A formatted floppy diskette you can use to store
programs and data but you cannot use to start the computer. See
system disk.
nonvolatile memory: Memory, usually read-only (ROM), that is capable
of permanently storing information. Turning the computer’s power
off does not alter data stored in nonvolatile memory.
numeric keypad overlay: A feature that allows you to use certain keys on
the keyboard to perform numeric entry, or to control cursor and
page movement.
OCR: Optical Character Recognition (reader). A technique or device that
uses laser or visible light to identify characters and input them into a
storage device.
online state: A functional state of a peripheral device when it is ready to
receive or transmit data.
operating system: A group of programs that controls the basic operation
of a computer. Operating system functions include interpreting
programs, creating data files, and controlling the transmission and
receipt (input/output) of data to and from memory and peripheral
devices.
output: The results of a computer operation. Output commonly indicates
data.
1) printed on paper, 2) displayed at a terminal, 3) sent through the
serial port of internal modem, or 4) stored on some magnetic media.
User’s Manual
Glossary-10
Glossary
parity: 1) The symmetrical relationship between two parameter values
(integers) both of which are either on or off; odd or even; 0 or 1.
2) In serial communications, an error detection bit that is added to a
group of data bits making the sum of the bits even or odd. Parity can
be set to none, odd, or even.
password: A unique string of characters used to identify a specific user.
The computer provides various levels of password protection such
as user and supervisor.
pel: The smallest area of the display that can be addressed by software.
Equal in size to a pixel or group of pixels. See pixel.
peripheral component interconnect: An industry standard 32-bit bus.
peripheral device: An I/O device that is external to the central processor
and/or main memory such as a printer or a mouse.
pixel: A picture element. The smallest dot that can be made on a display
or printer. Also called a pel.
plug and play: A capability with Windows that enables the system to
automatically recognize connections of external devices and make
the necessary configurations in the computer.
port: The electrical connection through which the computer sends and
receives data to and from devices or other computers.
Power Saver: A TOSHIBA utility that lets you set the parameters for
various power-saving functions.
printed circuit board (PCB): A hardware component of a processor to
which integrated circuits and other components are attached. The
board itself is typically flat and rectangular, and constructed of
fiberglass, to form the attachment surface.
program: A set of instructions a computer can execute that enables it to
achieve a desired result. See also application.
prompt: A message the computer provides indicating it is ready for or
requires information or an action from you.
Radio frequency interference (RFI) shield: A metal shield enclosing the
printed circuit boards of the printer or computer to prevent radio and
TV interference. All computer equipment generates radio frequency
signals. The FCC regulates the amount of signals a computing
device can allow past its shielding. A Class A device is sufficient for
office use. Class B provides a more stringent classification for home
equipment use. TOSHIBA portable computers comply with Class B
computing device regulations.
Random Access Memory (RAM): High speed memory within the
computer circuitry that can be read or written to.
restart: Resetting a computer without turning it off (also called "warm boot"
or "soft reset"). See also boot.
User’s Manual
Glossary-11
Glossary
RGB: Red, green, and blue. A device that uses three input signals, each
activating an electron gun for a primary additive color (red, green,
and blue) or port for using such a device. See also CRT.
RJ45: A modular LAN jack.
ROM: Read Only Memory: A nonvolatile memory chip manufactured to
contain information that controls the computer’s basic operation.
You cannot access or change information stored in ROM.
SCSI: Small Computer System Interface is an industry standard interface
for connection of a variety of peripheral devices.
SD/SDHC Card: Secure Digital cards are flash memory widely used in a
variety of digital devices such as digital cameras and Personal
Digital Assistants.
serial communications: A communications technique that uses as few as
two interconnecting wires to send bits one after another.
serial interface: Refer to a type of information exchange that transmits
information sequentially, one bit at a time.
SIO: Serial Input/Output. The electronic methodology used in serial data
transmission.
soft key: Key combinations that emulate keys on the IBM keyboard,
change some configuration options, stop program execution, and
access the numeric keypad overlay.
software: The set of programs, procedures and related documentation
associated with a computer system. Specifically refers to computer
programs that direct and control the computer system’s activities.
See also hardware.
stop bit: One or more bits of a byte that follow the transmitted character or
group codes in asynchronous serial communications.
subpixel: Three elements, one red, one green and blue (RGB), that make
up a pixel on the color LCD. The computer sets subpixels
independently, each may emit a different degree of brightness. See
also pixel.
synchronous: Having a constant time interval between successive bits,
characters or events.
system disk: A disk that has been formatted with an operating system.
You can boot a computer using a system disk. Also called an
operating system disk or bootable disk.
terminal: A typewriter-like keyboard and CRT display screen connected to
the computer for data input/output.
TFT display: A liquid crystal display (LCD) made from an array of liquid
crystal cells using active-matrix technology with thin film transistor
(TFT) to drive each cell.
User’s Manual
Glossary-12
Glossary
Touch Pad: A pointing device integrated into the TOSHIBA computer
palm rest.
TTL: Transistor-transistor logic. A logic circuit design that uses switching
transistors for gates and storage.
Universal Serial Bus: This serial interface lets you communicate with
several devices connected in a chain to a single port on the
computer.
VGA: Video Graphics Array is an industry standard video adaptor that lets
you run any popular software.
volatile memory: Random access memory (RAM) that stores information
as long as power is supplied to the computer.
warm start: Restarting or resetting a computer without turning it off.
window: A portion of the screen that can display its own application,
document or dialog box. Often used to mean a Microsoft Windows
window.
Wireless LAN: Local Area Network (LAN) through wireless
communication.
Wireless WAN: Wide Area Network (WAN) through wireless
communication.
write protection: A method for protecting a floppy diskette from accidental
erasure.
User’s Manual
Glossary-13
Index
AC adaptor 3-3
additional 3-45
connecting 1-4
ASCII characters 5-7
Battery
charging 6-7
extending life 6-10
indicator 2-13, 6-4
monitoring capacity 6-8
real time clock 3-3, 6-6
save mode 3-7
types 6-5
Battery pack 2-8, 3-2
additional 3-45
replacing 6-10
BIOS Setup 7-8
Bluetooth 3-5, 4-48
Bluetooth Stack for Windows by
Toshiba 3-11
problems 8-24
Boot Priority 7-3
Bridge media slot 2-4, 3-18
indicator 2-14
using 3-18
Cleaning the computer 4-52
Cooling vents 2-3
DC IN indicator 2-13, 6-4
Display 3-4
automatic power off 3-7
User’s Manual
brightness down 5-4
brightness up 5-4
controller B-1
hinge 2-11
opening 1-6
screen 2-10
Docking port 2-7
Documentation list 1-2
DVD Super Multi drive
problems 8-9
using 4-29
writing 4-33
Equipment checklist 1-1
External monitor 2-6, 3-37
problems 8-21
Fingerprint Sensor
location 2-9
problems 8-16
using 4-17
Floppy diskette care 4-40
FN + 1 (TOSHIBA Zooming Utility reduce)
5-5
FN + 2 (TOSHIBA Zooming Utility enlarge)
5-5
FN + ENTER 5-3
FN + ESC (Mute) 5-3
FN + F1 (Lock) 5-3
FN + F10 (Arrow Mode) 5-3
FN + F11 (Numeric Mode) 5-3
FN + F12 (ScrLock) 5-3
FN + F2 (Power Plan) 5-3
FN + F3 (Sleep) 5-4
Index-1
Index
FN + F4 (Hibernate) 5-4
FN + F5 (Output) 5-4
FN + F6 (Brightness Down) 5-4
FN + F7 (Brightness Up) 5-4
FN + F8 (Wireless) 5-4
FN + F9 (Touch Pad) 5-4
FN + space (Zoom) 5-4
FN + Tab (ODD) 5-5
Function keys 5-2
Graphics controller 3-4
Hard disk drive 3-3
automatic power off 3-7
installing 3-34
removing 3-33
Hard Disk Drive indicator 2-13
HDD Kit (Serial-ATA) 3-33, 3-45
HDD Protection 4-53
Heat dispersal 3-8, 4-55
Hibernation Mode 1-10, 3-8
Hot keys 3-7, 5-3
Brightness Down 5-4
Brightness Up 5-4
Hibernate 5-4
Lock 5-3
Mute 5-3
ODD 5-5
Output 5-4
Power Plan 5-3
Sleep 5-4
TOSHIBA Zooming Utility (enlarge)
5-5
TOSHIBA Zooming Utility (reduce) 5-5
Touch Pad 5-4
Wireless 5-4
Zoom 5-4
HW Setup
accessing 7-1
Boot priority 7-3
CPU 7-6
device config 7-7
display 7-2
general 7-2
keyboard 7-5
User’s Manual
LAN 7-6
USB 7-7
window 7-1
i.LINK 2-2, 3-41
connecting 3-42
disconnecting 3-42
precautions 3-41
problems 8-22
Indicators 2-13
Keyboard 5-1
emulating enhanced keyboard 5-2
FN Sticky key 5-5
Function keys F1...F12 5-2
Hot keys 5-3
problems 8-7
typewriter keys 5-1
Windows special keys 5-5
Keypad overlay 3-7
Arrow Mode 5-6
Numeric Mode 5-6
temporarily using normal keyboard
(overlay on) 5-7
temporarily using overlay (overlay off)
5-7
turning on the overlays 5-6
LAN 3-5, 4-50
active indicator 2-6
cable types 4-50
connecting 4-51
disconnecting 4-52
jack 2-6
Link indicator 2-6
problems 8-23
Media care 4-40
Card care 3-20
CD/DVDs 4-40
Floppy diskettes 4-40
Memory card care 3-21
Memory 3-2
Index-2
Index
additional 3-45
installing 3-24, 3-29
problems 8-19
removing 3-28, 3-31
Memory Stick 3-19
problems 8-12
Modem 3-5, 4-43
connecting 4-45
disconnecting 4-46
jack 2-5
problems 8-22
properties menu 4-44
region selection 4-44
Moving the computer 4-52
MultiMediaCard 3-19
problems 8-13
Password
power on 3-7
problems 8-7
Starting the computer by 6-17
Supervisor 6-17
user 6-15
PC Card 3-15
inserting 3-15
problems 8-11
removing 3-16
Pointing Device
problems 8-13
Tablet PC Pen 4-3
Touch Pad 2-11, 4-2
Touch Pad control buttons 2-11, 4-2
Touch Pad location 2-9
using 4-1
Power
conditions 6-1
Hibernation Mode 1-10
indicator 2-13, 6-5
panel on/off 3-7, 6-19
Shut Down mode (Boot Mode) 1-7
Sleep Mode 1-8
System Auto Off 6-19
turning off 1-7
turning on 1-7
Problems
AC power 8-5
User’s Manual
Additional memory module 8-19
Analyzing the problem 8-2
Battery 8-5
Bluetooth 8-24
DVD Super Multi drive 8-9
External monitor 8-21
Fingerprint Sensor 8-16
Hard disk drive 8-8
Hardware and system checklist 8-3
i.LINK (IEEE1394) device 8-22
Internal display panel 8-8
Keyboard 8-7
LAN 8-23
Memory Stick 8-12
Modem 8-22
MultiMediaCard 8-13
Overheating power down 8-4
Password 8-7
PC Card 8-11
Pointing device 8-13
Power 8-4
Real Time Clock 8-7
Recovery Discs 8-25
SD/SDHC Card 8-11
Self test 8-4
Smart Card 8-11
Sound system 8-20
System start-up 8-4
TOSHIBA support 8-26
Touch Pad 8-13
USB device 8-17
USB floppy diskette drive 8-10
USB mouse 8-15
Wireless LAN 8-24
xD picture card 8-12
Processor 3-1
Recovery Discs 1-15
problems 8-25
Recovery hard disk drive 1-14
Restarting the computer 1-11
SD/SDHC Card
problems 8-11
Security lock 3-44
Index-3
Index
location 2-3
Sleep Mode 1-8
System automatic 3-7
Slice Expansion Battery 3-45, 6-5
Slice Expansion Battery adaptor 3-45
Smart Card 3-16
inserting 3-17
problems 8-11
removing 3-18
Soft keys
enhanced keyboard 5-2
ENTER 5-3
ScrLock 5-3
Sound system
headphone jack 2-2
microphone 2-12
microphone jack 2-2
problems 8-20
Stereo speakers 2-11
volume control dial 2-2
USB floppy diskette drive
problems 8-10
Video mode B-1
Video RAM 3-2
Volume control dial 2-2
Web Camera 3-5, 4-25
Windows Mobility Center 3-13
Wireless communication 4-47
indicator 2-14, 4-50
Wireless communication switch 2-1, 4-49
Wireless LAN 3-6, 4-47
problems 8-24
Wireless WAN 3-6
xD picture card 3-19
problems 8-12
TOSHIBA Assist 3-12
TOSHIBA Assist button 3-6
TOSHIBA ConfigFree 3-12
TOSHIBA Disc Creator 3-12, 4-38
TOSHIBA DVD-RAM Utility 3-12
TOSHIBA Express Port Replicator 3-43,
3-46
TOSHIBA HDD Protection 3-8, 4-53
TOSHIBA PC Diagnostic Tool 3-9
TOSHIBA Presentation button 3-6
TOSHIBA SD Memory Boot Utility 3-11
TOSHIBA SD Memory Card Format 3-11
TOSHIBA Value Added Package 3-9
TOSHIBA Zooming Utility 3-9
Ultra Slim Bay 2-5
changing modules 4-26
HDD Adaptor 3-36
location of slot 2-4
options 3-46
USB 3-38
USB device
problems 8-17
USB FDD Kit 3-38
User’s Manual
Index-4

---

Source Exif Data:

File Type                       : PDF
File Type Extension             : pdf
MIME Type                       : application/pdf
PDF Version                     : 1.3
Linearized                      : No
Encryption                      : Standard V1.2 (40-bit)
User Access                     : Print, Fill forms, Extract, Assemble, Print high-res
Create Date                     : 2007:10:26 13:28:25-07:00
Modify Date                     : 2007:10:26 13:28:25-07:00
Page Count                      : 282
Creation Date                   : 2007:10:26 20:28:25Z
Mod Date                        : 2007:10:26 20:28:25Z
Producer                        : Acrobat Distiller 5.0.5 (Windows)
Author                          : sradecki
Metadata Date                   : 2007:10:26 20:28:25Z
Creator                         : sradecki
Title                           : Manual.pdf

EXIF Metadata provided by EXIF.tools